JP2024050963A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in the game. [Solution] A gaming ball launched in a first direction flows down a first flow path, and a gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction flows down a second flow path. A ball entry means is provided at a position where at least a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path and a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter. A predetermined benefit is granted by a benefit granting means based on a gaming ball entering the ball entry means. The second flow path is configured so that the period until a gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until a gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means. This has the effect of increasing a player's interest in the game. [Selected Figure] Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning hole results in a winning result. In such gaming machines, a player is awarded a certain gaming value by getting a gaming ball to enter a large winning hole that opens during the winning state, so that the player can play the game with the hope of winning as one of his/her pleasures.

Patent No. 2514417

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the winning state can sometimes feel like a simple task of continuously firing game balls in a set direction aiming at the big prize hole, making it difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in playing the game.

To achieve this objective, the gaming machine described in claim 1 comprises a first flow path through which a gaming ball launched in a first direction can flow, a second flow path through which a gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can flow, a ball entry means provided at a position where at least a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path and a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and a bonus granting means that grants a predetermined bonus based on a gaming ball entering the ball entry means, and the second flow path is configured so that the period until a gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until a gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means.

The gaming machine described in claim 2 is the gaming machine described in claim 1, in which the ball entry means is disposed at a position where the proportion of game balls that flow down the second flow path entering the ball is higher than the proportion of game balls that flow down the first flow path entering the ball.

The gaming machine described in claim 3 is the gaming machine described in claim 1 or 2, and is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path.

The gaming machine described in claim 4 is a gaming machine described in any one of claims 1 to 3, and includes a variable means that can change the ball entry means between a first position where the ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the ball than the first position, a discrimination means that executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a variable game execution means that executes a variable game in which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means.

The gaming machine of claim 5 is the gaming machine of claim 4, which is equipped with a launching means capable of launching game balls in the first direction and the second direction at a launching interval equal to or greater than a specific launching interval, a first variable control means for varying the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined number of game balls or more entering the ball entry means after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position during the execution of the variable game, and a second variable control means for varying the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific period having elapsed since the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position during the execution of the variable game, and the specific period is at least longer than the period from the start of launching game balls in the second direction to the end of the specific number of game balls launched in the second direction at the specific launching interval flowing down the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 1, the gaming machine is provided with a first flow path through which a gaming ball launched in a first direction can flow, a second flow path through which a gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can flow, a ball entry means provided at a position where at least a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path and a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and a bonus granting means that grants a predetermined bonus based on a gaming ball entering the ball entry means, and the second flow path is configured so that the period until a gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until a gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in claim 1, the ball entry means is disposed at a position where the proportion of game balls that flow down the second flow path entering the ball is higher than the proportion of game balls that flow down the first flow path entering the ball.

As a result, when the game ball flows down the first flow path, the time it takes to reach the ball entry means is shorter, but it becomes more difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, when the game ball flows down the second flow path, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball entry means, but it takes longer to reach the ball entry means. This has the effect of allowing the player to select the launch direction that suits their own preferences.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in claim 1 or 2, since it is equipped with a deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path, it has the effect of more reliably making the period until a gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means longer than the period until a gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of claims 1 to 3, the machine is provided with a variable means capable of changing the ball entry means between a first position where the ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, a discrimination means for discriminating based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means.

This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game in the hope that a specific judgment result will be obtained through the judgment by the judgment means.

According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 4, the gaming machine is provided with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls in the first direction and the second direction at a launching interval equal to or greater than a specific launching interval, a first variable control means for varying the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined number of gaming balls or more entering the ball entry means after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position during the execution of the variable game, and a second variable control means for varying the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific period having elapsed since the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position during the execution of the variable game, and the specific period is at least longer than the period from the start of launching gaming balls in the second direction to the end of the specific number of gaming balls launched in the second direction at the specific launching interval flowing down the second flow path.

As a result, when game balls are launched in the second direction during variable play, a specific number of game balls can be made to enter the ball entry means before the specific period has elapsed, which has the effect of preventing the player from incurring losses.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display area of a three-pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on a third pattern display device in the first embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of the display mode of a continuous preview performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of the display mode of a continuous preview performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. This figure shows a schematic diagram of the change over time in the presentation state in the first embodiment from when it is decided to execute a continuous preview presentation when there are two reserved balls, until the continuous preview presentation ends and one variable display is executed. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot variation pattern table in the first embodiment, (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the miss (normal) variation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (d) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the miss (high probability) variation pattern table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of various counters according to the first embodiment. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A diagram showing the contents of the advance notice selection table in the first embodiment. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an overview of the logical sum data generated when the advance lottery prohibition state is lifted in the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a first embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on. 1A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface A, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a stop command process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing a preview performance setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing a stop type command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing an opening command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing a number of rounds command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing a rear image change command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing an error command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a random number range selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the winning random number range pattern table. 10A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the point selection table in the second embodiment, FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the secondary random number table in the second embodiment, and FIG. 13C is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the selection table for use when released in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the start winning processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the random number range command processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop command process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. A flowchart showing the preview performance setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the value of the high expectation type flag in the third embodiment and the expectation of the lottery result. A flowchart showing the winning information command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop command process 3 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. A flowchart showing the preview performance setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the change over time in the lottery state after a jackpot is won in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a state command processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning information command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a release determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of a voice lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of a voice lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the ending selection table in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a state command process 5 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing an ending command processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. A front view of the detour device in the fifth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the display mode during a jackpot displayed on the third pattern display device in the fifth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. (a) is a front oblique view showing the state in which the opening and closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment is closed, and (b) is a front oblique view showing the state in which the opening and closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment is in the process of being opened. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the opening and closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment in a completely open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the opening and closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment in a completely closed state. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the change over time in the state of the right specific winning port when an opening pattern that allows for a V win is set in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the change over time in the state of the right specific winning port 650a when an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V win is set in the sixth embodiment. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing in more detail the state of the opening and closing door during one opening period when an opening pattern allowing a V prize to be won is set in the sixth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device at the start of one round of a jackpot in which an opening pattern that can result in a V win is set in the sixth embodiment. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a sixth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing an abnormality process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment. A figure showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device during a special probability state and a time-saving state displayed by the third pattern display device in the seventh embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the start winning processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the seventh embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in a first modified example of the seventh embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in a second modified example of the seventh embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in a third modified example of the seventh embodiment.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be detached from the back side. A pinball game is played by game balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches game balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at approximately the center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing game balls that juts out forward and is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides game balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a. In addition, a frame button 22 is provided above the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) described below, or when changing the content of the super reach performance.

The stage refers to a presentation mode that provides uniformity to the various presentations displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and this pachinko machine 10 has two stages, the "Sandy Stage" and the "Deep Sea Stage". The various presentations, such as the variable presentation and reach presentation that are performed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when no variable presentation is being performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is repeatedly changed in the order of "Sandy Stage" → "Deep Sea Stage" → "Sandy Stage" → .... Also, immediately after the power is turned on, the "Sandy Stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third pattern display device 81 is configured such that when a normal reach presentation is started, and the normal reach is to be developed into a super reach, a selection screen for the super reach presentation mode is displayed during the normal reach, and if the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the presentation content during the super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks by lighting or blinking the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

The ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, game balls are lent out in response to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where game balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is arranged, which is operated by the player to shoot game balls into the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51, there are built-in touch sensors 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, push-button-type shooting stop switch 51b that stops the launching of game balls while it is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the control handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the game ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes according to the amount of rotation of the control handle 51, thereby shooting the game ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Also, when the control handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the shot stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower part of the lower tray 50 when viewed from the front, for operating when discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the game balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is usually performed with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the game balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails, windmills and rails 61, 62 for guiding balls, a general winning opening 63, a first ball opening 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a wooden base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. In addition, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Below, the configuration of the game board 13 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 surround the front periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area on the front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the game balls. The game area is an approximately circular area (an area where winning holes and the like are arranged and where the released game balls flow down) that is partitioned on the front of the game board 13 and formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the arc member 70.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2), which prevents the game balls once guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the game ball, and the game ball launched with a predetermined force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back to the center while reducing its force. In addition, between the tip of the lower right side of the inner rail 61 and the tip of the upper right side of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc on the inner side connecting the rails is driven into the base plate 60 and fixed.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and when a game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery for a special symbol performed for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, a judgment is made as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot is also determined. When a special symbol is a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a special game state, and the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 game balls have entered), and this opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large number of game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, and a larger number of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of jackpots for special symbols: "jackpot A" and "jackpot B." After the special game state ends, the player is given a gaming value (game value) according to the jackpot type as added value after the jackpot ends.

When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts displaying the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 7 to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol showing the result of the drawing is displayed stationary. If a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is displaying the variable display, the number of balls entering is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display by the first symbol display device 37 ends, if there are still reserved balls remaining for the first ball entrance 64, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. The specific winning port 65a, which opens and closes when the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the special game state, is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits the game ball in an attempt to make it enter the specific winning hole 65a, so many game balls also enter the first ball entry hole 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry hole 64 will be at its maximum (4 times).

Meanwhile, in the lottery for the normal symbol that is conducted when a gaming ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, a determination is made as to whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol. When a normal symbol is a winning symbol, the electric device 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), making it easier for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. In other words, when a normal symbol is a winning symbol, it becomes easier for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, it becomes easier to draw a lottery for the special symbol.

When a normal pattern (second pattern) is drawn, the second pattern display device 83 starts displaying the normal pattern in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 or 30 seconds) has elapsed, the normal pattern indicating the lottery result is displayed stationary. If a game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being displayed on the second pattern display device 83, the number of passes is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and is also shown by the second pattern reserved lamp 84. When the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, if there are reserved balls remaining for the normal ball entrance 67, the next normal pattern is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery starts.

As mentioned above, there are two types of jackpots for special symbols: "jackpot A" and "jackpot B". When "jackpot A" or "jackpot B" occurs, the game enters a special game state with 16 rounds (16R jackpot). When the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a high probability state for special symbols (special symbol probability change) as an added value after the jackpot ends. This high probability state for special symbols continues until the next jackpot for a special symbol. On the other hand, after "jackpot B" ends, the winning probability for normal symbols increases as an added value until 100 special symbol lotteries have been completed.

Here, "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of winning with special symbols is increased, that is, a so-called probability state of special symbols (during special symbol probability change), in other words, a game state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state (16R jackpot). In contrast, when there is no "high probability state of special symbols", it is called a "low probability state of special symbols", which indicates a state in which the probability of winning is lower than in the probability change state of special symbols, that is, the probability of winning with special symbols is normal (normal state of special symbols). In addition, "time-saving state of normal symbols" (during time-saving state of normal symbols) refers to a game state in which the probability of winning with normal symbols is increased and it is easy for a game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. In contrast, when there is no "time-saving state of normal symbols", it is called a "normal state of normal symbols", which indicates a state in which the probability of winning with normal symbols is normal (a state in which the probability of winning is lower than during time-saving).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the special symbol jackpot is the same regardless of the type of jackpot, and the "high probability state of special symbols" or the "time-saving state of normal symbols" after the jackpot ends is changed depending on the type of jackpot. In contrast, the number of rounds may be changed depending on the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for some types of jackpots. In addition, for example, the period during which the "time-saving state of normal symbols" is entered may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. In addition, as the time-saving state of normal symbols, the time for which the electric device 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened may be lengthened, or the number of times the electric device 64a is opened for one hit of a normal symbol may be increased.

In the upper right corner of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right corner of FIG. 2), a first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") 37a as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display 37b. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a change display by indicating whether or not a lottery for a special symbol performed in conjunction with a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning) is being performed, indicate a special symbol (first symbol) according to the lottery result for the special symbol as a stop symbol after the change is completed, and indicate the number of reserved balls, which is the number of game balls (reserved balls) that have not yet been changed among the game balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, by lighting up.

If a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first pattern display device 37 is displaying a changing special pattern (first pattern), the number of balls that enter is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also by the third pattern display device 81. Note that in this embodiment, the ball is configured to be reserved up to four times for entering the first ball entrance 64, but the maximum number of reserved times is not limited to four times, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times).

The seven-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different light color (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these light colors makes it possible to display various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (such as a high probability state for special symbols or a time-saving state for normal symbols) with a small number of LEDs. The LEDs 37a not only show whether the special symbol lottery result as the symbol to stop after the fluctuation has ended is a jackpot or not, but also show a special symbol (first symbol) according to the type of jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) if it is a jackpot.

The game area is also provided with a number of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters. A variable display device unit 80 is also provided in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 made up of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 made up of LEDs. A center frame 86 is provided in this variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 displays decoratively in accordance with the display of the first pattern display device 37. For example, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), this triggers the first pattern display device 37 to display a varying special pattern (first pattern). Furthermore, the third pattern display device 81 displays a varying third pattern corresponding to the varying special pattern in synchronization with the varying special pattern.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three pattern rows, left, center, and right, are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of multiple patterns, and these patterns are scrolled vertically for each pattern row, so that the third pattern is variably displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. In this embodiment, the game status is displayed in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 by the first pattern display device 37, while the third pattern display device 81 displays decoratively according to the display of the first pattern display device 37. Note that the third pattern display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

Now, referring to FIG. 4, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The symbols, which are a type of picture displayed on the third symbol display device 81, are composed of nine main symbols, each numbered "1" to "9," and a sub-symbol consisting of a shell-shaped picture. More specifically, the main symbols are composed of nine character symbols, such as an octopus, each numbered "1" to "9." In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are lined up, and the jackpot occurs after the variable display has ended. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a miss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not lined up.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts, top and bottom, with approximately 5/6 of the top being the main display area Dm which displays the third pattern in a variable manner, and the remaining 1/6 of the bottom being the secondary display area Ds which displays the reserved ball count pattern indicating the number of reserved balls, preview characters, etc.

The display screen (display area) of the main display area Dm has three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 set as multiple display areas: an upper row, an intermediate row, and a lower row. In the lower pattern row Z3, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each of the main patterns.

In other words, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. In contrast, the middle pattern row Z2 has nine main symbols from "1" to "9" arranged in ascending numerical order, with a main symbol of "4" additionally arranged between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1", with one sub-symbol between each of these main symbols. In other words, the middle pattern row Z2 alone is composed of 20 symbols, consisting of 10 main symbols and 10 sub-symbols. Then, on the display screen, the symbols of each of these pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed cyclically, changing as if scrolling in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), three symbols are displayed in each symbol row in the main display area Dm, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3×3 format. The display screen also has five active lines, namely the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5 (see FIG. 4(a)). The display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. If the display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends with a combination of symbols with the same number on any of the active lines, a jackpot has occurred and a jackpot video is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "normal symbols." When "jackpot B," a 16R normal jackpot, occurs, a combination of the same normal symbols is displayed. Also, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "variable symbols." When a combination of the same variable symbols is displayed, "jackpot A," a 16R variable jackpot, occurs. In some cases when "jackpot A" occurs, a performance in which the same combination of normal symbols is displayed temporarily and then the normal symbols are changed to variable symbols (so-called promotion performance) is executed. This allows the player to continue to have expectations for a variable jackpot even when the normal symbols are lined up (or are likely to be lined up).

The manner in which the patterns are displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the variable display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a configuration in which only numbers are displayed in a variable manner as patterns may be used.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first winning hole 64 while the third pattern display device 81 (first pattern display device 37) is displaying a variable display, the number of balls that enter is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also by the third pattern display device 81. In the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81, one reserved ball number pattern (a "○" pattern) is displayed for each reserved ball, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed. In other words, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four balls. In addition, when no reserved ball number pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is zero, that is, there are no reserved balls. In the example of FIG. 4(b), an example is shown in which two reserved ball number patterns are displayed, indicating that the number of reserved balls is two.

In this embodiment, the balls entering the first winning slot 64 are configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). Also, instead of displaying the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as numbers on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be displayed in different forms (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the number being the maximum number of reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of reserved lamps that are lit.

Next, referring to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, the continuous preview performance, which is one type of display performance in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, will be described. The continuous preview performance is a performance in which the same type of preview performance is executed over multiple consecutive variable displays. When a new start winning is detected for the first ball entrance 64, whether or not this continuous preview performance can be executed is determined. When it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance, it is executed over the variable display based on the reserved balls at the time when the new start winning is detected, and the variable display based on the new start winning. Note that, as will be described in detail later, the successive preview performance is determined more frequently when the lottery result for the new start winning is a jackpot than when it is a miss. Therefore, when the continuous preview performance is executed, the player can have a sense of expectation of a jackpot.

5(a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the variable display executed based on the reserved ball other than the last reserved ball executed among the reserved balls for which the consecutive preview performance is set. FIG. 5(a) shows a state in which the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are displayed stationary, and the middle pattern row Z2 is changing. As shown in FIG. 5(a), during the execution of the consecutive preview performance, the third pattern with the same number is displayed stationary in the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3. In the example of FIG. 5(a), the main pattern with the number "3" is displayed in the center of the upper pattern row Z1 and on the right side of the lower pattern row Z2, respectively. Also, as shown in FIG. 5(a), the main pattern with the same number is displayed in a manner in which its periphery is illuminated (a manner different from other third patterns). This allows the player to easily recognize that the consecutive preview performance is being executed. Hereinafter, the manner in which the periphery of the main pattern is illuminated is referred to as the "aura-covered manner".

As shown in FIG. 5(b), when the continuous preview performance is being performed, even if the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, the main symbol with the number "3" in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed with an aura around it. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for a jackpot (the reserved balls containing the lottery result corresponding to a jackpot) even if the displayed symbol combination is a losing combination. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

6 is a diagram showing the display mode when the last variable display in the continuous preview performance is being executed. As shown in FIG. 6(a), when the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are stopped and displayed in the last variable display of the continuous preview performance, the main pattern with the same number is stopped and displayed on one of the effective lines, and the main pattern with the same number is displayed in an aura-like manner. In the example of FIG. 6(a), a case is illustrated in which the main pattern with the number "3" is stopped and displayed on each of the effective lines L4. This state in which the pattern row of 1 (middle pattern row Z2) is changing and the main pattern with the same number is stopped and displayed on the effective line is called a reach state. In this first embodiment, the reach state is always generated in the last variable display of the continuous preview performance. In other words, the start of the continuous preview performance can be determined only when the new start winning is a lottery result corresponding to the variable display accompanied by the reach state. This configuration allows the player to recognize that at least a reach state will occur when the continuous preview performance begins, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation for a big win.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), when a reach state occurs, a display area HR1 having a horizontally elongated, substantially rectangular shape is formed in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm, and the words "Reach!!!" are displayed in the display area HR1. The display content of this display area HR1 allows the player to more easily understand that a reach state has occurred.

6(b) shows an example of a display mode in which the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the last variable display of the consecutive preview performance, and a jackpot is announced. When a jackpot is announced in the consecutive preview performance, the main symbols with the same number as the main symbols with an aura that are displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed in a stopped state on the active line on which the main symbols that are already displayed in a stopped state are arranged. In other words, an effect is executed in which the main symbols with the same number and the aura are aligned on the active line 1. FIG. 6(b) shows an example in which the main symbols with the number "3" are aligned on the active line L4. By aligning three main symbols with the same number on the active line, the player can easily understand that a jackpot has been won. In addition, the display area HR1 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm displays the word "Congratulations!!" to congratulate the player on the jackpot. This can give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

In the first embodiment, in each variable display in which a continuous preview performance is set, the main symbols displayed with an aura are all configured to have the same number attached. In other words, if a main symbol with the number "3" attached is displayed with an aura attached to each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in the first variable display of the continuous preview performance, the three main symbols with the number "3" attached will be displayed with an aura attached in the second and subsequent variable displays. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the appearance of each variable display in one continuous preview performance.

Although not shown in the figures, there are multiple preview effects executed in each variable display in which a continuous preview effect is set, other than the effect (preview effect A) in which the stopped symbols are changed to a state in which they are surrounded by an aura. Specifically, at least the types of continuous preview effects are provided, such as an effect (preview effect B) in which the main symbols with the same number are frozen when each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stops varying, and an effect (preview effect C) in which the main symbols with the same number are struck by lightning. Preview effect C is the type with the highest expectation of a jackpot, and preview effect A is the type with the lowest expectation of a jackpot. In addition, the expectation of preview effect B is set higher than that of preview effect A and lower than that of preview effect C. In this way, by making the expectation of a jackpot different depending on the type of continuous preview effect, the player can play the game while paying attention to the type of continuous preview effect.

Next, referring to Figure 7, we will explain how the presentation mode changes over time when the consecutive preview performance is set. Figure 7 is a diagram that shows a schematic diagram of how the presentation mode changes over time when there are two reserved balls and a new starting winning is detected and a consecutive preview performance is decided.

As shown in FIG. 7, when a starting winning (winning A in the upper left of FIG. 7) is detected during normal (i.e., continuous preview performance is not set) variable display execution in a state where there are two reserved balls, a judgment is made as to whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance. If the execution of the continuous preview performance is decided based on the judgment based on winning A, the continuous preview performance is set to be executed over the variable time between the variable display based on the two reserved balls reserved at that time and the variable display based on winning A. More specifically, the value of the preview number counter 223i, which indicates the remaining number of consecutive preview performances, is set to 3, which is the number of times the consecutive preview performance is executed, and the value of the preview type flag 223k is updated according to the type of consecutive preview performance determined (any of preview performances A to C). As a result, the consecutive preview performance starts from the next variable display (variable display based on the oldest reserved ball reserved at the time when the execution of the consecutive preview performance is decided).

In addition, in this first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous preview performance is decided, a state in which the lottery for the continuous preview performance is prohibited (hereinafter referred to as the preview lottery prohibition state) is set. This is to prevent (suppress) the continuous preview performance from being determined in duplicate during the execution of the continuous preview performance. In more detail, if the configuration is such that the execution of the continuous preview performance is determined based on the detection of a new start winning even during the execution of the continuous preview performance, the type of the preview performance may be switched in the middle of the continuous preview performance. For example, if a new start winning is detected during the execution of the continuous preview performance in which the preview performance B is set, and the execution of the continuous preview performance is determined, and the execution of the preview performance A is decided, the preview performance B may be terminated and the preview performance A may be switched to from the next change. In other words, there is a possibility that the player will be disappointed by switching from a performance type with a relatively high expectation (preview performance B) to a performance type with a low expectation (preview performance A). In addition, if a new consecutive preview performance of the same performance type is decided while a consecutive preview performance is being performed, the consecutive preview performance will be performed for a number of variable display times greater than the number of reserved balls that were reserved at the start of the consecutive preview performance. This may make it difficult for the player to know which reserved ball they should have hopes for, which may make it difficult to understand the meaning of the performance.

As a method for solving these problems, a method is also conceivable in which the determination of whether or not to execute a consecutive preview performance is permitted only when a start winning corresponding to a jackpot is detected during the execution of a consecutive preview performance that ultimately results in a miss, and the performance type of the additional consecutive preview performance determined is set to have a higher expectation level than the performance type of the consecutive preview performance currently being executed. However, in this case, each time a start winning is detected during the execution of a consecutive preview performance, multiple conditions must be discriminated and control processing must be performed to determine whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performance and the preview type, which creates the problem of the possibility of increasing the processing load.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, from when it is decided to execute the consecutive preview performance, until the end of one variable display (variable display based on the winning B first detected in the preview lottery prohibited state), a new determination of whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performance is prohibited. This makes it possible to prevent the type of performance from switching during the execution of the consecutive preview performance, or the consecutive preview performance from continuing beyond the number of reserved balls at the start of the consecutive preview performance. Furthermore, at the time of the start of the winning, it is only necessary to perform a simple control of determining whether or not the preview lottery is prohibited (whether or not the preview performance prohibition flag 223h, which will be described later, is on), and if the preview lottery is prohibited, skipping the determination process of whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performance, thereby reducing the processing load on the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 7, during the execution of three variable displays in which the continuous preview performance is set, the above-mentioned preview lottery prohibition state is set. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, if a start winning is detected during the execution of the second or third variable display of the continuous preview performance, the judgment process of whether or not the continuous preview performance for the start winning can be executed is skipped. In addition, the preview lottery prohibition state continues during the execution period of the variable display executed for the first time after the continuous preview performance ends, and the preview lottery prohibition state is released when the first variable display ends after the continuous preview performance ends. Therefore, if a new start winning is detected during the execution of the first variable display after the continuous preview performance ends, the judgment process of whether or not the continuous preview performance for the start winning can be executed is skipped in the same way as during the execution of the continuous preview performance. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) the continuous preview performance from starting again immediately after the end of the continuous preview performance, which would otherwise continue endlessly. If the setting of the continuous preview performance is permitted from the first variable display executed after the end of the continuous preview performance, the performance mode will be as if the continuous preview performance continues even after the variable display based on the start winning that triggered the execution of the first continuous preview performance has ended. In this case, it is possible that the player will not know what the continuous preview performance was started on, and there is a risk of misunderstanding the meaning of the continuous preview performance. In other words, there is a risk of misunderstanding that the continuous preview performance is not executed based on the lottery result (variation type) predicted at the time of the start winning, but is merely a performance that changes the performance mode over a fixed number of variable displays. In contrast, in the first embodiment, after the continuous preview performance ends, at least one variable display can be executed in a normal mode (a mode without a preview performance), so that the player can easily understand whether one continuous preview performance has ended. This makes it easier for the player to understand what number of variable displays (which reserved ball) to expect during the execution of the continuous preview performance.

In addition, in this first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is lifted, the lottery results of all reserved balls that are on hold at that time are judged, and based on the judgment result, it is determined whether or not the consecutive advance notice performance can be executed. The judgment method will be described in detail later, but by taking into account the lottery results of all reserved balls and judging whether or not the consecutive advance notice performance can be executed, it is possible to prevent the execution of the consecutive advance notice performance from being set based on reserved balls with a low expectation, even when reserved balls with a higher expectation are on hold.

In other words, if the timing of detecting the starting winning were to be configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance in order from the oldest reserved ball, there is a possibility that the continuous preview performance would be decided without determining the newer reserved balls. In this case, if the reserved ball for which the continuous preview performance has been decided is a lottery result with a relatively low expectation (for example, a reserved ball that will miss after a normal reach) and the newer reserved balls include reserved balls with a high expectation (for example, a reserved ball that will result in a super reach and a jackpot), a situation may occur in which the continuous preview performance is set for the reserved balls with a low expectation, but the continuous preview performance is not set for the reserved balls with a high expectation. This could damage the expectation for the continuous preview performance.

Conversely, if the timing of detecting the starting winning is set to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance in order of the most recent reserved ball, the continuous preview performance may be decided without determining the older reserved ball. In this case, if the reserved ball for which the continuous preview performance is decided is a lottery result with a relatively low expectation (for example, a reserved ball that will miss after a normal reach) and the older reserved balls include a reserved ball with a high expectation (for example, a reserved ball that will result in a super reach and a jackpot), the continuous preview performance will not end with the reserved ball with the high expectation that is executed first, but will continue until the variable display based on the reserved ball with the low expectation is displayed. In other words, there is a risk that the player will get the impression that the continuous preview performance has tapered off.

In contrast to this, in the first embodiment, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the lottery results of all reserved balls are taken into consideration to determine whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice performance, so it is possible to set a continuous advance notice performance that continues until the lottery result with the highest expectation among the reserved balls. This makes it possible to prevent situations such as a continuous advance notice performance being set for a reserved ball with low expectation but not set for a reserved ball with high expectation, or a situation in which a reserved ball with high expectation is consumed in the middle of a continuous advance notice performance, and a reserved ball with low expectation is consumed in the final variable display of the continuous advance notice performance. This makes it possible to execute the continuous advance notice performance in an optimal manner.

In the first embodiment, the advance lottery prohibition state is set from when the execution of the continuous advance notice performance is decided, after the continuous advance notice performance ends, until the first variable display ends, but this is not limited to this. The condition for releasing the advance lottery prohibition state may be set arbitrarily, and for example, the number of variable displays for which the advance lottery prohibition state is set may be increased (for example, to 5 times). By configuring in this way, more normal modes (modes without advance notice performances) of variable displays can be executed between the end of one continuous advance notice performance and the start of the next continuous advance notice performance, so that the player can more reliably recognize whether one continuous advance notice performance has ended or not. In addition, the more the number of variable displays for which the advance lottery prohibition state is set is increased, the fewer the opportunities for determining the continuous advance notice performance, so that the rarity of the continuous advance notice performance can be increased. Therefore, the player can feel that he has seen a rare performance just by the start of the continuous advance notice performance, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the release condition of the advance lottery prohibition state is stipulated by the number of variable displays (until one variable display ends after the end of the continuous advance lottery performance), but the release condition is not necessarily limited to the number of variable displays. For example, the release condition may be determined by the elapsed time after the end of the continuous advance lottery performance. More specifically, the advance lottery prohibition state may be released when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the continuous advance lottery performance. By configuring in this way, even if a player finishes playing when the continuous advance lottery performance ends, if the next player starts playing after the predetermined period has elapsed, the player can play in a state where the advance lottery prohibition state has been released. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the successor player starts playing from the advance lottery prohibition state, and the continuous advance lottery performance can be more enjoyable.

In the first embodiment, the advance lottery prohibition state is set from the end of the continuous advance performance until the end of one variable display, but the advance lottery prohibition state may be released immediately after the end of the continuous advance performance. In this case, the player may be easily able to identify whether or not it is the last variable display of the continuous advance performance from the performance mode. By configuring in this way, the period during which the advance lottery prohibition state is set can be shortened, so that the opportunity to execute the continuous advance performance can be increased. In addition, as a specific example of the performance mode indicating whether or not it is the last variable display of the continuous advance performance, for example, a configuration in which the remaining number of variables of the continuous advance performance is displayed in a countdown may be used. In addition, a display suggesting the end (for example, the word "end") may be displayed in the last variable display, or the same music may be continuously played during the continuous advance performance, and the music may be stopped at the timing when the last variable display in the continuous advance performance ends. In addition, during the execution of the continuous advance performance, a reach state may not occur in the third pattern display device 81 with a variable display other than the last variable display. In other words, while the consecutive preview performance is being performed, the reach state may be displayed to indicate that this is the final variable display of the consecutive preview performance.

Returning to FIG. 2, we will continue with the explanation. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the normal symbol, which is performed when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, is being executed by lighting up, and indicates the normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result for the normal symbol as the stopping symbol after the variable display has ended by lighting up.

More specifically, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol, "○" and "×", are alternately lit each time a game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67. When the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the "○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric device 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is activated (opened) for a predetermined time, so that the first ball entrance 64 is easily entered. The number of times that the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. Four second symbol reservation lamps 84 are provided, the number of the maximum reserved numbers, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The normal pattern (second pattern) change display may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in this embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp 84 may be lit by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the passage of game balls through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to a maximum number of reserved balls being four, as in the first ball entrance 64, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern reserve lamp 84 may not be lit.

A first ball entrance 64 through which a game ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a game ball enters this first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a special pattern is performed by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37. The first ball entrance 64 also serves as one of the prize entrances from which five game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters it.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main control device 110 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on to show the jackpot stop symbol, and the third symbol stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 game balls have been entered).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning hole 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening and closing of the opening plate forward around the lower edge of the opening plate. The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot or does not win. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which the game ball can easily win the specific winning hole 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state that is a special game state.

The left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 are provided with attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is further provided with an outlet 66. Any game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided through the outlet 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with numerous nails to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the game balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also provided.

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out game balls using a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The tank 130 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of game balls. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 8. Fig. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. Note that in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted in only one direction from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to Figures 9 and 10. As shown in Figure 9(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least a first win random number table 202a, a first win type selection table 202b, a second win random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the fixed value data described above.

The first win random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first win random number counter C1, which will be described later. Details will be described later together with the explanation of the first win random number counter C1, but if the value of the first win random number counter C1 obtained based on the start winning matches any of the determination values specified in the first win random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot with a special symbol.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9(b)) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining the jackpot type is stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is specified in correspondence with each jackpot type. Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49" is specified in correspondence with jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 9(b)). Also, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99" is specified in correspondence with jackpot B (see 202b2 in FIG. 9(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is determined, the value of the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 is selected.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 9(c)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 9(c)). Also, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 9(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is obtained based on the passage of the game ball through the normal ball entrance 67, and the second winning random number table 202c are referenced to determine whether or not a normal symbol is a winning symbol.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is specified for each display mode. Details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with an explanation of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special symbols, drawing normal symbols, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, setting the display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display on the third symbol display device 81. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, referring to FIG. 11, the counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to draw special symbols, draw normal symbols, set the display on the first symbol display device 37, set the display on the second symbol display device 83, and set the display on the third symbol display device 81.

The first winning random number counter C1 used for the special pattern drawing and the display settings of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 are used to draw the special pattern, the first winning type counter C2 used to select the big winning type of the special pattern, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the losing special pattern, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for drawing the normal pattern, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 29), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and each of these areas stores the value of the second winning random number counter C4 in accordance with the timing of the game ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 399) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 399 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 399). In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 29).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64. The value of the random number that results in a jackpot for the special symbol is set by the first winning random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table, it is determined that the special symbol has won. In addition, this first winning random number table 202a is divided into two types: one for a low probability of the special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and one for a high probability of the special symbol having a higher probability of winning than the low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot included in each type is set to be different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot changes when the probability of a special symbol is low and when the probability of a special symbol is high.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is judged as a win in each game state in the lottery of the special symbol is set. Specifically, in the case of the special symbol probability state, in the lottery of the special symbol, it is judged whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 9", and if it is "0 to 9", it is judged as a jackpot. Since there are 400 possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 399", and the judgment value for a jackpot is 10 from "0 to 9", the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol during the probability state of the special symbol is 1/40 (10/400). Also, in the case of the special symbol low probability state, it is judged whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is judged as a jackpot. The first winning random number counter C1 can have 400 possible values between 0 and 399, and only one jackpot value, 0, is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol in a low probability state is 1/400.

In this embodiment, the random number value for the jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random number value for the jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability are set so that they do not overlap. If there is a value that is always used as the random number value for the jackpot regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, that random number value may be input from outside, making it easier to win a jackpot illegally. In contrast, as in this embodiment, the random number value for the jackpot is changed depending on the state (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state for the special pattern or a low probability state for the special pattern), making it difficult to predict the random number value for the jackpot for the special pattern, and thus preventing fraud.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 when a special jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that results in a jackpot for the special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that results in a miss for the special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a miss for the special pattern.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number that results in a special pattern jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a special pattern jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. As described above with reference to FIG. 9(b), when the random number value in this first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot A" (see 202b1 in FIG. 9(b)). When the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B" (see 202b2 in FIG. 9(c)). In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this first embodiment is configured so that two types of winning types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a miss occurs, and selects one of three stop (presentation) patterns: a "reach before and after miss" (for example, 98, 99) in which the final stop symbol stops just one before or after the reach symbol after a reach occurs, a "reach other than before and after miss" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and a "complete miss" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64.

The random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. In this embodiment, the table is divided into one for when the special symbol has a high probability and one for when the special symbol has a low probability, and the range of random numbers set for each losing stop type is changed depending on the table. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state for a special symbol or a low probability state for a special symbol, etc.

For example, in a high probability state, since a jackpot is likely to occur, a table for high probability in which the range of random numbers corresponding to the "complete miss" stop type is wide, from 0 to 89, is selected so that a "complete miss" is more likely to be selected. In this table, the "reach for front or rear miss" is narrowed to 98, 99, and the "reach other than front or rear miss" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "reach for front or rear miss" or "reach other than front or rear miss." In addition, in a low probability state, a table for low probability in which the range of random numbers corresponding to the "complete miss" stop type is narrowed to 0 to 79 in order to ensure time for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, making it difficult to select a "complete miss."

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front or rear miss" is widened to 80 to 97, making it easier to select "reach other than front or rear miss". Therefore, in a low probability state, it is possible to display many reach displays with long presentation times, so that the time for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, making it easier for the third pattern display device 81 to continuously display the variable numbers. Note that in the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front or rear miss" is set to 98, 99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the rough display mode, such as the so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 29) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the main processing. Note that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10), which stores the random number value that determines one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1, is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, as described above.

Here, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to Figures 10(a) to (d). As shown in Figure 10(a), this variation pattern selection table 202d has at least a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see Figure 10(b)), a miss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see Figure 10(c)), and a miss (high probability) variation pattern table 202d3 (see Figure 10(d)).

First, referring to FIG. 10(b), the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 10(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is a data table that specifies the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. The jackpot fluctuation patterns specified are various normal reaches (30 seconds), various super reaches (60 seconds), and special reaches (90 seconds). In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, each fluctuation pattern is associated with each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Specifically, the range of "0 to 50" as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various normal reaches (30 seconds), the range of "51 to 179" is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various super reaches (60 seconds), and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various special reaches (90 seconds). When selecting a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern in which a judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

Figure 10 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table that specifies the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss in a low probability state of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, as described above, the stop type is determined by the value of the stop type selection counter C3 from the stop type selection table (not shown) as to whether the stop type is a complete miss (non-reach) or a reach miss (common to reach) according to the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in a low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete miss is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", a miss reach (front and rear miss reach, reach other than front and rear miss) is set.

Here, if the fluctuation pattern type is a complete miss, either a short miss (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time or a long miss (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. For a short miss (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and for a long miss (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set.

For missed reaches, the range of the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 from "0 to 149" is set to various missed normal reaches (30 seconds), the range of "150 to 197" is set to various missed super reaches (60 seconds), and "198" is set to various missed special reaches (90 seconds).

In this way, when the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss during normal game mode, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type, and selects a fluctuation pattern from the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

Figure 10 (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the miss (probable chance) fluctuation pattern table 202d3. This miss (probable chance) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is a data table that specifies the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that is selected when the special symbol lottery result in a miss in the special symbol's probable chance state. In this miss (probable chance) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, the value of the set fluctuation type counter CS1 is different from that in the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 described above.

As mentioned above, when the game state is a sure-win game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), a complete miss is determined, and if it is in the range of "90 to 99", a miss reach (front or rear miss reach, reach other than front or rear miss) is determined.

In this way, when in a probability variation game state, the probability of reaching a winning jackpot in the event of a miss is set lower than in the normal game state. This prevents the time it takes for a miss to fluctuate during a probability variation game from becoming longer, and the time it takes to hit a jackpot from becoming longer. This prevents the game from becoming drawn out during a probability variation game state, when a jackpot is more likely to occur, and makes the player feel bored.

Returning to FIG. 11 for further explanation, the second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 239). When the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process, and is obtained when it is detected that the game ball has passed through either the left or right normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by a second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 9(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol set by the second winning random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol has won. This second winning random number table is divided into two types: one for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in its normal state) and one for high probability of a normal symbol winning (period in which the normal symbol is in its time-saving state) when the probability of a normal symbol winning is higher than the low probability, and each type contains a different number of random numbers that result in a big win. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of a win is changed between low probability of a normal symbol and high probability of a normal symbol.

As described above with reference to Figure 9(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random number values that will result in a winning normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28" (see 202c1 in Figure 9(c)). These random number values are stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values that will result in a jackpot is 24 out of a total of 240, so the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second pattern display device 83 executes a variable display of the normal pattern for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that a win has been won, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "circle" pattern is displayed as a stop pattern (second pattern), and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, if a normal pattern is hit, the first ball entrance 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time", but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set to "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random number values that will result in a jackpot for a normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204" (see 202c2 in Figure 9(c)). These random number values are stored in the second jackpot random number table for high probability. Thus, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that will result in a jackpot is 200 out of a total of 240, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal pattern, if a game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for three seconds on the second pattern display device 83. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "circle" pattern is displayed as the stop pattern (second pattern), and the first ball entrance 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, the variable display time is very short (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) compared to when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, and further, the opening period of the first ball entrance 64 is very long (from 0.2 seconds x 1 time to 1 second x 2 times), so that the game ball is easily allowed to enter the first ball entrance 64. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where there is a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entrance 64 opens only "1 second x 2 times" when a normal symbol wins, but the opening time and number of times can be set as desired. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times."

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 21), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 29).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the displays on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 11, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 29) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 28) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has at least a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and a time-saving counter 203f.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

More specifically, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial entry), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) in order of the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winnings are stored, and the first holding area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a decision such as the lottery for the special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from reserved area 1 to the execution area, reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved area with the area number one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a where winning data is stored (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4).

In this pachinko machine 10, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start entry), and the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained in response to the start entry, various information that would be obtained if the original lottery were held is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the counters C1 to C3, in addition to the jackpot lottery for the original special symbol. In this way, predicting various information that would be obtained if the original lottery were held based on the data corresponding to the start entry (the values of the counters C1 to C3) before the lottery for the original special symbol is held is hereafter referred to as pre-reading the lottery result for the special symbol. The various information includes whether it was a win or a loss, the stop type, and the variation pattern.

When the pre-reading is finished, a winning information command including the various information obtained by the pre-reading (win/lose, stop type, and change pattern) is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the win/lose, stop type, and change pattern from the winning information command, and stores them as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Furthermore, if the advance notice lottery is not prohibited, it determines whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice performance based on the various information notified by the winning information command.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, like the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, when a gaming ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, the value of counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4) in order of the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the order in which the winning balls were won is maintained and data corresponding to the winning balls is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a winning normal symbol, the value of counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as the lottery for a winning normal symbol is made based on the value of counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas to the reserved area with the area number one smaller, just like in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, data shifting is only performed for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S404 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 22).

The value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c (the number of reserved times N of the variable display of the special pattern) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball count command (see S206 in FIG. 22 and S405 in FIG. 24). The reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the actual number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c is changed. As a result, even if the reserved ball number of the variable display managed by the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the reserved ball number command received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and sends a reserved ball number display command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of a game ball through the normal ball entrance 67. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is initially set to zero, and each time a game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S505 in FIG. 25).

When a game ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved normal symbol variable display M) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, when a game ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S603 in FIG. 26: No).

The probability change flag 203e is a flag that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state for a special symbol (high probability state for a special symbol). If the value of the probability change flag 203e is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state for a special symbol, and if the value of the probability change flag 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state for a special symbol (low probability state for a special symbol). This probability change flag 203e is initially set to off, and is set to on when the jackpot A for a special symbol ends (see S1014 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, if a jackpot is obtained in the lottery for a special symbol, it is set to off when setting the start of the jackpot (see S213 in FIG. 22).

When the MPU 201 executes the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), a lottery is held for the special symbol. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability change flag 203e is referenced, and if the flag is on, a lottery is held for the special symbol based on the first random number table for high probability, whereas if the probability change flag 203e is off, a lottery is held for the special symbol based on the first random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 23).

The time-saving counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols. If the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state for normal symbols. The initial value of this time-saving counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn in the main control device 110 and a jackpot B is obtained, the value is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot B (see S1013 in FIG. 30). In addition, regardless of the type of jackpot, if a jackpot is obtained by drawing a special symbol, the value is set to 0 when setting the start of the jackpot.

When a lottery is held for a winning normal symbol, the value of the time-saving counter 203f and the state of the probability change flag 203e are referenced, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 1 or greater or the state of the probability change flag 203e is on, it is determined that the time-saving normal symbol is in progress. In this case, a lottery is held for a normal symbol based on the second winning random number table for high probability (see S509 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 and the state of the probability change flag 203e is off, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol is in progress, and a lottery is held for a normal symbol based on the second winning random number table for low probability (see S510 in FIG. 25).

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern display device 83, the second pattern reservation lamp 84, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role 64a, and the like, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a game ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the game ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the game ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and continuous preview performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, etc.

The audio and lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach, and also instructs the display control device 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that a rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, the rear image refers to the image displayed on the rear side of the third pattern, which is the main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

Now, with reference to Figs. 12 and 13, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in detail. First, Fig. 12(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in Fig. 12(a), the ROM 222 is provided with at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a notice selection table 222b.

The variation pattern table 222a is used to specify the detailed display mode of the variable performance based on the rough display mode (variation time) of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d. More specifically, when a variation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by the main control device 110 is received, one variation pattern (detailed display mode of the variable performance) is determined (specified) from the variation patterns specified in the variation pattern table 222a in the preview performance setting process (see FIG. 37), which is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 36) (see S4603, S4605 in FIG. 37). The variation patterns specified in this variation pattern table 222a specify information including the presence or absence of a preview performance and the type of preview performance.

The preview selection table 222b is a data table that is referenced when determining whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance. Details of this preview selection table 222b will be explained with reference to FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the contents of the preview selection table 222b.

As shown in FIG. 13, the preview selection table 222b is a data table that specifies the range of random numbers (value of the performance selection counter 223f) for determining each of the preview performances A to C for each variation type. When determining whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance, if the value of the performance selection counter 223f belongs to any of the ranges of random numbers (value of the performance selection counter 223f) associated with each preview performance, it is determined that the continuous preview performance of the performance type associated with that range will be executed. On the other hand, if the value of the performance selection counter 223f does not belong to any of the ranges of random numbers specified in the preview selection table 222b, it is determined that the continuous preview performance will not be executed.

This preview selection table 222b specifies six types of fluctuation types: special reach hit, super reach hit, normal reach hit, special reach miss, super reach miss, and normal reach miss. Other fluctuation types (long miss, short miss) are not specified, and therefore are not subject to the possibility of executing a continuous preview performance. By limiting the targets for which a continuous preview performance can be executed to fluctuation types that result in a reach state, it is guaranteed that at least a progress will be made to a reach state when the continuous preview performance begins. This makes it possible to create a sense of anticipation for a big win in the player.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is a special reach hit, "preview performance A" is defined in correspondence with the range of 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" (values of the performance selection counter 223f), "preview performance B" is defined in correspondence with the range of 35 random numbers from "10 to 44" (values of the performance selection counter 223f), and "preview performance C" is defined in correspondence with the range of 15 random numbers from "45 to 59" (values of the performance selection counter 223f) (see 222b1 in FIG. 13). The performance selection counter 223f is updated within the range of 100 values from "0 to 99", so when the variation type is a special reach hit, the probability that "preview performance A" is determined is 10% (10/100), the probability that "preview performance B" is determined is 35% (35/100), and the probability that "preview performance C" is determined is 15% (15/100). Additionally, the probability that the consecutive preview performance will not be determined is 40% (40/100).

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is a super reach hit, "preview performance A" is defined in correspondence with the range of 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" (values of the performance selection counter 223f), "preview performance B" is defined in correspondence with the range of 30 random numbers from "10 to 39" (values of the performance selection counter 223f), and "preview performance C" is defined in correspondence with the range of 10 random numbers from "40 to 49" (values of the performance selection counter 223f) (see 222b2 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is a super reach hit, the probability that "preview performance A" is determined is 10% (10/100), the probability that "preview performance B" is determined is 30% (30/100), and the probability that "preview performance C" is determined is 10% (10/100). Also, the probability that the continuous preview performance is not determined is 50% (50/100). In other words, the probability that the consecutive preview performance will be determined is lower than in the case of a special reach hit. Also, when the consecutive preview performance is executed, the probability that preview performance A will be determined is higher than in the case of a special reach hit, while the probability that preview performance C will be determined is lower.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is a normal reach hit, "preview performance A" is defined in correspondence with the range of 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" (values of the performance selection counter 223f), "preview performance B" is defined in correspondence with the range of 15 random numbers from "10 to 24" (values of the performance selection counter 223f), and "preview performance C" is defined in correspondence with the range of 5 random numbers from "25 to 29" (values of the performance selection counter 223f) (see 222b3 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is a normal reach hit, the probability that "preview performance A" is determined is 10% (10/100), the probability that "preview performance B" is determined is 15% (15/100), and the probability that "preview performance C" is determined is 5% (5/100). Also, the probability that the continuous preview performance is not determined is 70% (70/100). That is, the probability that the consecutive preview performance will be determined is lower than in the case of a special reach hit or a super reach hit. Also, when a consecutive preview performance is executed, the probability that preview performance A will be determined is higher than in the case of a special reach hit or a super reach hit, while the probability that preview performance C will be determined is lower.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is a special reach miss, "preview performance A" is defined in correspondence with the range of 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" (values of the performance selection counter 223f), "preview performance B" is defined in correspondence with the range of 8 random numbers from "10 to 17" (values of the performance selection counter 223f), and "preview performance C" is defined in correspondence with the range of 2 random numbers from "18, 19" (values of the performance selection counter 223f) (see 222b4 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is a special reach miss, the probability that "preview performance A" is determined is 10% (10/100), the probability that "preview performance B" is determined is 8% (8/100), and the probability that "preview performance C" is determined is 2% (2/100). Also, the probability that the continuous preview performance is not determined is 80% (80/100). That is, the probability that the continuous preview performance is determined is lower than in the case of a special reach hit, a super reach hit, and a normal reach hit. Also, when a continuous preview performance is executed, the probability that preview performance A is determined is higher than in the case of a special reach hit, a super reach hit, and a normal reach hit, while the probability that preview performances B and C are determined is lower.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is a super reach miss, a "preview performance A" is defined in correspondence with a range of nine random numbers (values of the performance selection counter 223f) from "0 to 8", and a "preview performance B" is defined in correspondence with one random number (value of the performance selection counter 223f) "9" (see 222b5 in FIG. 13). Thus, when the variation type is a super reach miss, the probability that "preview performance A" is determined is 9% (9/100), the probability that "preview performance B" is determined is 1% (1/100), while there is no possibility that "preview performance C" is determined. Also, the probability that a continuous preview performance is not determined is 90% (90/100). That is, the probability that a continuous preview performance is determined is lower than in the cases of a special reach hit, a super reach hit, a normal reach hit, and a special reach miss. In addition, when consecutive preview performances are executed, the probability that preview performance A will be determined is higher than the probability that a special reach hit, a super reach hit, a normal reach hit, or a special reach miss, while the probability that preview performance B will be determined is lower. Also, the probability that preview performance C will be determined is zero.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is a normal reach miss, "preview performance A" is defined in correspondence with the range of five random numbers from "0 to 4" (value of the performance selection counter 223f) (see 222b6 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is a special reach miss, the probability that "preview performance A" is determined is 5% (5/100), while there is no possibility that preview performances B and C are determined. Also, the probability that consecutive preview performances are not determined is 95% (95/100). In other words, the probability that consecutive preview performances are determined is lower than other variation types that are the subject of the judgment of whether or not consecutive preview performances can be executed. Also, when consecutive preview performances are executed, the probability that preview performance A is determined is higher than other variation types, while the possibility that preview performances B and C are determined is zero.

In this way, in the first embodiment, the probability of determining a continuous preview performance is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Also, the probability of determining a continuous preview performance is higher in a variation type with a high expectation (long fluctuation time) than in a variation type with a low expectation (shorter fluctuation time). This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation for a jackpot when the execution of the continuous preview performance begins.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the rate at which preview performance A is determined is lower for a variation type with a high expectation than for a variation type with a low expectation, while the rate at which preview performance C is determined is higher. For this reason, when preview performance C starts, the player can be made to have high expectations of a big win, while when preview performance A starts, the player can be made to watch the performance with a sense of tension until the final variation display of the successive preview performances. Therefore, the player can play the game while paying attention to the type of preview performance.

Furthermore, preview performance B is configured not to be selected (determined) if the normal reach is missed, so when preview performance B starts, it is determined that the game will either progress to a super reach or higher (super reach missed, special reach missed) or that a jackpot will result. This makes the player feel a sense of anticipation for a jackpot. Furthermore, preview performance C is configured not to be selected (determined) if the normal reach is missed or the super reach is missed, so when preview performance C starts, it is determined that the game will either progress to a special reach or that a jackpot will result. This makes it possible for the player to feel a stronger sense of anticipation for a jackpot when preview performance C starts.

Next, the details of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(b). FIG. 12(b) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the RAM 223.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a fluctuation time counter 223e, a performance selection counter 223f, a game status storage area 223g, a notice performance prohibition flag 223h, a notice number counter 223i, a notice prohibition release flag 223j, a notice type flag 223k, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when a start winning is detected in the main control device 110, various information (win/lose, stop type, variation pattern) that will be obtained when a lottery for a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110 from the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained in response to the start winning, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command, various information (win/lose, stop type, change pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in the four areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) in the order of the area number (1 to 4) from the smallest area number. In other words, the smaller the area number, the older the winning data stored in the area, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning data is stored in the first area. In other words, the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the winning information storage area 223a store data corresponding to the lottery results based on the counter values stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the main control device 110, respectively.

In addition, when the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of various information based on a new start winning by the winning information command, it determines whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance based on the various information. That is, based on the notified various information and the value of the performance selection counter 223f, it refers to the above-mentioned preview selection table 222b to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance and the performance type of the continuous preview performance. By executing a continuous preview performance, it is possible to create a sustained sense of anticipation for a big win over multiple variable displays, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as described above, in this first embodiment, when it is decided to execute the consecutive preview performance, a preview lottery prohibition state is set, which prohibits the determination of whether or not the consecutive preview performance can be executed. Then, when the preview lottery prohibition state ends, a determination is made as to whether or not the consecutive preview performance can be executed based on the information stored in all areas of the winning information storage area 223a. In addition, when executing the consecutive preview performance, a determination is also made as to which reserved ball the consecutive preview performance should be continued over. The method of determining whether or not the consecutive preview performance can be executed, which is executed based on the end of the preview lottery prohibition state, will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 14.

Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining a part of the control process executed by referring to the information of each area of the winning information storage area 223a when the advance lottery prohibition state is ended (released). As shown in the dashed line of the horizontally elongated rectangular shape in Figure 14, each area of the winning information storage area 223a is configured to be able to store one byte (8 bits) of data. As shown in Figure 14, each bit of the one-byte data is associated with a variation type, and an on bit indicates the variation type of the winning information stored in the area. More specifically, as shown in Figure 14, from the most significant bit, "special reach hit", "super reach hit", "normal reach hit", "special reach miss", "super reach miss", "normal reach miss", "long miss", and "short miss" are associated, respectively. In the example shown in Figure 14, the second bit of the reserved first area is 1 (on) and the other bits are off, so "long miss" associated with the second bit is the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data stored in the reserved first area. Similarly, in the reserved second area of the winning information storage area 223a, the fifth bit corresponding to "special reach miss" is set to 1 (on), so the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data in the reserved second area is "special reach miss." Similarly, the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data in the reserved second area is "short miss," and the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data in the reserved third area is "super reach hit." Note that the data in the execution area is not used in this control, so it is not shown in the illustration.

When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, as shown in FIG. 14, the logical sum of the upper 6 bits of each reserved area except the reserved first area is calculated. The logical sum is a logical operation in which if at least one of the multiple data is true (1), the result is true (1), and if all of the multiple data are false (0), the result is false (0). In the example of FIG. 14, the data "010100" is generated (calculated) as the logical sum of the upper 6 bits. The reason why the reserved first area is excluded is because the continuous advance notice performance in this first embodiment is configured to be executed over at least two variable displays. In other words, if the reserved first area is the subject of the judgment of whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be executed, there will be cases where the continuous advance notice performance is set only for one variable display based on the data of the reserved first area, so the purpose is to prevent (suppress) this.

In the first embodiment, based on the generated logical sum data, the data corresponding to the reserved ball with the highest expectation (priority of determining whether or not the continuous preview performance can be performed) is identified among the data stored in each reserved area of the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, since the logical sum data indicates that the higher the bit, the higher the expectation, the more the data corresponds to the reserved ball. Therefore, whether or not there is an on (1) bit in the logical sum data is determined from the higher bit side, and if an on bit is detected, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be performed from the notice selection table 222b and the value of the performance lottery counter 223f based on the variation type corresponding to that bit. Then, if it is determined that the continuous preview performance is to be performed, a search is performed for a reserved area in which a bit corresponding to the same expectation (variation type) as the on (1) bit of the logical sum data is on (1), and a continuous preview performance that continues to the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved area in which the same bit as the logical sum data is on is set.

In this way, in the first embodiment, when the advance lottery prohibition state is released, logical sum data is generated based on the data of all reserved areas in the winning information storage area 223a, and the possibility of executing the continuous advance lottery performance is judged based on the logical sum data. By configuring in this way, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced compared to the case where the possibility of executing the continuous advance lottery performance is judged after checking the details of the data of all reserved areas. More specifically, for example, when all reserved balls are long misses or short misses (i.e., lottery results that are not subject to the judgment of the possibility of executing the continuous advance lottery performance), in the first embodiment, all bits of the logical sum data become 0, so that the processing can be terminated at that point. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced compared to the method of judging each bit of all reserved areas one by one. Also, for example, even if there are multiple reserved balls that are the subject of the judgment of the possibility of executing the continuous advance lottery performance, if it is judged based on the logical sum data, it is possible to easily identify the variation type with the highest expectation (priority of judgment of the possibility of executing the continuous advance lottery performance) in the reserved balls by simply judging the highest bit with data of 1 set. This eliminates the need to identify each bit in all reserved areas and identify the type of variation with the highest expectation among the multiple types of variations that are the subject of judgment on whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance. This reduces the processing load.

The special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b, like the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control unit 110, is a variable performance (variable display) performed by the first pattern display unit 37 (and the third pattern display unit 81), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable performance reserved in the main control unit 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is increased by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the variable display of a special pattern is executed in the main control device 110 and the number of reserved balls is decreased, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c after the increase or decrease is sent to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command and stores it in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b (see S4208 in Figure 33). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that it can update its value in synchronization with the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110.

The value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball count pattern on the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b, and transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of the image so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, i.e., the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 33), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set (see S4502 in FIG. 36). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 32) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern is displayed in the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command sent from the main control unit 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 33), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S4508 in FIG. 36). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) (see S4510 in FIG. 36).

The fluctuation time counter 223e is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. At the start of the fluctuation display, a fluctuation time (counter value) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in this fluctuation time counter, and is updated, for example, each time the main processing (see FIG. 32) is executed. This fluctuation time counter 223e allows the voice lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp the remaining fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation display executed in the main control device 110. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation display in the first display device 37 can be matched with the fluctuation time of the third pattern fluctuation display executed in the third pattern display device 81.

The performance selection counter 223f is a counter used to select a performance mode, such as determining (selecting) whether or not a continuous preview performance can be executed. The value of this performance selection counter 223f is updated within the range of "0 to 99." When selecting a continuous preview performance, the type of preview corresponding to the value of this performance selection counter 223f is referenced from the preview selection table 222b to determine the continuous preview performance.

The game status storage area 223g is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the game status of the pachinko machine 10. This game status storage area 223g is updated every time a status command is received from the main control device 110, which is output every time a change occurs in the game status of the pachinko machine 10 (see S4210 in FIG. 33). The game status storage area 223g is, for example, configured as a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game status can be specified by the status of the lowest two bits. More specifically, for example, the lowest bit indicates whether or not the normal pattern is in a time-saving state, and the second lowest bit indicates whether or not the special pattern is in a probability variable state. The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the game status of the pachinko machine 10 on the sound lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in this game status storage area 223g.

The preview performance prohibition flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the preview lottery is prohibited. If the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is on, it means that the preview lottery is prohibited. On the other hand, if the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is off, it means that the preview lottery is not prohibited. While the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is on, the judgment (lottery) of whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed is prohibited. This preview performance prohibition flag 223h is set to on when the judgment (lottery) of whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed is won (see S4311 in FIG. 34 and S4415 in FIG. 35). In addition, this preview performance prohibition flag 223h is set to off when the normal (i.e., without preview performance) variable display executed for the first time after the continuous preview performance ends is stopped (see S4402 in FIG. 35).

The notice count counter 223i is a counter for counting the number of remaining variable displays in the continuous notice performance. When it is decided to execute a continuous notice performance, this notice count counter 223i is set to a value according to the number of continuous notice performances to be executed (see S4310 in FIG. 34 and S4414 in FIG. 35). In addition, while the value of this notice count counter 223i is 1 or more, the value is decremented by 1 each time it is time to start a new variable display (see S4604 in FIG. 37).

The notice prohibition release flag 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the first variable display is being executed after the consecutive notice performance has ended. In other words, it is a flag indicating whether or not the variable display in which the notice lottery prohibition state is released after the fluctuation is being executed. If this notice prohibition release flag 223j is on, it means that the first variable display is being executed after the consecutive notice performance has ended, and if it is off, it means that the state is other than the first variable display being executed after the consecutive notice performance has ended. This notice prohibition release flag 223j is set on at the start of the first variable display after the consecutive notice performance has ended (see S4607 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, this notice prohibition release flag 223j is set off when the notice lottery prohibition state is released (see S4402 in FIG. 35).

The preview type flag 223k is a flag that indicates the type of the continuous preview performance, and is assigned, for example, a 3-bit memory area. The first bit corresponds to preview performance A, the second bit corresponds to preview performance B, and the third bit corresponds to preview performance C, and indicates that the preview performance corresponding to the bit that is on (1) is set. Also, if all bits are off (0), this means that the continuous preview performance is not set.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command memory area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command memory area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 33) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area is read out from the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing corresponding to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the variable display (variable performance) of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 and the continuous preview performance based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 15.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC stabilized falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is also connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with different lottery probabilities for a special jackpot or different numbers of prize balls paid out for one special jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command is set in the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory generally has the problem of slow read speed, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on multiple pages, data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-contiguous data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. Thus, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the commands that make up the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, this may deteriorate the processing performance of the display control device 114.

In this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As described below, the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands that make up the control program without delay. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated presentations.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, which are connected to the image controller 237.

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 that stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 that stores data for images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The NAND flash memory has the characteristic of being able to obtain a large storage capacity in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character memory area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control programs and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads out the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc., and outputs the data to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also performs known data address conversion so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, including error bits. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Furthermore, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the bad data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the bad data blocks, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without having to consider the address positions of the bad data blocks, which differ in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If the data is not set, the buffer RAM 234c reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily sets it in the buffer RAM 234c. The ROM controller 234b then performs a known error correction process and outputs the data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is made up of two banks, and one page's worth of data from the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. This allows the ROM controller 234b to, for example, output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page's worth of data, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237, from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or image controller 237. This improves the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 when reading it out.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. This NOR ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program memory area 234d1 that stores, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 executes this boot program first after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program memory area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e., one page of the NAND type flash memory 234a) of this boot program. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads out from the buffer RAM 234c the instruction code at the corresponding address from the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, the reason why not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but rather a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the command that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to NAND flash memories in that when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND type flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the command code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND type flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. And, because of the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of commands from the command to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR type ROM 234d, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (command code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the command code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start up the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if a control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program is programmed to transfer the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., the control programs excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and the fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 in a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Then, the MPU 231 first transfers and stores the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released.

Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the address of the internal bus being specified as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since there is no need to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, after the system reset is released, when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control programs from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads out the control programs transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed to set the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

This remaining boot program executes a process of transferring all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) from the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts at a time. In addition, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a that corresponds to the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 38) that is executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 38) is completed is set.

The MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, and all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instructions to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see FIG. 20) sent from the MPU 231, and displays the drawn image in one of the first and second frame buffers 236b and 236c, which will be described later, while outputting the image information for one frame previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process for this one frame of an image and the display process for this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 40(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes drawing processing of the next frame of image and also executes processing to display the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at image drawing and display processing intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing are completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also performs processing to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Images are drawn using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described below, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As described below, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image. However, when drawing the image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise be caused by providing the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a consisting of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (starting address of the source storage) and the end address (last address of the source storage) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the last address of the source storage.

In accordance with the various information in this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a long period of time to be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, which makes it impossible to use the video RAMs 235 and 236 for the image drawing process, and as a result, prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

In addition, since the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used to hold image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without being overwritten while the power is on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, as well as a power-on variable image area 235b and a third design area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that displays the lottery results performed in the main control device 110 by a variable presentation when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 38).

Now, referring to Figure 16, we will explain the image that changes when the power is turned on. Figure 16 is an explanatory diagram that explains the image that is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on.

Immediately after power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, and then transfers the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 16(a) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a.

At this time, when the display control device 114 receives a display pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a command to start the change, the display control device 114 alternately displays a power-on change image with a "○" pattern in the lower right position on the display screen of the power-on main image as shown in FIG. 16(b) and a power-on change image with a "×" pattern in the same position as the "○" pattern as shown in FIG. 16(c) during the change period. Then, the display control device 114 judges the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 from the display pattern command and stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the change pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, and if it is a "jackpot for special patterns", the image shown in FIG. 16(b) is displayed for a certain period after the change performance stops, and if it is a "miss for special patterns", the image shown in FIG. 16(c) is displayed for a certain period after the change performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, since players can recognize that some processing is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, they can wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operational checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of operational checks from deteriorating.

In addition, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw a power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is always resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to alternately display the images shown in Figures 16(b) and (c) on the third pattern display device 81. This allows a simple variable presentation to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, the player can be sure that a lottery has been drawn by the simple variable presentation, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, so if a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable performance can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 15, the explanation will continue. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, referring to FIG. 17, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be explained. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, with FIG. 17(a) showing rear A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and FIG. 17(b) showing rear B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 17, the back images corresponding to each of the back faces A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234, and are both longer horizontally than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images (hereafter referred to as "scrolling images") prepared for each back surface A, B are constructed so that the back surface images continue at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d and between positions a and a' are constructed from images that cover the horizontal width of the display area, and after the images between positions c and d are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the images between positions a and a' are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the back surface images are scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

When the change of the back type is decided and the stage is changed to "Sandy stage" or "Deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the corresponding back image between position a and position a' as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, over time, the display area is moved from left to right relative to the scrolling image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, when the display area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the image from position a to position a'. Thus, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection as if they flow to the left.

Next, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c for each rear image will be described. As shown in FIG. 17(a), the entire range of rear image A corresponding to the initial stage, the beach stage, that is, all image data corresponding to positions a to d, is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Usually, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the "beach stage," is displayed, so by keeping all image data of rear image A corresponding to the frequently displayed "beach stage" resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. This reduces the processing load on the display control device 114.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17(b), for rear side B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", only a portion of that rear side, i.e., image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, is stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.

To instantly change the rear image, it would be ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235, but doing so would require a very large capacity RAM to be used for the resident video RAM 235, which could lead to increased costs.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a' (or the range of Figure 17 (a) to (b)), and image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between Figure 17 (a) to (b)) including the initial position is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when a change of stage is decided by lottery at the start of the change, the initial position of the back B can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the display can be scrolled or the color tone can be changed over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a part of the image is stored for the back B, the increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the range from position a to position b of rear side B is set so that, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that after scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled without delay using the image data corresponding to the rear side image stored in the normal video RAM 236 and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, for rear side B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 15) of the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the rear side image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to rear side images from being overwritten by other image data, so that the rear side image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on the rear side B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap with each other, with the image data corresponding to the image between position b' and position b being stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from position b' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, so that the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

Furthermore, the MPU 231 uses image data from the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions c and d is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. Next, the MPU 231 uses image data from the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions a and a' is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling in a smooth connection, as if flowing to the left.

Returning to FIG. 15, the explanation will be continued. The third pattern area 235d is an area for storing the third pattern used in the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, the third pattern area 235d stores image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine main patterns (see FIG. 4) numbered "1" to "9" which are the third patterns. As a result, when performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the variable performance is not immediately started on the third pattern display device 81 after the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, even though the variable performance has been started on the first pattern display device 37.

In addition, image data corresponding to main patterns not numbered "1" to "9" is also stored in the third pattern area 235d. This image data is used for a demo performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with a start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. As a result, when a demo performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a main pattern not numbered is displayed as the third pattern in the demo performance. Therefore, a player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in a demo state by visually recognizing the main pattern not numbered from the display image of the third pattern display device 81.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters including "young man" and "woman" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these are resident in the character design area 235e. When the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads the image data that is resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character design can be changed instantly even if the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error together with the type of error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 can instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so that even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into multiple sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the type of image data should be stored. This causes the image controller 237 to read the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfer the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an instruction to draw an image and an instruction to transfer image data simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of an image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of an image in that frame buffer, and while displaying an image in one of the frame buffers, reads out one frame of image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of an image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the one frame of image that has been read out on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of DRAM. This work RAM 233 has at least a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The data table storage area 233b is an area that stores a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance that is displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance that is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, we will explain the details of the various data tables. First, a display data table is prepared for each presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to variable presentations, opening presentations, round presentations, ending presentations, and demo presentations are prepared.

The variable performance is an effect that is started in the third pattern display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command that indicates the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating a miss is finally stopped and displayed, whereas if the stop type of the variable performance is either jackpot A or jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating the respective jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is intended to inform the player that the pachinko machine 10 will soon transition to a special game state and that the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect is intended to inform the player of the number of rounds that will soon begin. The ending effect is intended to inform the player that the special game state has ended.

As described above, the demo effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, but the next variable effect associated with a start winning does not start. The third symbol, consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening performance, round performance, ending performance, and demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable performance, will have one table per variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Now, with reference to Figure 18, the display data table will be described in detail. Figure 18 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed during that time, corresponding to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, according to the sprite type.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to that magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when a sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through it. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing information for each sprite is specified for each address as the drawing content for one frame, which includes one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and text. Information about effects and characters is specified as one or more pieces according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image. This rear type specifies whether to display either rear A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either the "sand beach stage" or the "deep sea stage"), or whether to display a rear image different from rears A and B. In addition, when specifying that a rear image different from rears A and B is to be displayed, the rear type also specifies which rear image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 231 determines that either back face A or B is to be displayed based on the back face type, it determines the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery out of back faces A and B as the drawing target, and also determines the range of the back face image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a back face image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, it determines the back face image to be displayed from the back face type.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table. Alternatively, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to that rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third patterns (Pattern 1, Pattern 2, ...), pattern type offset information is recorded as pattern type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern. The reason offset information is determined rather than the type of third pattern directly is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a specified time has elapsed records the offset information from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third symbol, and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, so that the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed. While the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed, the third pattern is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player cannot recognize the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the beginning of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 18) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be specified by that display data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the image to be drawn. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 can change the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

If, as in conventional pachinko machines, a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, a large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing the program, which becomes more complex and expansive as the variety of performance images increases, and this may limit the processing power of the display control device 114 and result in a limit to the diversification of controllable performance images. In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, so a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The reason why the display data table is prepared in accordance with each performance mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and the drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is because the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning in the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above. In this way, the configuration of preparing a display data table in accordance with each performance mode, setting a display data table buffer according to the performance mode to be displayed, and creating a drawing list frame by frame according to the set data table can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each performance, and as described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data of the sprites used in the performance specified in the display data table that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If all image data for sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, then no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and describes the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter referred to as the "image data to be transferred") that should start being transferred at the time indicated by that address (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in Figure 19 correspond to this). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in the transfer data table in correspondence with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, null data is specified, which means that there is no image data to be transferred at the address indicated (address "0002H" in Figure 19).

The transfer data information includes the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

The first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 19) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is contained.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc., and if a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table exists, it reads the transfer data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later is created, and transfer data information of the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and sends the drawing list after the addition to image controller 237. On the other hand, when pointer 233f is "0002H", null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data that should start being transferred, and the transfer data information is not added to the generated drawing list, and the drawing list is sent to image controller 237.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in image storage area 236a without fail. Then, the image data stored in that image storage area 236a can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in that display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address, is specified in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be specified so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Figures 16(a) to (c). This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see Figure 38) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S6005 in Figure 38). Then, when all resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S7605 in Figure 49(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 40(b)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 40(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 40(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 41 to 45) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 46 to 48) are executed so that various images are displayed in response to commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing (see S7501 in FIG. 49(a)). If the simple image display flag 233c is on, resident target image data exists that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 49(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) is executed to transfer the image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 20) that describes the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see FIG. 20) for each frame that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays a performance corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that if all the image data of the sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared, and the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, if the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is specified (i.e., if no null data is specified), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to a drawing list (see FIG. 20) that is described below and that contains the image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. As described above, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specified address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when a specified sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address from which the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, during the display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 40B) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 46) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 20) described below, and also obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effects corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d are displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used to draw a sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. This makes it possible to read images required for display from the character ROM 234 without delay in advance and transfer them to the normal video RAM 236, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Now, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 20, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as the background image used in one frame's image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), the character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, composition processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter specification information in a manner specified by the information, and then performs various processing on the standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read from the various video RAMs, and draws the image obtained by performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address for the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type identified from the contents of other images. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data for that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the backmost side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the frontmost side.

In addition, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in transfer data table buffer 233e, MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area provided in image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area of character ROM 234 (area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) provided in image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236.

The timing counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When the MPU 231 stores a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, it sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on that display data table. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing and display processing of one frame of image is completed, each time the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 40(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed, the timing counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 46). As a result, when the value of the timing counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the presentation.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is a flag indicating the storage state, for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, indicating whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred that corresponds to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

In addition, when the MPU 231 transfers image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, it refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and determines whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 50). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, it sets a transfer instruction for that image data (see S7714 in FIG. 50) and causes the image controller 237 to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"); if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, information on this specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 51).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is displayed on the designated drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 executes a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading out previously displayed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and transferring the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see S6306 in FIG. 40(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 21 to 30. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly divided into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

Figure 21 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second win random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (399, 99, 99, and 239, respectively, in this embodiment), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a special pattern change process is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first pattern display device 37 and also sets the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81, and a start winning process is executed in response to a win (start winning) in the first ball entry port 64 (S105). Details of the special pattern change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figures 22 to 24.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the game ball through the normal ball entrance 67 is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. 26. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the launch of the game ball is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the launch of the game ball is on, the main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the game ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 22, the special pattern change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change process (S104). This special pattern change process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is a process for controlling the change display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37, the change display of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81, etc.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S201). The special symbol jackpot period includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and the period during which a predetermined time has passed since the end of the special symbol jackpot game. If the determination results in a special symbol jackpot (S201: Yes), this process ends.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and if the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display of the special symbol is reserved N) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, a special pattern change start process is executed to start the change display in the first pattern display device 37 (S208). The special pattern change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 has elapsed (S209). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S209: No), the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the change time of the executing change display has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stopped pattern is performed in advance by the special pattern change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 23. When this special pattern change start process is executed, a lottery for a special pattern is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not a special pattern jackpot has been won is determined according to the value of the first win random number counter C1, and if a special pattern jackpot has been won, whether it will be jackpot A or jackpot B is determined according to the value of the first win type counter C2.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot A occurs, the blue LED in the first pattern display device 37 is turned on, and if a jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on. If a miss occurs, the red and green LEDs are turned on. The LEDs are turned off when the next variation display starts, but may be turned on for only a few seconds after the variation stops.

After the process of S211 is completed, when the ongoing variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37, it is determined whether the result of the lottery (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process is a special symbol jackpot (S212). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), the probability variable flag 203e is reset to OFF, and the value of the time-saving counter 203f is reset to 0 (S213), the start of the jackpot is set (S214), and the process proceeds to S217. When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the process of S214, if the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes and an opening command is set. As a result, the jackpot performance is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S212, if the current lottery result is a miss for the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S215), and if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 1 or greater (S215: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S216), and the process proceeds to S217. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 (S215: No), the process of S216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S217. In the process of S217, a stop command is set to stop the variation of the special symbol (S217), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 23, the special symbol change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is a process for drawing a lottery (determining whether or not a "special symbol jackpot" or a "special symbol miss" based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and for determining the presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern) of the variable presentation performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are obtained (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the current state is a special symbol probability variable state (whether the probability variable flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on) (S302). The probability variable flag 203e is a flag that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state or not. If the probability variable flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state, and if the probability variable flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol.

If it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state (high probability flag 203e is on) (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state for the special symbol, so the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table for high probability (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 10 random number values stored in the first winning random number table for high probability. As described above, the 10 random number values "0 to 9" are set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, and if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches these random number values for the jackpot, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Once the lottery result for the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S302 that the special symbol is not in a high probability state (high probability flag 203e is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol, so the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the first win random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first win random number table for low probability (S304). Specifically, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first win random number table for low probability. Only "0" is set as the random number value for a jackpot of the special symbol, and if the value of the first win random number counter C1 matches "0", it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Once the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol obtained in the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first jackpot type selection table, and the type of jackpot is determined among the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B). As described above, if the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be jackpot A (16R variable jackpot) (see 202b1 in FIG. 9(b)), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot) (see 202b2 in FIG. 9(b)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (illumination state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the change pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the change pattern is set in the process of S307, the change time (display time) of the change performance in the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the change time of the third pattern until it stops at the big win pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the change time of the pattern change such as normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the change type counter CS1. Note that the relationship between the value of the change type counter CS1 and the change time is specified in the change pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) as described above. When the process of S307 is completed, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special pattern is a miss (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the miss is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the missing pattern, and the stop type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is set to be a forward or rear miss reach, a reach other than a forward or rear miss, or a complete miss, based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete miss is set, if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than front and rear miss is set, and if it is "98, 99", a reach other than front and rear miss is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete miss is set, if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than front and rear miss is set, and if it is "98, 99", a reach other than front and rear miss is set.

Next, the variation pattern in the event of a miss is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third pattern until it stops at a missing pattern on the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, similar to the process of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see Figure 10) to determine the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. When the process of S309 is completed, the process proceeds to S310.

In the process of S310, which is executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 (S310). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 29). The voice lamp control device 113 sends the stop type command as is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) and determines whether or not there has been a win in the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). If there has been a start winning, it is a process for reserving the values indicated by the various random number counters and for pre-reading the lottery results for the special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters that have been reserved.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entry (winning) into the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (winning) (S401: Yes), the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of reserved times N of the variable display of the special pattern) is obtained (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or if there is a winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 but the value (N) of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c is not less than 4 (S403: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the value (N) of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command is set indicating the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c changed by the calculation (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S405, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a in RAM 203 (S406). Note that in the process of S406, the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c is referenced, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, the lottery result for the special symbol is predicted (whether it is a jackpot or not), its stop type (if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type), and its fluctuation pattern (S407).

After the process of S407 predicts the winning or losing outcome of the special symbol lottery, the stop type (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot), and the fluctuation pattern, a winning information command including the predicted winning or losing outcome of the lottery, the predicted stop type, and the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408), and this process ends.

The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice and lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice and lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts the winning or losing status, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores this information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 25, the normal symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change process (S106). This normal symbol change process (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is a process for controlling the change display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the electric role 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64, etc.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S501). The normal symbol (second symbol) is winning when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win and when the electric device 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is being controlled to open and close. If the result of the determination is that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S501: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (S501: No), it is determined whether the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (S502), and if the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved variable display times M for the normal pattern) is obtained (S503). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current state is the time-saving state for the normal pattern (S508). Specifically, it is determined that the current state is the time-saving state for the normal pattern when the value of the time-saving counter 203f in the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or the high probability flag 203e is on, and it is determined that the current state is the normal state for the normal pattern (not the time-saving state) when the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 and the high probability flag 203e is off.

If it is determined in the process of S508 that the time-saving state for normal symbols is in effect (S508: Yes), the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal symbol is a win is obtained based on the value of the second win random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the second win random number table for high probability (S509). Specifically, the value of the second win random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second win random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal symbol is a win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is a miss (see 202c2 in FIG. 9(c)).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S508 that the normal symbol is not in the time-saving state (S508: No), the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal symbol is a win is obtained based on the value of the second win random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the second win random number table for low probability (S510). Specifically, the value of the second win random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second win random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the normal symbol is a win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is a miss (see 202c1 in Figure 9 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the normal symbol obtained by the processing of S509 or S510 is a winning normal symbol (S511), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol (S511: Yes), the display mode at the time of the winning symbol is set (S512). In the processing of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has ended, it is set so that a "○" symbol is lit and displayed as the stopping symbol (second symbol), and the processing proceeds to S514.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S511 that the normal pattern is a miss (S511: No), the display mode in the event of a miss is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 has ended, the "X" pattern is set to be lit and displayed as the stopped pattern (second pattern). Once the setting of the display mode in the event of a miss has been completed, the process proceeds to S514.

In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state of the normal pattern is in progress (S514), and if the time-saving state of the normal pattern is in progress (S514: Yes), the time for the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S515), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S514 that the normal pattern is in the normal state (S514: No), the time for the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during a big win of a special pattern, when the probability of the normal pattern is high, the time for the variable display becomes very short (30 seconds → 3 seconds) compared to when the probability of the normal pattern is low, so that the frequency of the lottery of the normal pattern increases. Therefore, as the frequency of winning the lottery of the normal pattern increases, the electric role 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 becomes easier to open, and the game ball becomes easier to enter the first ball entrance 64.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the changing display being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S517). Note that the change time here is the time that was previously set by the process of S515 or S516 before the changing display was started in the second pattern display device 83.

In the process of S517, if it is determined that the change time has not elapsed (S517: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S517, if it is determined that the change time of the executed change display has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second pattern display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S512, the "○" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a loss and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "X" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83. When the stop display is set by processing S518, the next time the second pattern display update processing (see S907) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) is executed, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (normal pattern) is displayed stopped on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing S512 or S513.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 starts, it is determined whether the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variable processing is a winning normal symbol (S519). If the current lottery result is a winning normal symbol (S519: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the current normal symbol is in a time-saving state (S520). If it is determined that the current normal symbol is in a time-saving state (S520: Yes), the opening time and the number of openings of the electric device 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 are set to "1 second x 2 times" (S522), and the process proceeds to S523. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in a normal state (not in a time-saving state) in the process of S520, the opening time and the number of openings of the electric device 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S521), and the process proceeds to S523.

In the process of S523, the start of opening and closing control of the electric role 64a is set for the time and number of openings set in the process of S521 or S522 (S523), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening and closing control of the electric role 64a is set by the process of S523, the opening and closing control of the electric role 64a is started when the electric role opening and closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is next executed, and the opening and closing control of the electric role 64a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S521 or S522 are completed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S519 that the current lottery result is a miss for the normal pattern (S519: No), the processes of S520 to S523 are skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) and is a process for determining whether or not a gaming ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and, if a gaming ball has passed through, obtaining and reserving the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the gaming ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved normal symbol variable display M) is obtained (S602). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

If the game ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S601: No), or if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 but the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S605), and this process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal reserved ball counter 203d is referenced, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, referring to FIG. 27, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information on the occurrence of a power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the information on the occurrence of the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the information on the occurrence of the power outage (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout/firing control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 28, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the main control unit 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control units (peripheral control units such as the voice lamp control unit 113 and the dispensing control unit 111) to become operable (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S814. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S814.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S805: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S807: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S814. Note that, as will be described later in the process of S914 in FIG. 29, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of S814, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S814). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S815, S816).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S815, S816) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S815, S816) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (S815, S816), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S815), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S816). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power outage information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S807: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S808) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power was cut off (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, a performance permission command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various performances. Next, the values of the probability change flag 203e and the time-saving counter 203f are read (S811), and a status command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the game status indicated by each read value (S812). The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it updates the data in the game status storage area 223g of the RAM 223 according to the game status indicated by the status command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the exact game status immediately after power-on. After the process of S812 is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S813), and the process proceeds to the main process, which will be described later. The status command is composed of, for example, one byte of data, and the game status can be notified by the lowest two bits of data. That is, the lowest bit is a bit that indicates whether or not the time is shortened, and if the lowest bit is on, it indicates that the current state is a time-shortened state with a normal pattern. On the other hand, if the lowest bit is off, it indicates that the current state is a normal state with a normal pattern. The data in the second lowest bit is a bit that indicates whether or not the game is in a probability bonus state, and if the second lowest bit is on, it indicates that the current state is a probability bonus state with a special pattern. On the other hand, if the second lowest bit is off, it indicates that the current state is a low probability state with a special pattern. By determining whether each bit of this status command is on or off, the game status can be easily identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Next, referring to FIG. 29, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up processing will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, each process from S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process at a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update processes of S910 and S911 are executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special pattern variation process (see FIG. 22) or the start winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. required for the third pattern display device 81 to display the variation of the third pattern are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) are sent to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a game ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, a jackpot performance is executed and a jackpot control process is executed to open or close the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of game balls have entered the specific winning port 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is met, the specific winning port 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric reel opening/closing process is executed to control the opening/closing of the electric reel 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 (S905). In the electric reel opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric reel 64a is set by the process of S523 in the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 25), the opening/closing control of the electric reel 64a is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric reel 64a continues until the opening time and the number of openings set by the process of S521 or the process of S522 in the normal pattern change process are completed.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display device 37 (S906). In the first pattern display update process, when a change pattern is set by the process of S307 or S309 of the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 23), the change display according to the change pattern is started in the first pattern display device 37. In this embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED of the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37 is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process, when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the process of S307 or S309 of the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 23) ends, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37 is terminated, and the stopped pattern (first pattern) is displayed as stopped (lit up) in the first pattern display device 37 in the display mode set by the process of S306 or S308 of the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 23).

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device 83 (S907). In the second pattern display update process, when the normal pattern (second pattern) change time is set by the process of S515 or S516 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 25), the second pattern display device 83 starts a change display. As a result, the second pattern display device 83 performs a change display in which the "○" pattern and the "×" pattern as the second pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second pattern display update process, when the stop display of the second pattern display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 25), the change display being executed in the second pattern display device 83 is terminated, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) on the second pattern display device 83 in a display mode set by the process of S512 or S513 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 25).

Then, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S908). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S908: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and each of the processes from S901 onwards described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated until the specified time is reached, i.e., within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next main process (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 and 239 in this embodiment), the counter is cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as in the processing of S902 (S911).

Here, the execution time of each process from S901 to S907 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next main process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, it is possible to randomly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S908 (S908: Yes), the power is interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 27 is executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S912 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S912), and a power off command indicating that the power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S913). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S914), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of S908 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from the power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of S901 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S901, just as in the case where initialization is performed in the start-up processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (see S801 in FIG. 28), so that the processing can be started from the processing of S901. Therefore, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 29), and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening) 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special jackpot will start (S1001). Specifically, the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and if the start of a special jackpot is set, it is determined that a special jackpot will start. In the process of S1001, if a special jackpot will start (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process ends.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it sends a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, an opening performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if a special jackpot has not started in the process of S1001 (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not a special jackpot is in progress (S1003). The period during which a special jackpot is in progress includes the period during which the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 are displaying a special jackpot (including during play of a special jackpot), and the period during which a predetermined time has elapsed since play of a special jackpot has ended. If a special jackpot is not in progress in the process of S1003 (S1003: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if a special symbol is in the jackpot (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1004). If it is time to start a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1006). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, it transmits a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number to the display control device 114. When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round performance is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is not the time to start a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a has been met (S1007). Specifically, it is determined that the closing condition has been met if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a was opened, or if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) have entered the winning hole after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a was opened.

In the process of S1007, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is met (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008) and this process ends. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not met (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending performance (S1009). Specifically, it is determined that it is time to start the ending performance when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger number of prize balls are paid out than usual has ended.

In the process of S1009, if it is the timing to start the ending performance (S1009: Yes), an ending command is set (S1010) and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the ending performance is initiated in the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined in the process of S1009 that it is not the time to start the ending performance (S1009: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the time to end the ending performance (S1011). If it is determined that it is not the time to end the ending performance (S1011: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is the time to end the ending performance (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is jackpot A (S1012).

If it is determined in the process of S1012 that the jackpot is not an A jackpot (i.e., it is a B jackpot) (S1012: No), the value of the time-saving counter 203f is overwritten with 100, so that a time-saving period of 100 normal symbols is granted after the jackpot ends (S1013), and the process proceeds to S1015. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1012 that the current jackpot is an A jackpot (S1012: Yes), the probability-changing flag 203e is turned on, so that a probability-changing state of a special symbol is granted after the jackpot ends (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1015.

In the process of S1015, which is executed after the process of S1013 or S1014, a status command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the lottery status of the special symbol after the jackpot ends (whether the special symbol is in a guaranteed bonus state or a low probability state for the special symbol) (S1015), the end of the jackpot is set (S1016), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 31 to Fig. 37, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, referring to FIG. 31, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the execution of the power-off processing of S4116 (see FIG. 32) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 32, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4113: Yes in FIG. 32), it executes the power-off processing of S4116. Before the execution of such power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off in the processing of S4002 (S4002: No), the current startup processing was started after the power was completely cut off, after a momentary power outage occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing of S4116 was completed, or after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S4003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes) and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S4116 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No) and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S4002: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S4116 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 32). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4116 is executed, so the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on when the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S4116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (S4009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the game state at the time of power-on indicated by the state command output during the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 28) is analyzed (S4011), and the data of the game state storage area 223g is updated according to the game state notified by the state command (S4012). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to the area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control unit 110.

On the other hand, the process of S4008 is reached when the power-off flag is off because, for example, the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, and so the process went from S4004 to S4006 and reached S4008, or because noise or the like caused only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the process of clearing the working area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010, where the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010), and the game state at the time of power-on indicated by the state command output during the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 28) is analyzed (S4011), and the data in the game state storage area 223g is updated according to the game state notified by the state command (S4012). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S4004 to S4006 and then to S4008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up process is started, the data in the working area of RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that control of voice lamp control device 113 can continue.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the current processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S4101: No), the processing of S4102 to S4110 is not executed and the processing proceeds to S4111. The reason for determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed in the processing of S4101 is that, whereas S4102 to S4110 are mainly processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 ms), it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S4111 and the processing of updating the variable display setting processing of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control unit 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4112 at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by each processing of S4103 to S4112 are sent to the display control device 114 (S4102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S4104). The power-on notification processing is a processing for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the notification by the power-on notification processing is not performed and the processing proceeds to S4105.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting performance process is executed, and then a reserved ball number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting performance process, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device 114. In the reserved ball number display update process, a process is performed to light up the reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b.

After that, a frame button input monitoring/performance process is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring/performance process monitors whether the frame button 22 has been pressed, and sets a corresponding performance when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In other words, this is a process for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode when the frame button 22 is pressed during the effective operation period of the continuous transformation performance.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S4109, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S4110), and processing proceeds to S4111. In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing/output process of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81.

In the processing of S4111, a command determination process is performed in which processing is performed according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S4111). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. Then, when the command determination process ends, a variable display setting process is executed (S4112). In the variable display setting process, a display variable pattern command is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

After the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). Information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (S4115), and the power outage processing is executed (S4116). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (S4117), and the processing is then looped infinitely. In the power outage processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. The stored information on the occurrence of a power outage is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S4114: No), the process returns to the process of S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a store clerk or the like to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). The command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4201). If it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4202), the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S4203), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 36) described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control unit 114 of the start of the variation performance and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4204). If a stop type command has been received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d in the RAM 223 is set to on (S4205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206), and the process returns to the main process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 36) described below is executed. It is then used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation performance.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4207). If the reserved ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the value contained in the received reserved ball number command, i.e., the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110 (the number of reserved times N of the variable display of the special pattern), is extracted and stored in the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control unit 113 (S4208). In addition, in the process of S4208, a reserved ball number command for display is set to notify the display control unit 114 of the updated value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b. After the process of S4208 is completed, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning) or when a lottery for a special symbol is performed. Therefore, each time an initial winning is detected or a lottery for a special symbol is performed, the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 by the processing of S4208. Therefore, even if the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 when the initial winning is detected or when a lottery for a special symbol is performed. When the process of S4208 is executed, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b. As a result, the display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined in the processing of S4207 that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S4207: No), then it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data in the game status storage area 223g is updated according to the game status indicated by the received status command (S4210), and the process returns to the main processing.

If it is determined in the process of S4209 that a status command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). Then, if it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S4211: Yes), the received winning command is analyzed, and winning information command processing is executed to determine whether or not a continuous preview performance should be executed (S4212), and the process returns to the main processing. Details of this winning information command processing (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

On the other hand, in the process of S4211, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop command has been received (S4213). Then, if it is determined that a stop command has been received (S4213: Yes), it is determined whether or not the timing for the advance notice lottery prohibition state to be lifted has arrived, and if it is the timing for the advance notice lottery prohibition state to be lifted, a stop command process is executed to determine whether or not a continuous advance notice performance can be executed based on the lottery results of all reserved balls (S4214). Details of this stop command process (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. When the process of S4214 is completed, the stop display of the third symbol that is changing is then set (S4215), and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if a stop command has not been received in the processing of S4213 (S4213: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, processing according to the received command is executed (S4216), and the process returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is an opening command, an opening command for display is set for the display control device 114, thereby instructing the display control device 114 to start an opening performance for a jackpot. Also, for example, if the other command is an ending command, an ending command for display is set for the display control device 114, thereby instructing the display control device 114 to start an ending performance for a jackpot.

By executing this command determination process, appropriate processing can be performed according to the command output from the main control unit 110.

Next, the details of the winning information command process (S4212) described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 34. As described above, this winning information command process (S4212) is a process for analyzing the received winning command and determining whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performance.

In the winning information command process (see FIG. 34), first, the information notified by the received winning information command is stored in the lowest numbered reserved area among the first to fourth reserved areas of the winning information storage area 223a (S4301). Next, the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is read (S4302), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 2 or greater (S4303).

If the process of S4303 determines that the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 223b is less than 2 (S4303: No), this means that the number of reserved balls required to execute the consecutive preview performance (2 or more) is not reached, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the process of S4303 determines that the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 223b is 2 or more (S4303: Yes), then it is determined whether the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is on (S4304). If the process of S4304 determines that the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is on (S4304: Yes), the current state is a preview lottery prohibition state, and the determination of whether or not the consecutive preview performance can be executed (execution lottery) is prohibited, so the processes of S4305 to S4311 for performing the lottery for executing the consecutive preview performance are skipped, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the advance notice performance prohibition flag 223h is off (S4304: No), the advance notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is read (S4305), and the random number value (counter value) specified in the read advance notice selection table 222b corresponding to the variable type notified by the current winning information command is compared with the value of the performance selection counter 223f to determine whether or not consecutive advance notice performances can be executed (S4306). In other words, it is determined whether or not any of the ranges of random numbers specified in association with each of the advance notice performances A to C matches the value of the performance selection counter 223f.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the judgment made by the processing of S4306 corresponds to the execution of the continuous preview performance (S4307), and if the result corresponds to the non-execution of the continuous preview performance (S4307: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4307 that the result corresponds to the execution of the continuous preview performance (S4307: Yes), first, the preview type flag 223k is updated according to the performance type of the current continuous preview performance identified from the preview selection table 222b (S4308). That is, if the current performance type is preview performance A, the first bit of the preview type flag 223k is set to on (1) and the other bits are set to off (0); if it is preview performance B, the second bit of the preview type flag 223k is set to on (1) and the other bits are set to off (0); if it is preview performance C, the third bit of the preview type flag 223k is set to on (1) and the other bits are set to off (0).

When the processing of S4308 is completed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is then read (S4309), and the read counter value is set to the notice count counter 223i (S4310). This makes it possible to set the execution of continuous notice performance across the variable display based on all currently reserved reserved balls. When the processing of S4310 is completed, the notice performance prohibition flag 223h is set to ON, thereby setting the notice lottery prohibition state (S4311), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this winning information command process (see Figure 34), it is possible to set a variable display based on the reserved balls at the time the current winning information command is received, and a continuous preview performance that is executed across the variable display based on the winning information command. As mentioned above, the probability of a continuous preview performance being determined is higher when the lottery result notified by the winning information command is a jackpot than when it is a miss. Therefore, when a continuous preview performance is executed, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for a jackpot in the player.

Next, the above-mentioned stop command process (S4214) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 35. As described above, this stop command process (S4214) is a process for determining whether it is time to release the advance notice lottery prohibition state, and if it is time to release the advance notice lottery prohibition state, determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice performance based on the lottery results of all reserved balls.

As shown in Figure 35, when the stop command process (see Figure 35) is executed, it is determined whether the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is on (S4401), and if it is determined that it is off (S4401: No), this means that it is not the time to release the advance notice lottery prohibition state, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is ON (i.e., it is time to release the advance notice lottery prohibition state) (S4401: Yes), in order to release the advance notice lottery prohibition state, the advance notice performance prohibition flag 223h is set OFF and the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is set OFF (S4402). Next, the counter value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is read (S4403), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 2 or greater (S4404).

If it is determined in the process of S4404 that the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 223b is 1 or less (S4404: No), the number of reserved balls is less than the number required to execute the continuous preview performance, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4404 that the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 223b is 2 or more (S4404: Yes), this means that there are more reserved balls than the number required to execute the continuous preview performance, and each process of S4405 to S4415 is executed to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the lottery results (variation type) of each reserved ball.

More specifically, first, the logical sum (see FIG. 14) of the most significant 6 bits of data in each reserved area of the winning information storage area 223a, excluding the reserved area 1, is calculated (S4405). Then, it is determined whether the most significant bit of the calculated logical sum is 1 (ON) (S4406), and if it is ON (S4406: Yes), each of the processes of S4409 to S4415 is executed to determine whether or not a continuous preview performance can be executed at a ratio corresponding to the variation type of the ON bit (i.e., a special reach hit).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4406 that the most significant bit of the logical sum data is not 1 (i.e., it is 0) (S4406: No), then it is determined whether the bit one bit lower than the bit determined this time is 1 (on) (S4407). If it is determined in the process of S4407 that the bit one bit lower is also not 1 (i.e., it is 0) (S4407: No), it is determined whether the bit determined this time is the least significant bit in the logical sum data (S4408).

If it is determined in the process of S4408 that the bit currently being determined is not the lowest bit in the logical sum data (S4408: No), the process proceeds to S4407, and from this point on, the processes of S4407 and S4408 are repeatedly executed until the process of S4407 detects a bit that is 1 (on) (S4407: Yes) or the process of S4408 determines that not all bits up to the lowest bit are 1 (on) (i.e., they are 0) (S4408).

If a 1 (on) bit is detected in the process of S4407 (S4407: Yes), the processes of S4409 to S4415 are executed to determine whether or not a continuous preview performance can be executed in a ratio according to the variation type to which the 1 (on) bit is associated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4408 that not all bits up to the lowest bit are 1 (on) (i.e., 0) (S4408: No), this means that the currently reserved reserved balls do not include the lottery results that are the subject of the determination of whether or not a continuous preview performance can be executed, and this process is terminated.

If a bit of 1 (on) is detected in the logical sum data in the process of S4406 or S4407 (S4406: Yes or S4407: Yes), first, the preview selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is read (S4409). Next, based on the variation type associated with the bit detected to be 1 (on) in the process of S4406 or S4407 and the value of the performance selection counter 223f, the preview selection table 222b that has been read is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance (whether the performance selection counter 223f matches any of the random number values defined in the preview selection table 222b) (S4410).

When the processing of S4410 is completed, it is then determined whether the determination result in the processing of S4410 corresponds to the execution of a continuous preview performance (the performance selection counter 223f matches any of the random number values specified in the preview selection table 222b) (S4411), and if the determination result does not correspond to the execution of a continuous preview performance (S4411: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4411 that the determination result corresponds to the execution of a continuous preview performance (S4411: Yes), first, the preview type flag 223k is updated according to the performance type of the current continuous preview performance identified from the preview selection table 222b (S4412). In other words, if the current performance type is preview performance A, the first bit of the preview type flag 223k is set on (1) and the other bits are set off (0); if it is preview performance B, the second bit of the preview type flag 223k is set on (1) and the other bits are set off (0); if it is preview performance C, the third bit of the preview type flag 223k is set on (1) and the other bits are set off (0).

When the processing of S4412 is completed, next, the reserved areas in which the bit corresponding to the variation type that was the subject of this judgment is set to 1 (on) are searched in order, starting from the reserved 4 area (S4413), and the value corresponding to the searched reserved area is set in the notice count counter 223i (S4414). For example, if the search result is the reserved 4 area, the notice count counter 223i is set to 4, and if the search result is the reserved 2 area, the notice count counter 223i is set to 2.

The reason for searching from the reserved fourth area is to set the continuous notice performance over more reserved balls when there are multiple reserved areas with the bit of the search target of S4413 set to 1 (on). Specifically, for example, if the judgment of whether or not the continuous notice performance can be executed this time is judged by the lottery result corresponding to the variation type of the super reach failure, and data corresponding to the super reach failure is stored in the reserved fourth area and the reserved second area, the super reach failure in the reserved fourth area can be detected first by searching from the reserved fourth area. Therefore, the execution of the continuous notice performance over four variable displays can be set. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the search is performed from the reserved first area, the search ends when the data of the super reach failure in the reserved second area is detected, so that the variable displays that are the target of the continuous notice performance are reduced (there will be two variable displays based on the data stored in the reserved first and second areas). Therefore, by searching from the reserved fourth area, the continuous notice performance can be set over more variable displays, so that the player's sense of expectation can be sustained for a longer period of time.

When the processing of S4414 is completed, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set by turning on the advance notice performance prohibition flag 223h (S4415), and this processing is terminated.

By this stop command processing, at the timing when the advance lottery prohibition state is released, logical sum data is generated based on the data of all reserved areas except the first reserved area in the winning information storage area 223a, and the possibility of executing the continuous advance lottery can be determined based on the logical sum data. By configuring in this way, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced compared to the case where the possibility of executing the continuous advance lottery is determined after checking the details of the data of all reserved areas. More specifically, for example, if all reserved balls are long misses or short misses (i.e., lottery results that are not subject to the judgment of whether the continuous advance lottery can be executed), in this first embodiment, all bits of the logical sum data become 0, so that the processing can be terminated at that point. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced compared to the method of judging each bit of all reserved areas one by one. Also, for example, even if there are multiple reserved balls that are the subject of the judgment of whether the continuous advance lottery can be executed, if it is judged based on the logical sum data, it is possible to easily identify the variation type with the highest expectation (priority of judgment of whether the continuous advance lottery can be executed) in the reserved balls by simply judging the highest bit with data of 1 set. This eliminates the need to identify each bit in all reserved areas and, among the multiple change types that are the subject of the judgment on whether or not the continuous preview performance can be performed, identify the change type with the highest expectation (priority of judgment on whether or not the continuous preview performance can be performed). This reduces the processing load.

In the first embodiment, in the process of S4413, the search for reserved areas in which the bit corresponding to the variation type that is the subject of the judgment of the continuous preview performance is on is performed in order from the fourth reserved area, but this is not limited to this. For example, the search may be performed in order from the first reserved area. By configuring in this way, when there are multiple reserved balls of the variation type that is the subject of judgment of whether or not to execute the current continuous preview performance specified based on the logical sum data in the reserved area, it is possible to suppress the execution of the variation display of the same variation type with the same expectation multiple times during the execution of the continuous preview performance. In other words, for example, when data corresponding to the variation type of the super reach miss is stored in the second reserved area and the fourth reserved area, if the reserved area is searched from the fourth reserved area side, the continuous preview performance will be executed up to the variation display corresponding to the data of the fourth reserved area. In this case, the super reach miss (variation display with high expectation) will occur twice (multiple times) in one continuous preview performance. If highly anticipated variable displays occur one after the other, and the expectation of a big win is further heightened by the execution of consecutive preview performances during that time, but the final result is a miss, this can significantly reduce the player's motivation to play. In contrast, if the reserved area is searched from the first reserved area side, the number of times that highly anticipated variable display types are executed in one consecutive preview performance can be limited to a minimum, so that even if the consecutive preview performance results in a miss, the player's motivation to play is less likely to decrease.

Next, referring to FIG. 36, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process that generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on or not (S4501). Then, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4501: No), since no variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S4507. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S4501: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S4502), and then, in the process of S4203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 33), the variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command is obtained (S4503).

Next, it is determined whether a continuous preview performance is set for the variable display to be started based on the current variable pattern command, and if so, a preview performance setting process is executed to set the preview performance (S4504). Details of this preview performance setting process (S4504) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. When the process of S4504 is completed, a display variable pattern command is then generated to notify the display control device 114 of the variable display mode determined in the process of S4504, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S4505). By receiving this display variable pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variable performance so that the third pattern display device 81 displays the variable display of the third pattern in the variable pattern indicated by the display variable pattern command.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4506). In the process of S4506, the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted in order to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After the data has been shifted, the process proceeds to S4507.

In the process of S4507, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on or not (S4507). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4507: No), since a stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this variable display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S4507: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S4508), and then, in the process of S4206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 33), the stop type in the variable presentation extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S4509).

Then, the stop type indicated by the stop type command from the main control unit 110 is set as the stop type of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81, and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S4510), and this process ends. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls the stop display of the variable performance so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned preview performance setting process (S4504) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 37. This preview performance setting process (S4504) is a process executed within the variable display setting process (see FIG. 36), and as described above, is a process for determining whether a continuous preview performance is set for the variable display to be started based on the current variable pattern command, and setting the preview performance if it is set.

As shown in FIG. 37, in the preview performance setting process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether the value of the preview count counter 223i is greater than 0 (S4601). If the value is greater than 0 (S4601: Yes), this means that a continuous preview performance is set for the current variable display, so the preview type flag 223k is read (S4602). Next, the variable pattern with the preview performance of the type indicated by the preview type flag 223k is determined by referring to the variable pattern selection table 222a (S4603), the value of the preview count counter 223i is decremented by 1 (S4604), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the value of the notice count counter 223i is 0 (S4601: No), first, a variation pattern without a notice performance is determined by referring to the variation pattern selection table 222a (S4605), and then it is determined whether the notice performance prohibition flag 223h is on (S4606). In the process of S4606, if it is determined that the notice performance prohibition flag 223h is on (S4606: Yes), this means that it is the start timing of the first variable display after the end of the continuous notice performance, so the notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to on (S4607), and this process is terminated. By setting the notice prohibition release flag 223j on in the process of S4607, the notice lottery prohibition state can be continued during the variation period of the variable display that starts this time (the first variable display after the end of the continuous notice performance), and the notice lottery prohibition state can be released in the stop command process (see FIG. 35) at the end of the variation (see S4402 in FIG. 35). By configuring the system so that the preview lottery prohibition state continues until the first variable display after the consecutive preview performance ends, it is possible to prevent the consecutive preview performance from being executed again without any interval after the consecutive preview performance ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Fig. 38 to Fig. 51. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 38, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute the initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following flow. When the power supply unit 115 supplies power to the display control unit 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231, using its hardware configuration, sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. The MPU 231 then fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

If all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 will consume a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This increases the time it takes to start up the MPU 231, resulting in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Now, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed during the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

However, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will deteriorate even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, a process is executed in which the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S6101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program memory area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND type flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in accordance with the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a (S6103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 38) to be executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 38) is completed (S6105), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, and the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and makes it easy to execute diversified and complex performances using the auxiliary performance unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 39, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 are configured to include all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 may be part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of control programs including all remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the process of transferring a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated multiple times, including the processes of S6101 and S6102, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all of the boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without executing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and therefore reduces the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. This allows the MPU 231 to start controlling the auxiliary performance unit, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 38. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and for the I/O devices, etc. Also, processes such as clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 are performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction is complete, image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231 indicating the end of transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction, it may write transfer end information indicating the end of transfer to a register or a partial area of built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. MPU 231 may then read information from this register or partial area of built-in memory at any time and detect the writing of transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is then retained so that it is not overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a resident image transfer setting process is executed in which the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process described below (see FIG. 49(a)) (see S7502 in FIG. 49(a)).

The simple image display flag 233c is also kept on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 40(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 40(b)) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 16 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40(b)).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the display control device 114 is displaying the power-on main image on the third pattern display device 81, it can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, and so can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the use of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234 prevents the efficiency of operation checks from deteriorating.

In addition, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 transfers the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power is turned on. Therefore, if the player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given by the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image can be displayed immediately during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the transfer takes time, so the power-on main image continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, so that the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by the processing of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to FIG. 40(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 40(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 40(b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 40(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is identified, a drawing list of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, we will first explain the outline of the V interrupt processing flow, and then explain the details of each process with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 40(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S6301: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so in order to display a normal performance image on the third pattern display device 81 instead of the power-on image, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable performance, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that state is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 41 to 45.

In the display setting process (S6303), the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically identified based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. In addition, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 46 to 48.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which was specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simplified display setting process (S6309), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and even when a continuous preview command or a back image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the forwarding setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 49 and 50.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, a drawing list as shown in FIG. 20 is generated from the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305), and this drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process in accordance with the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S6307 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) for determining the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big win A to F, small win, front and rear miss reach, reach other than front and rear miss, complete miss) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed to cause the power-on image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the processing proceeds to S6304.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figures 41 to 45. First, Figure 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

As shown in FIG. 41, in this command determination process, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S6402) to notify the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed in the ON state, and then the type of each command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 42(a). FIG. 42(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation presentation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, the main control unit 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, so two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are never received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display fluctuation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a change presentation having a shorter change time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110, the next display change pattern command will be received from the main control device 110 while a change presentation according to the set change display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a different change display will suddenly begin, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast to this, as in this embodiment, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, even if the main control unit 110 has actually instructed a change presentation with a longer change time than the set display data table, as described below, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed after the change presentation according to the display data table buffer 233d has ended and until the next display pattern command is received from the main control unit 110, so that the player can continue to watch the change of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When this variable pattern command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, and specifies the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the processing of S6502 extracts the transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process, the timing counter 233h, in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, is used to time the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table has ended, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control unit 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 41. If it is determined in the processing of S6404 that there is no variation pattern command for display (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a stop type command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6406), and if there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 42(b). FIG. 42(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of big win A-F, small win, reach miss, or complete miss) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40(b)) is executed, and the stop pattern after the variable performance that is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set on (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is described as type information for identifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is identified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by S6603, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to this identified third pattern is stored is identified. The image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that the main control device 110 always judges the start of fluctuations at least a few seconds apart, so it will never receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display stop type commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be a complete miss, and the stop type table is determined. As a result, the stop pattern corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" were set, the third pattern display device 81 would display a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" even if the actual result was a "miss for the special pattern," which could lead the player to mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine 10 had a "special pattern jackpot," thereby reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, by setting a stopping pattern corresponding to a complete miss, as in this embodiment, if the actual result was a "special pattern jackpot," the pachinko machine 10 would be a "special pattern jackpot" even if the third pattern display device 81 displayed a stopping pattern that was a complete miss, which would delight the player.

Returning to FIG. 41, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for display (S6408: Yes), the opening command processing is executed (S6409) and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 43(a). FIG. 43(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command processing executes processing corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Then, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the timing counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 41, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6408 that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a round number command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for display (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411) and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 43(b). FIG. 43(b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing executes processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6802).

Then, based on the number of rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S6805), the number of rounds command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 41 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no round number command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and if there is an ending command for display (S6412: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S6413) and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing executes processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending performance indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6904). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S6905), ending command processing is terminated, and processing returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 41, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a background image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and if there is a background image change command (S6414: Yes), background image change command processing is executed (S6415), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 45(a). FIG. 45(a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing executes processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command processing, first, a rear image change flag that notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the rear image change resulting from receiving a rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag provided for each rear image type (rear image A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and the bits corresponding to the other rear image types are set to OFF (S7002), after which the rear image change command processing ends and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the processing of S7001 is on, the rear image type after the change is identified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the processing of S7002.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified in the display data table that either back surface A or B is to be displayed based on the back surface type of the back surface image specified in S7002, the type of back surface image to be displayed at that time is identified from the back surface image discrimination flag set by S7002, and further, the range of the back surface image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which image data corresponding to that range of the back surface image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This change in the rear image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 41. If it is determined in the processing of S6414 that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and if there is an error command (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the error command processing (S6417) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 45(b). FIG. 45(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag is set to ON, which indicates that an error has occurred when in the ON state (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S7102), the error command processing is terminated, and the process returns to command judgment processing.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102, and a process is executed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing players and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 41. If it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no error command (S6416: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6418), and the process returns to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the processes of S6402 to S6418 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S6308), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40(b)), is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, i.e., the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 42(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 42(b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, while the other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to those commands.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 42(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S6502, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figures 46 to 48. Figure 46 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

As shown in FIG. 46, in this display setting process, first it is determined whether the new command flag is on or not (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, i.e., it is off (S7201: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped and the process moves to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by the processes of S7203 to S7204.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for expanding image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying warning images of errors corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to on on the third pattern display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is identified based on this expanded warning image data, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after processing S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302) and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 46. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Also, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is written at address "0000H" and the actual data of each table is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order starting from address "0001H".

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timing counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7405), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third pattern display device 81 can be made to repeatedly display demo performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to FIG. 46, the explanation will continue. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7206 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, the value of the timing counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233h after decrement is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the timing counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), this means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the confirmation display, so first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7210), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the confirmation display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag, which indicates that the confirmation display is being performed in the on state, is set on (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S7215), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In this way, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the final display performance of the stopped patterns in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting a separate program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the processing of S7215 is used to identify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is recorded until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change based on the data table. In the task processing (S6304), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is identified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by S7215 until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less as the confirmation display performance ends, and therefore, after a certain time has elapsed since the end of the confirmation display performance, processing is performed to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display a demo performance.

First, the demo display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and the demo display flag, which indicates that a demo performance is being performed when it is on, is set to on (S7221), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variable pattern command indicating the start of the next variable performance is not received after the final display performance has ended, the drawing content can be set so that a demo performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the processing of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), this means that a demo performance is performed after the final display performance has ended, and that the demo performance has ended, so the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, various settings are made so that the demo performance will start again, as described above, by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 40(b)). However, in the simple display setting processing, after the performance time of the power-on variable image has ended, a process is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that one of the images of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figures 49 and 50. First, Figure 49 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S7501). Then, if the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49(b).

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7501 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., it is off (S7501: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that future transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

Next, referring to FIG. 49(b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 49(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601). If a transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In this process of S7602, after an instruction to transfer image data has been sent to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Also, if the result of processing in S7601 indicates that a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the processing of S7603, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

If, as a result of the processing of S7603, all of the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 40(b)), instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 40(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 40(b)), the command determination processing (see FIG. 41-FIG. 45) and the display setting processing (see FIG. 46-FIG. 48) are executed, so that the drawing of the normal image is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 50) (see S7501: No in FIG. 49(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and power-on variable image that have already been transferred during the main processing. The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process remains resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as the back image, the third pattern, the character pattern, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time to displaying some image on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S7703), and further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the processing of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but is Null data (S7702: No), the processing of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S7705. In the processing of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S7705), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the processing of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. Then, if it is determined by the processing of S7706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7706: No), image transfer processing is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer processing has ended (S7706: Yes), the processing proceeds to S7707. Also, if the result of the processing of S7705 shows that an image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the processing proceeds to S7707.

In the processing of S7707, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or not (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data exists that should be transferred, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S7708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether the background image change flag is on or not (S7709). Then, if the background image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), image data exists that should be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting processing ends.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed, so the rear image change flag is set to off (S7710), and then, of the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag that is on is identified, and that image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag that is on is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). This determination in the process of S7713 is made by referencing the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of the processing of S7713 is that the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being transferred unnecessarily from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing burden on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7713 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is complete, it transmits a transfer end signal to the MPU 231.

After processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on," and by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236. Also, if the rear image is changed based on receipt of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, image data used for that rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this embodiment, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 for the image data to be transferred according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

In this case, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, a drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated (S7801) from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are identified for each sprite, and the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task process are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprite that should be placed in the back of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed in the front, and the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite are described as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite in the rearranged sprite order, thereby generating a drawing list. Furthermore, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are sent to the image controller (S7802). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands them by overwriting them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and the image data stored from the source start address to the source end address are read out of character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is transferred sequentially to the area of normal video RAM 236 indicated by the destination start address. The image data stored in this normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image expanded in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the processing of S7802, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to the V interrupt processing. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of the image are completed. As a result, when the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of the image at a certain timing, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of one frame is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of the image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of the image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of one frame is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, each time every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be able to execute a continuous preview performance in which the same type of preview performance is executed over multiple consecutive variable displays. Basically, the execution of this continuous preview performance is determined when a new start winning is detected for the first ball entrance 64. If it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance, it is executed over the variable display based on the reserved balls that are reserved at the time the new start winning is detected, and the variable display based on the new start winning. This continuous preview performance is more likely to be determined when the lottery result for the new start winning is a jackpot than when it is a miss, so when the continuous preview performance is executed, it can create a sense of anticipation for a jackpot in the player.

In addition, in this first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous preview performance is decided, a preview lottery prohibition state is set to prohibit the lottery of the continuous preview performance. This is to prevent (suppress) the continuous preview performance from being decided in duplicate during the execution of the continuous preview performance. In more detail, if the configuration is such that the execution of the continuous preview performance is judged based on the detection of a new start winning even during the execution of the continuous preview performance, the type of the preview performance may be switched in the middle of the continuous preview performance. For example, if a new start winning is detected during the execution of the continuous preview performance in which the preview performance B is set, and the execution of the continuous preview performance is judged and the execution of the preview performance A is decided, the preview performance B may be terminated and the preview performance A may be switched from the next change. In other words, there is a possibility that the player will be disappointed by switching from a performance type (preview performance B) with a relatively high expectation to a performance type (preview performance A) with a low expectation. In addition, if a continuous preview performance of the same performance type is newly determined during the execution of the continuous preview performance, the continuous preview performance will be executed over a number of variable displays greater than the number of reserved balls reserved at the start of the continuous preview performance. This may make it difficult for the player to know which reserved ball to expect, and may make it difficult to understand the meaning of the performance. In addition, as a method for solving these problems, a method is also conceivable in which the determination of whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed is permitted only when a start winning corresponding to a jackpot is detected during the execution of a continuous preview performance that ultimately results in a miss, and the performance type of the additionally determined continuous preview performance is configured to have a degree of expectation greater than the performance type of the continuous preview performance currently being executed. However, in this case, each time a start winning is detected during the execution of the continuous preview performance, multiple conditions must be determined to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed and the preview type, which is a problem in that the processing load may increase.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which, from the time when it is decided to execute a consecutive preview performance, after the consecutive preview performance ends, until one variable display ends, a new determination as to whether or not to execute a consecutive preview performance is prohibited. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the type of performance from switching during the execution of a consecutive preview performance, or the consecutive preview performance from continuing beyond the number of reserved balls at the start of the consecutive preview performance. Furthermore, at the time of start winning, it is only necessary to perform simple control such as determining whether or not the preview lottery is prohibited, and if the preview lottery is prohibited, skipping the process of determining whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performance, thereby reducing the processing load on the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the advance lottery prohibition state is released, the lottery results of all reserved balls that are reserved at that time are judged, and based on the judgment result, it is judged whether or not the continuous advance performance can be executed. Although the details of the judgment method will be described later, by judging whether or not the continuous advance performance can be executed by taking into account the lottery results of all reserved balls, it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous advance performance from being set based on a reserved ball with a low expectation even though a reserved ball with a higher expectation is reserved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the continuous advance performance is set on a reserved ball with a low expectation but the continuous advance performance is not set on a reserved ball with a high expectation, or a situation in which a reserved ball with a high expectation is consumed in the middle of the continuous advance performance, and a reserved ball with a low expectation is consumed in the final variable display of the continuous advance performance. Therefore, the continuous advance performance can be executed favorably.

In addition, in this first embodiment, the preview lottery prohibition state is configured to continue after the end of the continuous preview performance until one normal (no preview performance is set) variable display ends. By configuring it in this way, at least one normal variable display can be executed after the end of the continuous preview performance and before the next continuous preview performance starts. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) the continuous preview performance from starting again immediately after the end of the continuous preview performance, which would otherwise continue endlessly. Therefore, it is easy to understand which reserved ball to have hopes for while the continuous preview performance is being executed.

In the first embodiment, when the advance lottery prohibition state is lifted, logical sum data is generated based on the data stored in each reserved area of the winning information storage area 223a, and the possibility of executing the consecutive advance lottery performance is determined based on the logical sum data, but this is not limited to the above. For example, each time a winning information command is received, logical sum data may be generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RAM 223. By configuring in this way, the process of calculating the logical sum data can be omitted when the advance lottery prohibition state is lifted, thereby reducing the processing load required to determine whether or not the consecutive advance lottery performance can be executed when the advance lottery prohibition state is lifted.

In the first embodiment, when it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance, the continuous preview performance is executed for all reserved balls that are reserved at the time of the decision, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance, the range of reserved balls for which the continuous preview performance is executed may be determined according to the lottery results, etc. More specifically, for example, in the case of the continuous preview performance in which a miss is finally announced, the number of consecutive preview performances may be three or less, while in the case of the continuous preview performance in which a win is finally announced, the number of consecutive preview performances may be allowed up to four. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of consecutive preview performances, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous preview performance is decided, the continuous preview performance is set for all reserved balls at the time of the decision, and the preview lottery prohibition state is set until the continuous preview performance is finished. In other words, once the number of consecutive preview performances in the continuous preview performance is decided, the number of consecutive preview performances is not increased or decreased, but this is not limited to this. For example, even when the execution of the continuous preview performance is decided, if a new winning information command is received during the execution of the continuous preview performance, a lottery for the execution of the continuous preview performance may be performed. In other words, a lottery (continuous preview extension lottery) on whether or not to extend the continuous preview performance until the variable display corresponding to the new winning information may be performed. In this case, the continuous preview extension lottery may be performed only when the continuous preview performance being executed is a continuous preview performance that finally notifies the player of a miss. By configuring in this way, the continuous preview performance can be executed continuously for a larger number of times, so that the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, the extension of the continuous preview performance may be determined only when the new starting winning is a hit. By configuring it this way, if the consecutive preview performance exceeds the upper limit of four balls reserved, the player will understand that in addition to winning the consecutive preview extension lottery, he or she will also win the jackpot. Therefore, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of consecutive preview performances during the execution of the consecutive preview performance.

In the first embodiment, the logical sum of the most significant 6 bits of each reserved area is calculated and used to determine whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performance, but this is not limited to 6 bits and may be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the probability of winning the consecutive preview performance corresponding to each lottery result (determination ratio) may also be set arbitrarily.

In the first embodiment, the continuous preview effect can be executed only when the number of reserved balls is two or more, but this is not limited to the above. Even when the number of reserved balls is one, the execution of the preview effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, the third symbol variable display accompanied by the preview effect may be executed once during one change time (i.e., the change time of the first symbol and the change time of the third symbol are made to match), or the third symbol variable display accompanied by the preview effect may be executed multiple times during one change time (i.e., the third symbol variable display with a change time shorter than the change time of the first symbol is executed multiple times).

In the first embodiment, the continuous preview performance is described as a preview performance in which three identical third symbols are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbols are displayed in a burning manner when the three third symbols are stopped. However, the preview performance is not limited to this. For example, during the continuous preview performance, the same (or similar) effect may be generated at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the fluctuation starts) in each fluctuation, or the same (or similar) character may appear at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the fluctuation stops). In addition, a series of performances with a story (e.g., a performance in which a jackpot is announced by fighting and winning an enemy, or a performance in which a jackpot is announced if the player can escape from the enemy, etc.) may be executed across all the fluctuation displays in which the continuous preview performance is set. Furthermore, when a continuous preview performance is set, it is not necessary to execute the same type of preview performance for all variable displays within the set range. For example, when a preview performance is determined, the state of the reserved pattern showing the reserved ball corresponding to the determination of the preview performance may be changed to a different state from normal until the end of the fluctuation (for example, the color of the reserved pattern may be changed, or the reserved pattern may be changed to a predetermined character, etc.). By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the reserved ball before the variable display based on the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved pattern whose state has been changed begins.

In the first embodiment, when the continuous preview performance is set, the main patterns with the same numbers attached to each of the pattern rows are configured to be displayed in a different manner (a manner in which they are wrapped in an aura) from the other third patterns, but a performance in which the main patterns are changed to a different manner may be executed even when the continuous preview performance is not being executed. Specifically, for example, only when the upper pattern row Z1 is stopped, the main pattern 1 may be displayed in the same manner as the preview performance, and the main patterns with the same numbers as the main patterns whose manner has been changed may not be stopped in the middle pattern row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3. Also, when the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are stopped, the main patterns with the same numbers attached to each of the pattern rows are displayed in the same manner as the preview performance, and when the middle pattern row Z2 is stopped, the main patterns with the same numbers as the main patterns whose manner has been changed may not be stopped. That is, the performance may be configured to proceed in the same manner as when the preview performance is set until halfway, and then to execute a performance (so-called fake performance) in which the performance mode is different from the preview performance halfway. By configuring it in this way, the player can be made to believe that a continuous preview performance has begun until a different performance mode is achieved from the preview performance, so that the player can have a sense of anticipation for the continuous preview performance even if he or she has not won the lottery for the execution of the continuous preview performance for a long period of time.

In the first embodiment, the ratio at which the continuous preview performance is determined and the ratio of each preview performance type are variable depending on the variation type, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the ratio at which the continuous preview performance is determined and the ratio of each preview performance type may be variable depending on the jackpot type in addition to the variation type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the type of jackpot that will occur in the event of a jackpot depending on whether or not the continuous preview performance is executed and the type of preview performance, which can further increase the player's interest in the continuous preview performance.

In the first embodiment, when a start winning is detected in a state where the advance lottery is not prohibited (the advance performance prohibition flag 223h is on) and a winning information command is output to the voice lamp control device 113, the range of random numbers (values of the performance lottery counter 223f) corresponding to the current variation type in the advance selection table 222b is always referenced to determine (lottery) whether or not the continuous advance performance can be executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, if a reserved ball with a higher expectation than the current start winning (a lottery result advantageous to the player) is already reserved, the continuous advance performance may not be selected. If a continuous advance performance is determined in a state where a reserved ball with a higher expectation than the current start winning is already reserved, a situation occurs in which a variable display with a relatively low expectation is executed in the final variable display of the continuous advance performance after a variable display with a high expectation is executed in the middle of the continuous advance performance. In other words, there is a risk that the expectation will end up being a performance with a tapering effect. On the other hand, if a reserved ball with a high expectation has already been reserved, the lottery for the consecutive preview performance is not executed, which prevents (suppresses) the expectation from tapering off, and creates a greater sense of expectation for the variable display executed at the end of the consecutive preview performance. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the first embodiment, the preview lottery prohibition state is released when one change has been completed after the consecutive preview performance has ended, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the preview lottery prohibition state may be released when the final change display of the consecutive preview performance has ended.

In the first embodiment, when a start winning is detected in a state where the prediction lottery is not prohibited, the determination of whether or not the continuous prediction performance can be performed is performed without any restrictions, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a jackpot is already included in the reserved area, the determination of whether or not the continuous prediction performance can be performed may be avoided. This prevents the continuous prediction performance from being interrupted by a jackpot being generated in the middle of the continuous prediction performance. In addition, for example, if the lottery result of the jackpot is reserved in the reserved first area, the determination of whether or not the continuous prediction performance can be performed may be avoided. By configuring in this way, even if a jackpot is already present in the reserved area at the time when a new start winning is detected, a variable display accompanied by a prediction performance at least twice can be performed before the jackpot is notified. In other words, it is possible to prevent a variable display accompanied by a prediction performance from being executed only once to notify a jackpot. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the continuous prediction performance was executed to notify a jackpot, and the performance can be prevented from becoming unnatural. In this case, the settings for the consecutive preview performance may be reset when a jackpot is hit, and when the jackpot ends, a decision may be made as to whether or not the consecutive preview performance can be executed based on the lottery results (variation type) for each reserved ball.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52 to FIG. 59. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, each time a start winning is detected, the lottery result (whether it is a win or not, a variation pattern, etc.) of the special pattern is read in advance from various counter values (random number values) acquired based on the start winning, and the read-ahead result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to perform a determination of whether or not to execute the consecutive notice performance based on the read-ahead result notified by the winning information command. Also, in the first embodiment, a notice lottery prohibition state is set at the time when the execution of the consecutive notice performance is determined, thereby preventing (suppressing) the consecutive notice performance from being determined in duplicate. Then, when the notice lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum of the data stored in each reserved area of the winning information storage area 223a at the time of the release is calculated, and the possibility of executing the consecutive notice performance is determined based on the logical sum. That is, based on the logical sum data, it is determined whether the reserved balls include a reserved ball of a variation type that is a target for determining whether or not the continuous preview performance can be performed, and which variation type has the highest expectation among the currently reserved balls. If the variation type that is a target for determining whether or not the continuous preview performance can be performed is included, it is determined (by lottery) whether or not the continuous preview performance can be performed using the determination ratio (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type with the highest expectation.

In contrast to this, in the second embodiment, points are set according to the type of variation, and the total value of points corresponding to one or more pieces of data stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be grasped. During the advance lottery prohibition state, the total points are updated every time a new winning information command is received, and when the advance lottery prohibition state is released, the type of variation contained in the reserved ball is grasped based on the total points, and a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a continuous advance lottery performance.

In addition, in this second embodiment, when the main control device 110 acquires various counter values based on detecting a start winning, it determines the range of values to which the acquired various counter values belong, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the determined value range. That is, the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is configured to determine only the range of the acquired values without performing a look-ahead. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the range of various counter values based on the range of random number values (counter values) notified by the random number range command output from the main control device 110 in place of the winning information command, and to perform a look-ahead on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

The pachinko machine 10 in this second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in terms of configuration in that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 52. Fig. 52(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in Fig. 52(a), the ROM 202 in the second embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see Fig. 9(a)) in that a random number range selection table 202e is added. The other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The random number range selection table 202e is a data table that is referenced to identify the range of values to which the various counter values (random number values) obtained based on the initial winning at the first ball entrance 64 belong. At the time of the initial winning, the various counter values are compared with this random number range selection table 202e to identify the range of values to which the counter values (random number values) belong (see S412 in FIG. 55). The identified range of values for the counter values (random number values) is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by a random number range command (see S413 in FIG. 55).

Details of this random number range selection table 202e will be described with reference to Figures 52(b) and (c). Figure 52(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the random number range selection table 202e. As shown in Figure 52(b), the random number range selection table 202e is composed of at least a winning random number range table 202e1 for specifying the range of values of the first winning random number counter C1, a winning type range table 202e2 for specifying the range of values of the first winning type counter C2, and a fluctuation type range table 202e3 for specifying the range of values of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

With reference to Figure 52 (c), we will explain the outline of the provisions of each table that constitutes the random number range selection table 202e by taking the winning random number range table 202e1 as an example.

As shown in Figure 52 (c), the winning random number range table 202e1 specifies data (range parameters) indicating the range of random number values (counter values) in correspondence with the range of values of the first winning random number counter C1. More specifically, the range parameter "00H" is associated with the value "0" of the first winning random number counter C1 (i.e., the jackpot random number in the low probability state of the special symbol and the probability of a special winning state), the range parameter "01H" is associated with the range "1-9" of the first winning random number counter C1 (i.e., the jackpot random number in the probability of a special symbol), the range parameter "02H" is associated with the range "10-49" of the first winning random number counter C1, the range parameter "03H" is associated with the range "50-99" of the first winning random number counter C1, and the range parameter "04H" is associated with the range "100-149" of the first winning random number counter C1. Thereafter, a different range parameter value is associated with every 50th random number value range.

With reference to this winning random number range table 202e1, for example, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the start winning is "60", the range to which the value of the first winning random number counter C1 belongs is "50 to 99", so "03H" is specified as the range parameter indicating the range of the current random number value. Also, for example, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained is "375", the range to which the value of the first winning random number counter C1 belongs is "350 to 399", so "09H" is specified as the range parameter indicating the range of the current random number value.

In addition, only judgment values corresponding to the same judgment result are specified in each range. That is, in the range corresponding to the range parameter "00H", only judgment values that are judged as a big win in a low probability state of a special pattern are specified. In addition, in the range corresponding to the range parameter "01H", only judgment values that are judged as a big win in a high probability state of a special pattern are specified. In addition, in the range corresponding to the range parameters "02H" to "09H", only judgment values that are judged as a miss are specified. In this way, by configuring each range only with the same type of judgment value, it is possible to make each range and the judgment result correspond one-to-one. In other words, it is possible to prevent judgment values corresponding to multiple judgment results from being mixed in one range, and to prevent the judgment result using the counter value (random number value) of the range from being unable to be specified even if the range is specified. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately execute the pre-reading process based on the range parameters specified and notified by referring to the hit random number range table 202e1.

Although not shown in the figure, the other tables constituting the random number range selection table 202e (win type range table 202e2, variation type range table 202e3) also specify the range of values of the first win type counter C2 or the variation type counter CS1 in correspondence with the range parameter values. In addition, the multiple ranges set in each table are all composed of only judgment values that correspond to the same judgment result.

As described above, the range parameters determined by referring to each data table defined in the random number range selection table 202e, such as the winning random number range table 202e1, are output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the random number range command. The voice lamp control device 113 reads in advance the various lottery results (lottery results of special symbols, big win type, variation pattern) based on the range of values to which the various counter values (random number values) notified by the random number range command belong. The details will be described later, but the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a data table that specifies the range of various counter values (random number values) that can be notified by the random number range command in association with the lottery results based on the various counter values. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the random number range command, it reads in advance the lottery results for each counter type based on each data table.

In this way, the range of the various counter values (random number values) acquired based on the start winning is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 performs a read-ahead based on a data table that specifies the correspondence between the range of the received various counter values (random number values) and the lottery result, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control device 110. In other words, when a start winning is detected, the main control device 110 does not need to perform a process of comparing each random number value specified in the various data tables with the counter value acquired this time to read the lottery result in advance, but only needs to compare the range of values specified in the random number range selection table 202e with the counter value acquired this time. Therefore, by reducing the processing load in the main control device 110, which performs main control related to the game, such as drawing a jackpot and updating the display mode of the first pattern, it is possible to reliably execute main control related to the game without delay. In addition, the counter value (random number) acquired based on the start winning is not output to the voice lamp control device 113 itself, but is converted to a value range to which the counter value (random number) belongs and output to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, even if a random number range command is illegally acquired from the outside, it is difficult to predict the random number value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) that will be the big win from the illegally acquired random number range command. Therefore, the deterrent effect against fraudulent acts can be enhanced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a pre-reading process corresponding to various counters based on the range of the notified counter value (random number value), so that the pre-reading can be executed under conditions closer to the various lotteries executed in the special pattern variation start process (see FIG. 23) in the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the pre-reading result more accurately.

Next, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 53 and 54. First, Figure 53 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment. As shown in Figure 53 (a), the ROM 222 in the second embodiment has at least a point selection table 222c, a secondary win random number table 222d, a secondary win type table 222e, a secondary change type table 222f, and a release selection table 222g added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 12 (a)).

The point selection table 222c is a data table that is referenced to identify points according to the type of fluctuation identified by the pre-reading. During the state in which advance lottery selection is prohibited, this point selection table 222c is referenced and the total number of points is updated each time a type of fluctuation is identified by the pre-reading.

The details of this point selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 54(a). FIG. 54(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the point selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 54(a), this point selection table 222c specifies points in association with each type of fluctuation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the variable type "special reach hit" is associated with "30 points" (see 222c1 in FIG. 54(a)), the variable types "super reach hit" and "normal reach hit" are associated with "5 points" (see 222c2, 222c3 in FIG. 54(a)), and "special reach miss", "super reach miss", and "normal reach miss" are associated with "1 point" (see 222c4-222c6 in FIG. 54(a)). On the other hand, the other variable types ("long miss", "short miss") are associated with "0 points" (see 222c7 in FIG. 54(a)).

In this second embodiment, when the advance lottery is prohibited, and the type of variation is identified by looking ahead based on the random number range command, the point selection table 222c is referenced to identify the points that correspond to the current look-ahead result. The identified points are added to the point storage area 223m, which will be described later. In this way, when the advance lottery is prohibited, the points corresponding to all reserved balls can always be updated at the same time as the look-ahead.

Returning to Figure 53(a), the explanation will continue. The secondary win random number table 222d, secondary win type table 222e, and secondary change type table 222f are data tables referenced to predict whether or not a special symbol will be won, the jackpot type, and the change pattern based on the range of values to which the first win random number counter C1, first win type counter C2, and change type counter CS1 belong, which are output from the main control device 110 by the random number range command. The configuration of each of these tables will be explained with reference to Figure 54(b), using the secondary win random number table 222d as an example.

Figure 54(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the secondary win random number table 222d. As shown in Figure 54(b), this secondary win random number table 222d specifies the range of random numbers (range parameters) that are determined to be a jackpot for special symbols for each game state (low probability state, high probability state for special symbols). Specifically, as shown in Figure 54(b), "00H" is specified as the range of random numbers (range parameters) that are determined to be a jackpot in the low probability state for special symbols (see 222d1 in Figure 54(b)), and "00H, 01H" is specified as the range of random numbers (range parameters) that are determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state for special symbols (see 222d2 in Figure 54(b)).

Although not shown in the figures, the other data tables (secondary win type table 222e, secondary fluctuation type table 222f) also specify a correspondence between the range parameter value corresponding to the first win type counter C2 or the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the determined jackpot type or fluctuation pattern.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the random number range command, it extracts range parameters corresponding to the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 notified by the command, and compares the extracted range parameter values with the secondary winning random number table 222d, the secondary winning type table 222e, and the secondary variation type table 222f to perform a pre-read of the special pattern lottery result, the big win type, and the variation pattern. Since the pre-reading process corresponding to each counter can be performed based on the range of the notified counter value (random number value), the pre-reading can be performed under conditions closer to the various lotteries performed in the special pattern variation start process (see FIG. 23) in the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the pre-reading result more accurately. When the pre-reading process is completed, as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be performed. In addition, when the advance notice lottery is prohibited, instead of determining whether or not the consecutive advance notice performance can be executed, the points corresponding to the variation type determined by the advance notice are determined by referring to the point selection table, and the data in the point storage area 223m is updated.

Returning to Figure 53(a), the explanation will continue. The selection table 222g for when the cancellation is performed is a data table that is referenced when the lottery for consecutive preview effects is performed when the pre-notification lottery prohibition state is cancelled. When the pre-notification lottery prohibition state is cancelled, the average value of the points stored in the point storage area 223m divided by the number of reserved balls is compared with the selection table 222g for when the cancellation is performed to determine whether or not the consecutive preview effects can be performed.

Now, with reference to FIG. 54(c), the details of the release selection table 222g will be described. FIG. 54(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the release selection table 222g. As shown in FIG. 54(c), the release selection table 222g specifies the range of values of the performance selection counter 223f for determining whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance for each range of the average value of the points stored in the point storage area 223m.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(c), when the average point value (A) is greater than 5, the value range of the effect selection counter 223f corresponding to the preview effect A is specified as "0 to 19", the value range of the effect selection counter 223f corresponding to the preview effect B is specified as "20 to 49", and the value range of the effect selection counter 223f corresponding to the preview effect C is specified as "50 to 59" (see 222g1 in FIG. 54(c)).

When the average value (A) of the points is 5 or less and is greater than 1, the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223f corresponding to the preview performance A is specified as "0 to 4", the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223f corresponding to the preview performance B is specified as "5 to 19", and the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223f corresponding to the preview performance C is specified as "20 to 29" (see 222g2 in FIG. 54(c)). When the average value (A) of the points is 1 or less, the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223f corresponding to the preview performance A is specified as "0 to 8", and the value of the performance selection counter 223f corresponding to the preview performance B is specified as "9" (see 222g3 in FIG. 54(c)). When the preview selection prohibition state is released, this release selection table 222g allows the possibility of execution of the consecutive preview performance to be selected (determined) at a selection probability (determination ratio) according to the average value of the points.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 53(b). The RAM 223 in this second embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 12(b)) in that a point storage area 223m has been added. The rest of the configuration is the same as the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The point storage area 223m is a memory area for storing and updating the total value of points corresponding to the variation types of each reserved ball during the advance lottery prohibition state. When it is decided to execute the continuous advance lottery performance, the total value of the values obtained by converting the variation types corresponding to all reserved balls into points is stored in this point storage area 223m (see S4713 in FIG. 57). The points stored in this point storage area 223m are updated by adding points corresponding to the variation type identified by the advance lottery each time a random number range command is received based on a new start winning and a pre-reading process is executed based on the range of random number values (counter values) notified by the command (see S4705 in FIG. 57). In addition, when a new variation display is started during the advance lottery prohibition state, the points corresponding to the variation type of the variation display to be started are subtracted and updated (see S4613 in FIG. 59).

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 55, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. Fig. 55 is a flow chart showing the start winning process 2 (S111) in the second embodiment. This start winning process 2 (S111) is a process executed in place of the start winning process (see Fig. 24) in the first embodiment, and is a process executed in conjunction with winning (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, similar to the start winning process (see Fig. 24).

In the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, each of the steps S401 to S406 is executed in the same manner as each of the steps S401 to S406 in the start winning process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. In the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, when the process of S406 is completed, the random number range selection table 202e (see FIG. 52(b)) is read (S411), and the read random number range selection table 202e is compared with the various counter values (random number values) acquired to identify the value range (range parameter) to which each counter value (random number value) belongs (S412). Next, a random number range command is set to notify the value range (range parameter) to which the identified counter value (random number value) belongs (S413), and this process is terminated.

The random number range command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the random number range command, it extracts range parameters corresponding to various counter values (random number values) from the random number range command, and compares them with the secondary win random number table 222d, secondary win type table 222e, and secondary win type table 222f in ROM 222 to predict the lottery results based on the current start winning.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 56 to Fig. 59, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. First, referring to the flowchart of Fig. 56, the command determination process 2 (S4121) in the second embodiment will be described. This command determination process 2 (4121) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see Fig. 33) in the first embodiment, and is a process for determining the command received from the main control device 110 and executing the corresponding control, similar to the command determination process (see Fig. 33) in the first embodiment.

In command determination process 2 in this second embodiment (see FIG. 56), steps S4201 to S4210, S4213, S4215, and S4216 are identical to steps S4201 to S4210, S4213, S4215, and S4216 in the command determination process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 33).

In addition, in command determination process 2 (see FIG. 56) in the second embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4209 that a status command has not been received (S4209: No), it is then determined whether a random number range command has been received (S4221). If it is determined that a random number range command has been received (S4221: Yes), random number range command process is executed (S4222) to perform a look-ahead based on the range of values (range parameters) to which the various counter values belong, as notified by the random number range command, and this process is terminated. Details of this random number range command process (S4222) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4221 that a random number range command process has not been received (S4221: No), the process proceeds to processing of S4213. If it is determined in the processing of S4213 that a stop command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4213: Yes), stop command process 2 is executed (S4223) instead of the stop command process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35), and the process proceeds to S4215. Details of this stop command process 2 (S4223) will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

Next, referring to FIG. 57, the random number range command process (S4222) that is executed when a random number range command is received during the above-mentioned command determination process 2 (see FIG. 56) will be described in detail. As described above, this random number range command process (S4222) is a process for performing look-ahead based on the range parameters notified by the random number range command.

In this random number range command process (see FIG. 57), first, the range parameters for each counter type notified by the random number range command are compared with the secondary win random number table 222d, the secondary win type table 222e, and the secondary change type table 222f (S4701). That is, the lottery result is read in advance by comparing the range parameters corresponding to the first win random number counter C1 with the secondary win random number table 222d, the range parameters corresponding to the first win type counter C2 with the secondary win type table 222e, and the range parameters corresponding to the change type counter CS1 with the secondary change type table 222f. Then, the read-ahead result from the process of S4701 is stored in an empty area of the winning information storage area 223a (S4702).

Next, it is determined whether the advance notice performance prohibition flag 223h is on (S4703), and if it is determined that the advance notice performance prohibition flag 223h is on (S4703: Yes), the advance notice lottery is prohibited, so a process is executed to update the points stored in the point storage area 223m. Specifically, the point selection table 222c is read (S4704). Then, the points corresponding to the result of the advance reading by the process of S4701 are read from the point selection table 222c, and the read points are added to the value stored in the point storage area 223m (S4705), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4703 that the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is off (S4703: No), it is then determined whether the number of reserved balls is 2 or more (S4706). In other words, it is determined whether the minimum number of reserved balls necessary to execute the consecutive preview performance is reserved. If it is determined in the process of S4706 that the number of reserved balls is 1 or less (S4706: No), this means that the minimum number of reserved balls necessary to execute the consecutive preview performance is not met, so this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4706 that the number of reserved balls is 2 or more (S4706: Yes), this means that the minimum number of reserved balls necessary to execute the consecutive preview performance is reserved, so a process is executed to determine whether or not the consecutive preview performance can be executed based on the variation type specified from the range parameter notified by the current random number range command.

Specifically, first, the preview selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is read (S4707), and the type of variation identified by this advance reading and the value of the performance selection counter 223f are compared with the preview selection table 222b read out to determine whether or not a continuous preview performance can be executed (S4708). Next, it is determined whether the determination result of S4708 corresponds to the execution of a continuous preview performance (S4709), and if the continuous preview performance is not to be executed (S4709: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4709 that a continuous preview performance is to be executed (S4709: Yes), first, the preview type flag 223k is updated according to the performance type of the preview performance identified from the preview selection table 222b (S4710). Next, the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4711), and the read counter value is set as the value of the preview count counter 223i (S4712). Next, the data corresponding to the lottery results (variation type) of each reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a is compared with the point selection table 222c to convert the variation type of each reserved ball into points (S4713). Then, the total value of the points is stored in the point storage area 223m (S4714), the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is set to ON (S4715), and this process ends.

This random number range command processing (see Figure 57) allows the read-ahead processing to be performed accurately based on the range parameters notified by the random number range command.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned stop command process 2 (S4223) will be described with reference to FIG. 58. As described above, this stop command process 2 (S4223) is a process that is executed in place of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment.

In the stop command processing 2 (S4223) in this second embodiment, steps S4401 to S4404, S4411, S4412, S4414, and S4415 are identical to steps S4401 to S4404, S4411, S4412, S4414, and S4415 in the stop command processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35).

In addition, in the stop command process 2 (S4223) in this second embodiment, when the process of S4404 is completed, the points stored in the point storage area 223m are read (S4421) and it is determined whether the read points are 0 (S4422). In the process of S4422, if it is determined that the read points are 0 (S4422: Yes), this means that the reserved balls that are the subject of the judgment of whether or not the continuous preview performance can be performed are not included in the reserved balls that are reserved, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4422, if it is determined that the read value is not 0 (i.e., 1 or more) (S4422: No), this indicates that at least one reserved ball corresponding to the variation type that is the subject of the judgment of whether or not the continuous preview performance can be performed is reserved, so first, the average value (A) is calculated by dividing the points read from the point storage area 223m by the number of reserved balls (the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b) (S4423).

Next, the average value (A) calculated in the process of S4423 is compared with the selection table 222g for when the selection is cancelled (see FIG. 54(c)) to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed (S4424), and the process proceeds to S4411.

In addition, in stop command process 2 (see FIG. 58) in this second embodiment, when the process of S4412 is completed, the reserved areas storing data corresponding to reserved balls with an expectation level corresponding to the range of the average value are searched for, starting from the fourth reserved area in the winning information storage area 223a (S4425), and the process moves to S4414. For example, if the average value (A) is 1 or less, this means that the reserved balls contain at least one of the following: a special reach miss, a super reach miss, and a normal reach miss, so the reserved areas storing data corresponding to the variation type corresponding to a miss with a reach are searched for, starting from the fourth reserved area.

In addition, in the stop command processing 2 in this second embodiment (see FIG. 58), when the processing of S4415 is completed, the points stored in the point storage area 223m are reset to 0 (S4426), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, details of the preview performance setting process 2 (S4521) in this second embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this preview performance setting process 2 (S4521). This preview performance setting process 2 (S4521) is a process executed in place of the preview performance setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37), and like the preview performance setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37), it is a process for determining whether a continuous preview performance is set for the variable display to be started based on the current variable pattern command, and setting the preview performance if it is set.

In the preview performance setting process 2 in this second embodiment (see FIG. 59), each of the steps S4601 to S4607 is identical to each of the steps S4601 to S4607 in the preview performance setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37).

In addition, in the preview performance setting process 2 (see FIG. 59) in this second embodiment, when the processing of S4604 or S4607 is completed, the point selection table 222c is then read (S4611), and the points corresponding to the variable display type that is to be executed this time are identified from the read table (S4612). The points identified in the processing of S4612 are then updated by subtracting them from the value stored in the point storage area 223m (S4613), and this processing is terminated. By executing this preview performance setting process 2 (see FIG. 59), the points stored in the point storage area 223m can always be maintained at the total point value of the reserved balls.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, points are set according to the variation type, and the total value of points corresponding to one or more data stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be grasped. During the advance lottery prohibition state, the total points are updated every time a new winning information command is received, and when the advance lottery prohibition state is released, the variation type contained in the reserved balls is grasped based on the total point value, and a judgment is made as to whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily determine from the point value whether or not reserved balls corresponding to the variation type that is the subject of the judgment as to whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be executed are reserved, and the type of the variation type that is the subject of the judgment as to whether or not the performance can be executed. In addition, the processing load can be reduced compared to the case where the variation types of all reserved balls are judged one by one after the advance lottery prohibition state is released, and the judgment as to whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be executed is made according to the judgment result.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the main control device 110 acquires various counter values based on the detection of a start winning, the range of values to which the acquired various counter values belong is determined, and the range parameter corresponding to the determined range of values is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. That is, the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is configured to determine only the range of the acquired values without performing a look-ahead. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the range of various counter values based on the value of the range parameter notified by the random number range command output from the main control device 110, and to execute the look-ahead on the voice lamp control device 113 side. By configuring in this way, when a start winning is detected, the main control device 110 does not need to execute a process of comparing each random number value specified in the various data tables with the counter value acquired this time to read the lottery result in advance, and only needs to compare the range of values specified in the random number range selection table 202e with the counter value acquired this time, thereby reducing the processing load. Therefore, the main control device 110, which performs the main control of the game, such as the drawing of the jackpot and the update of the display mode of the first pattern, can prevent the processing from becoming heavy, so that the main control of the game can be executed without delay. In addition, the counter value (random number) acquired based on the start winning is not output to the voice lamp control device 113 itself, but is converted to a value range to which the counter value (random number) belongs and output to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, even if a random number range command is illegally acquired from the outside, it is difficult to predict the random number value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) that will result in a jackpot from the illegally acquired random number range command. Therefore, the deterrent effect against fraudulent acts can be enhanced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a pre-reading process corresponding to various counters based on the range of the notified counter value (random number), so that the main control device 110 can execute pre-reading under conditions closer to the various lotteries executed in the special pattern variation start process (see FIG. 23). Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the pre-reading result more accurately.

In the second embodiment, the various counter values acquired when a new start winning is detected are converted into range parameters and notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a random number range command, but it is not necessary to convert them into range parameters. For example, the same number of conversion parameters as the number of values that the various counter values (random numbers) can take may be prepared, and the values that the various counter values can take may be set so that they correspond one-to-one to the values of the conversion parameters. Then, when various counter values are acquired based on the start winning, the various counter values may be converted into the values of the conversion parameters and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to have various data tables that specify the correspondence between the conversion parameters and the lottery results. By configuring in this way, the lottery results can be read in advance on the voice lamp control device 113 side under conditions that are closer to the various lotteries executed on the main control device 110 side, so that the reading can be performed more accurately.

In this second embodiment, the range of values to which the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained based on the start winning belong is identified by the random number range selection table 202e, and the identified range is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a random number range command, but the type of counter that is the subject of this control is not limited to this and may be determined arbitrarily.

In the second embodiment, the range to which the various counter values obtained based on the start winning belong is specified, and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a random number range command, but information other than the range may be notified. For example, a data table in which random numbers and lottery results are associated may be prepared for the number of counter values as a table to be compared with the various counter values at the time of the start winning, and the lottery results corresponding to the various counter values are specified based on the start winning, and output to the voice lamp control device 113 by a command. By configuring in this way, the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be reduced. Also, in this case, there is no need to provide a dedicated data table to be referenced to specify the lottery results of the various counter values at the time of the start winning, and a configuration in which a data table used to execute a lottery for a special pattern at the start of the fluctuation can be used in common.

Third Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 60 to Fig. 63. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum of the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a at the time of the release is calculated, and the variation type included in the reserved ball is determined based on the calculated logical sum data. Then, based on the determined variation type, the possibility of executing the continuous advance notice performance is determined.

In contrast, in the third embodiment, during the advance lottery prohibition state, it is possible to store the type of lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation among the lottery results based on all reserved balls, and the reserved area in which the reserved ball corresponding to the lottery result with the highest expectation is reserved. This stored information is updated every time a pre-read result based on a new start winning is notified by the winning information command. In other words, the type of lottery result (variation type) based on the new start winning is compared with the type of lottery result with the highest expectation that has already been stored, and if the expectation indicated by the new lottery result is higher than the expectation indicated by the lottery result with the highest expectation that has already been stored, the type of lottery result based on the new winning information and the location of the reserved area in which the new winning information is stored are overwritten.

The pachinko machine 10 in this third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and in that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 60, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. Fig. 60(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. As shown in Fig. 60(a), the RAM 223 in the third embodiment is different from the RAM 223 in the first embodiment in that a high expectation type flag 223n and a high expectation position storage area 223p are provided in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see Fig. 12(b)).

The high expectation type flag 223n is a flag that indicates the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation among the lottery results (variation types) corresponding to each reserved ball. When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, it is determined whether or not the variation type that is the subject of the judgment of whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be executed is reserved based on the state of this high expectation type flag 223n (see S4432 in Figure 62). The correspondence between the state of this high expectation type flag 223n and the expectation will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 60 (b).

Figure 60(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the state (value) of the high expectation type flag 223n and the expectation. As shown in Figure 60(b), the high expectation type flag 223n is configured to be set to five types of states, 00H to 04H. As shown in Figure 60(b), the value "00H" of the high expectation type flag 223n corresponds to "long miss" and "short miss", which are the fluctuation types with the lowest expectation, and "01H" corresponds to "normal reach miss", which is the fluctuation type with the second lowest expectation (fourth highest). In addition, the value "02H" of the high expectation type flag 223n corresponds to "super reach miss", which is the fluctuation type with the third lowest expectation (third highest), and "03H" corresponds to "special reach miss", which is the fluctuation type with the second highest expectation (fourth lowest).

And the value "04H" of the high expectation type flag 223n corresponds to the "various hits" (special reach hit, super reach hit, normal reach hit) with the highest expectation. That is, in this third embodiment, when the lottery result is a jackpot, the same expectation is set regardless of the variation type. This is intended to prevent the continuous notice performance from being interrupted by a jackpot occurring in the middle of the continuous notice performance. In other words, if the expectation level is differentiated for the variation type of the jackpot, when a start winning corresponding to a jackpot of a variation type with a low expectation occurs first and then a start winning corresponding to a jackpot of a variation type with a high expectation occurs, the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation position storage area 223p described later may be updated based on the jackpot of the variation type with a high expectation. In other words, when multiple reserved balls corresponding to a jackpot are reserved at the time when the notice lottery prohibition state is released, the reserved jackpot based on the start winning detected later in time may become the subject of the judgment of whether or not the continuous notice performance can be executed. In this case, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice performance, the continuous notice performance is executed until the variable display of the jackpot based on the start winning detected later in time, so the notice performance is set even for the variable display of the jackpot based on the additional introduction prize detected earlier in time. Therefore, since the jackpot occurs after the variable display in which the variation starts earlier, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the continuous notice performance was executed to notify the jackpot. Therefore, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which there is no difference in expectation for the variable type corresponding to the jackpot, and even if a new start winning corresponding to the jackpot is detected when there is already a reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot, the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation position storage area 223p described later are not updated based on the variable type corresponding to the new start winning. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which a jackpot occurs in the middle of the continuous notice performance and the continuous notice performance is resumed again after the jackpot, so that the player can more clearly understand which variable display was the last in the continuous notice performance. Therefore, a more understandable performance can be realized.

This high expectation type flag 223n is reset (set) to the initial value "00H" when it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance (see S4326 in FIG. 61 and S4436 in FIG. 62). In addition, every time a winning information command is received (i.e., every time a new start winning is detected), the variable type indicated by the winning information command is compared with the variable type with the highest expectation in the reserve indicated by the high expectation type flag 223n, and if the expectation of the variable type indicated by the winning information command is higher, the value of this high expectation type flag 223n is updated to a value corresponding to the expectation of the variable type notified by the winning information command (see S4324 in FIG. 61). Then, when the preview lottery prohibition state is released and the execution of the continuous preview performance is decided, it is set so that the continuous preview performance is executed up to the variable display based on the data of the reserved area indicated by this high expectation position storage area 223p (see S4434 in FIG. 62).

Although not shown in the figures, in this third embodiment, the expected degree of all fluctuation types that result in a jackpot is set to the same ("04H"), and accordingly, the contents of the notice selection table 222b are also configured so that a common judgment value is referenced for the fluctuation types that result in a jackpot, regardless of the fluctuation type. That is, for example, in the first embodiment, the judgment value (see 222b2 in FIG. 13) used to judge whether or not a continuous notice performance can be executed when the fluctuation type based on a new start winning is a "super reach hit" is used to judge whether or not a continuous notice performance can be executed for all fluctuation types that correspond to a jackpot in this third embodiment.

Note that when the variation type based on the newly detected starting winning is a jackpot variation type, the judgment value used to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed is not limited to this. It may be configured to use the judgment value (222b3 in FIG. 13) used for the judgment in the case of a normal reach hit in the first embodiment, or it may be configured to use a range of judgment values that is not specified in the preview selection table 222b in the first embodiment. This allows for greater freedom in design.

Returning to FIG. 60(a), the explanation will be continued. The high expectation position storage area 223p is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the position of the reserved area in which the most highly anticipated variation type (i.e., the variation type of expectation indicated by the value of the high expectation type flag 223n) is reserved among the reserved balls. Specifically, if the reserved area in which the reserved ball corresponding to the most highly anticipated variation type is reserved is the first reserved area, "01H" is stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p, if it is the second reserved area, "02H" is stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p, if it is the third reserved area, "03H" is stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p, and if it is the fourth reserved area, "03H" is stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. When the execution of the continuous preview performance is decided (i.e., when the preview lottery is prohibited), this high expectation position storage area 223p is reset (set) to the initial value "00H" (see S4326 in FIG. 61 and S4436 in FIG. 62). Also, every time a winning information command is received (i.e., every time a new start winning is detected), the variable type indicated by the winning information command is compared with the variable type with the highest expectation in the reserved state indicated by the high expectation type flag 223n, and if the expectation of the variable type indicated by the winning information command is higher, the value corresponding to the reserved area in which the data corresponding to the winning information notified by the winning information command is newly stored is overwritten in the high expectation position storage area 223p (see S4325 in FIG. 61). When the preview lottery prohibition state is released and the execution of the continuous preview performance is decided, it is set so that the continuous preview performance is executed up to the variable display based on the data of the reserved area indicated by this high expectation position storage area 223p (see S4434 in FIG. 62).

In this way, in the third embodiment, in the advance lottery prohibition state, the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the reserved area in which the lottery result with the highest expectation is stored can be grasped by the value of the high expectation type flag 223n and the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. As a result, in the judgment of whether or not to execute the continuous advance lottery performance executed when the advance lottery prohibition state is released, it is sufficient to judge whether or not to execute the continuous advance lottery performance by the judgment ratio (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type indicated by the high expectation type flag 223n, and since there is no need to perform complex control such as determining the variation types of all reserved balls one by one, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Furthermore, since it is possible to easily identify the reserved area in which the data corresponding to the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation is stored based on the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p, the processing for identifying the range of reserved balls in which the continuous advance lottery performance is executed can be realized by simpler control. This can further reduce the processing load from when the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted to when the consecutive preview performance is set.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 61 to Fig. 63. First, the winning information command process 3 (S4231) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 61.

Winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) is a process executed in place of the winning information command processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 34), and like the winning information command processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 34), it is a process for analyzing the received winning command and determining whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performance.

In the winning information command processing 3 in this third embodiment (see FIG. 61), each of the processes S4301 to S4311 is the same as each of the processes S4301 to S4311 in the winning information command processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 34). In addition, in the winning information command processing 3 in this third embodiment (see FIG. 61), if it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the advance notice performance prohibition flag 223h is on (S4304: Yes), the high expectation type flag 223n is read (S4321), and the expectation indicated by the read high expectation type flag 223n is compared with the expectation of the variable type indicated by the received winning information command (S4322). Then, it is determined whether the expectation level corresponding to the variable type notified by the newly received winning information command is a higher expectation level (S4323), and if it is determined that the newly notified variable type has a higher expectation level (S4323: Yes), the high expectation level type flag 223n is updated to a value corresponding to the expectation level of the variable type notified by the current winning information command (see FIG. 60(b)) (S4324).

After processing S4324, the value corresponding to the type of reserved area (any of reserved areas 1 to 4) in which the data notified by this winning information command is stored is overwritten (stored) in the high expectation position storage area 223p (S4325), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4323 that the expectation of the newly notified variable type is equal to or lower than the expectation indicated by the high expectation type flag 223n (S4323: No), the processing of S4324 and S4325 is skipped, and this processing ends as is.

In addition, in the winning information command process 3 in this third embodiment (see FIG. 61), after the processing of S4310 is completed (i.e., after the continuous preview performance is set), the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation position storage area 223p are both reset to their initial values (S4326), and the process proceeds to S4311.

By executing this winning information command process 3 (see FIG. 61), each time winning information based on a new start winning is received in the advance lottery prohibition state, the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation among all reserved balls, including the new reserved balls based on the winning information, and the reserved area in which it is stored can be determined again. Therefore, when the advance lottery prohibition state is released, the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the reserved area in which it is stored can be easily determined based on the value (state) of the high expectation type flag 223n and the data of the high expectation position storage area 223p. Therefore, the processing load from the release of the advance lottery prohibition state to the completion of the setting of the continuous advance lottery performance can be reduced, so that the setting process of the continuous advance lottery performance can be executed more preferably.

Next, details of stop command process 3 (S4232) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 62. Stop command process 3 (S4232) in this third embodiment is a process executed in place of the stop command process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35), and like the stop command process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35), it is a process for determining whether it is time to release the advance notice lottery prohibition state, and if it is time to release the advance notice lottery prohibition state, determining whether or not to execute a continuous advance notice performance based on the lottery results of all reserved balls.

In the stop command processing 3 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 62), the same processing as S4401 to S4404, S4409, S4411, S4412, and S4415 in the stop command processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35) is executed in each of the steps S4401 to S4404, S4409, S4411, S4412, and S4415. In addition, in the stop command processing 3 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 62), when the processing of S4404 is completed, the high expectation type flag 223n is read (S4431), and it is determined whether the value (state) of the high expectation type flag 223n is "00H" or not (S4432). In other words, it is determined whether the reserved ball that is the subject of the judgment of whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed is included in the reserved ball.

In the process of S4432, if the value of the high expectation type flag 223n is "00H" (S4432: Yes), the most highly anticipated variation type in the reserve is "long miss" or "short miss", which means that the reserved ball that is the subject of the judgment of whether or not the continuous preview performance can be performed is not included in the reserve, and this process is terminated without executing the judgment of whether or not the continuous preview performance can be performed. On the other hand, in the process of S4432, if it is determined that the value of the high expectation type flag 223n is not "00H" (S4432: No), it is next determined whether the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p is "02H" or more (S4433), and if it is determined that it is "01H" (S4433: No), it means that the reserved ball corresponding to the most highly anticipated variation type is stored in the first reserved area, and the preview performance cannot be performed across multiple variation displays, so this process is terminated.

In contrast, if it is determined in the processing of S4433 that the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p is "02H" or more (S4433: Yes), this means that the variable type to be judged as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed is included in the reserve, and that variable type is reserved in the second reserve area or later, so a judgment is made as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. Specifically, the preview selection table 222b is read (S4409), and based on the read preview selection table 222b and the variable type corresponding to the value (state) of the high expectation type flag 223n, a judgment is made (lottery) as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed (S4434), and processing proceeds to S4411.

In addition, in stop command processing 3 in this third embodiment (see FIG. 62), when processing of S4412 is completed, the value stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p is set as the value of the advance notice count counter 223i (S4435), the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation position storage area 223p are both reset to their initial values of "00H" (S4436), and processing transitions to S4415.

By executing this stop command process 3 (see FIG. 62), when the preview lottery prohibition state is released, it is possible to easily determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance based on the type of variation indicated by the state (value) of the high expectation type flag 223n. Furthermore, when it is decided to execute a continuous preview performance, the range of the reserved area in which the continuous preview performance is to be set can be easily identified based on the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load from when the preview lottery prohibition state is released until the setting of the continuous preview performance is completed.

Next, referring to FIG. 63, details of preview performance setting process 3 (S4531) in this third embodiment will be described. Preview performance setting process 3 (S4531) in this third embodiment is a process executed in place of the preview performance setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37), and like the preview performance setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37), it is a process for determining whether a continuous preview performance is set for the variable display to be started based on the current variable pattern command, and setting the preview performance if it is set.

In the preview performance setting process 3 in this third embodiment (see FIG. 63), each of the steps S4601 to S4607 is identical to each of the steps S4601 to S4607 in the preview performance setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37).

In addition, in the notice performance setting process 3 (see FIG. 63) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4604 or S4607 is completed (i.e., when the timing of the start of the fluctuation during the notice lottery prohibition state), it is next determined whether the state (value) of the high expectation type flag 223n is "00H" (S4621), and if it is a value other than "00H" (S4621: No), the data of the high expectation position storage area 223p is updated by subtracting 1 (S4622), and this process is terminated. This sets the start of a new fluctuation display, and as the data of each reserved area is shifted, the data indicating the position (reserved area) where the reserved ball corresponding to the fluctuation type with the highest expectation is stored (data of the high expectation position storage area 223p) can be updated. On the other hand, in the process of S4621, if it is determined that the state of the high expectation type flag 223n is "00H" (S4621: Yes), the process of S4622 is skipped and this process is terminated as it is. If the state of the high expectation type flag 223n is "00H", this means that in the current advance lottery prohibition state, either the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) has never been executed, or the variable type corresponding to the new winning information has never been determined to have a high expectation in the processing of S4323 of the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61), and therefore the data in the high expectation position storage area 223p remains at the initial value of "00H".

By executing this preview performance setting process 3 (see Figure 63), each time the start of a new variable display is set in the preview lottery prohibited state, the data in the high expectation position storage area 223p can be linked to the data in the actual winning information storage area 223a and updated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, while the advance lottery prohibition state is in effect, the type of lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation among all the lottery results based on the reserved balls and the reserved area in which the reserved balls corresponding to the lottery result with the highest expectation are reserved can be ascertained from the state of the high expectation type flag 223n and the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. Then, when the advance lottery prohibition state is released, the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the reserved area in which it is stored are determined based on the value (state) of the high expectation type flag 223n and the data in the high expectation position storage area 223p.

By configuring in this way, when the advance lottery prohibition state is released, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the continuous advance lottery performance can be executed based on the variation type indicated by the state (value) of the high expectation type flag 223n. In other words, compared to the case where the variation type of each reserved ball is determined one by one from all the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the variation type with the highest expectation is identified, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous advance lottery performance can be executed by a simple process, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced when the advance lottery prohibition state is released. In addition, when the execution of the continuous advance lottery performance is decided, the range of the reserved area to be set for the continuous advance lottery performance can be easily specified based on the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. In other words, the process of searching for the reserved area in which the data corresponding to the variation type that is the subject of the judgment of whether or not the continuous advance lottery performance can be executed can be omitted, and it can be replaced by the simple process of simply reading the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p, so that the processing load when setting the range of reserved balls to be the target of the continuous advance lottery performance can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, when the winning information command notifies the result of the lottery corresponding to a jackpot, and when the lottery result corresponding to a jackpot is reserved among the reserved balls at the time when the advance lottery prohibition state is released, the same judgment value is used to determine whether or not to execute the consecutive advance notice performance, regardless of the variation type corresponding to the jackpot, but this is not limited to this. As in the first embodiment, the ratio at which the consecutive advance notice performance is determined to be executed according to the variation type may be different according to the variation type.

In the third embodiment, the configuration is such that when the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted, it is determined whether or not the consecutive preview performance can be executed based on two types of information: the value of the high expectation type flag 223n and the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure only one of them in the RAM 223 and determine whether or not the consecutive preview performance can be executed in conjunction with the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the RAM 223.

In the third embodiment, the winning information notified by the winning information command is stored in an empty area of the winning information storage area 223a, but the winning information storage area 223a may be deleted. Normally, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance based only on the winning information notified by the winning information command, and in the preview lottery prohibition state, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance when the preview lottery prohibition state is released based only on the data stored in the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation position storage area 223p. By deleting the winning information storage area 223a, the capacity of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64 to FIG. 68. In the first embodiment described above, the configuration was such that the consecutive notice performance is prevented (suppressed) from being determined in duplicate by setting the notice lottery prohibition state at the time when the execution of the consecutive notice performance is determined. Then, when the notice lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum of the data stored in each reserved area of the winning information storage area 223a at the time of the release is calculated, and the possibility of execution of the consecutive notice performance is determined based on the logical sum. That is, based on the logical sum data, it is determined whether the reserved balls include a reserved ball of a variation type that is the subject of the determination of whether the consecutive notice performance is performed, and what is the variation type with the highest expectation among the currently reserved balls. Then, when the variation type that is the subject of the determination of whether the consecutive notice performance is performed is included, the configuration was such that the possibility of execution of the consecutive notice performance is determined (lottery) at the determination ratio (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type with the highest expectation.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set not only when the execution of the continuous advance notice performance is decided, but also when a jackpot occurs. Then, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released at the end of the jackpot, and the calculation of the logical sum data and the judgment of whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be executed are executed. This allows the judgment of whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be executed by taking into account the variation types of all reserved balls reserved at the end of the jackpot, so it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous advance notice performance being set based on reserved balls with low expectations even though reserved balls with higher expectations are reserved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the continuous advance notice performance is set on reserved balls with low expectations immediately after the end of the jackpot, but the continuous advance notice performance is not set on reserved balls with high expectations, or a situation in which reserved balls with high expectations are consumed in the middle of the continuous advance notice performance, and reserved balls with low expectations are consumed in the final variation display of the continuous advance notice performance. Therefore, it is possible to preferably execute the continuous advance notice performance.

The pachinko machine 10 in this fourth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound and lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The various electrical configurations, the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound and lamp control device 113, and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Below, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 64, the change over time in the lottery (determination) state of the consecutive preview performance after winning a jackpot in this fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, when a jackpot is won and the timing of the start of the jackpot (start timing of the opening period) arrives, a preview lottery prohibition state is set. As a result, even if a start winning is detected during the jackpot, a judgment (lottery) as to whether or not the consecutive preview performance can be executed is not executed. The example in FIG. 64 illustrates a case where two start winnings (win a and win b) are detected during a jackpot, but because the preview lottery prohibition state is set whether or not win a is detected or win b is detected, a judgment as to whether or not the consecutive preview performance can be executed is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 64, the advance notice lottery prohibition state continues even when the ending period of the jackpot is reached, and the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released when the ending period ends (i.e., when the timing of the jackpot end is reached). When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the possibility of executing the continuous advance notice performance is determined based on the contents (variation type) of the reserved balls (winning a and winning b) reserved during the jackpot and the reserved balls that were already reserved at the time the jackpot started. That is, similar to when the advance notice lottery prohibition state in the first embodiment described above is released, the logical sum of the data stored in each reserved area of the winning information storage area 223a is calculated to identify the variation type with the highest expectation. Then, the possibility of executing the continuous advance notice performance is determined based on the lottery probability (determination ratio) corresponding to the variation type with the highest expectation.

By configuring in this way, the possibility of executing the continuous preview performance can be determined by taking into account the variation types of all reserved balls at the end of the jackpot, so that it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous preview performance from being set based on reserved balls with low expectations, even if reserved balls with higher expectations are reserved. If the possibility of executing the continuous preview performance is determined each time a start winning is detected until the execution of the continuous preview performance is determined as in normal times during the execution of the jackpot, there is a possibility that a start winning of a high expectation variation type will be detected after the execution of the continuous preview performance is determined for a start winning of a low expectation variation type. In this case, the continuous preview performance that starts from the variation immediately after the end of the jackpot continues until the variation type with low expectation, and a variation display with high expectation is executed immediately after the end of the continuous preview performance, which may reduce the player's confidence in the continuous preview performance. In contrast, in the fourth embodiment, a preview lottery prohibition state is set during the jackpot, so that it is possible to prevent situations such as the occurrence of a situation in which a continuous preview performance is set for reserved balls with low expectation immediately after the end of a jackpot, but a continuous preview performance is not set for reserved balls with high expectation, or a situation in which a reserved ball with high expectation is consumed in the middle of a continuous preview performance, and a reserved ball with low expectation is consumed in the final variable display of the continuous preview performance. Therefore, the continuous preview performance can be executed in an optimal manner.

Although not shown in the figure, if the consecutive preview performance has already been set at the time when the jackpot starts, the consecutive preview performance setting is cleared when the preview lottery prohibition state is set. This configuration prevents the jackpot from ending with the consecutive preview performance setting from before the start of the jackpot remaining, so it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performance after the jackpot, taking into account all the variations in the reserved balls at the time of the jackpot win and the reserved balls that have increased during the jackpot.

In the fourth embodiment, the settings of the consecutive preview effects that were already set before the start of the jackpot are cleared when the start timing of the jackpot is reached, but the timing of clearing the settings of the consecutive preview effects is not limited to this and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the settings of the consecutive preview effects may be cleared based on the detection of the first start winning in the jackpot. By configuring in this way, for example, if no start winning is detected during the jackpot, the settings of the consecutive preview effects before the start of the jackpot can be reused as the settings after the jackpot. In other words, when the preview lottery prohibition state is released, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of unnecessary processing of determining whether or not the consecutive preview effects can be executed again for the exact same reserved balls as before the start of the jackpot, and therefore the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 65 to Fig. 68, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, referring to the flowchart in Fig. 65, the command determination process 4 (S4131) in the fourth embodiment will be described. This command determination process 4 (S4131) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see Fig. 33) in the first embodiment described above, and is a process for performing control according to a command received from the main control device 110, similar to the command determination process (see Fig. 33) in the first embodiment.

In command determination process 4 in this fourth embodiment (see FIG. 65), steps S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, and S4216 are identical to steps S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, and S4216 in the command determination process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 33).

In addition, in command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in this fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4209 that a status command has been received (S4209: Yes), status command process is executed (S4231) to update the data in the game status storage area 223g according to the game status indicated by the status command, and this process is terminated. Details of this status command process (S4231) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

In addition, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4211 that a winning information command has been received (S4211: Yes), instead of the winning information command process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 34), the winning information command process 4 is executed (S4232), and this process is terminated. Details of this winning information command process 4 (S4232) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4211 that a winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), it is next determined whether an opening command is included in the commands received from the main control device 110 (S4233), and if it is determined that an opening command has been received (S4233: Yes), first, the advance notice performance prohibition flag 223h is set to ON (S4234). This allows the advance notice lottery prohibition state to be set at the time when the opening period of the big win begins.

When the processing of S4234 is completed, the counter value of the notice count counter 223i is reset to 0, and the notice type flag 223k is reset to the initial value "00H", thereby resetting the continuous notice performance setting (S4235), setting an opening command for display (S4236), and terminating this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4233 that an opening command has not been received (S4233: No), the processing proceeds to S4213.

In addition, in command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in this fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4213 that a stop command has been received (S4213: Yes), instead of the stop command process (see FIG. 35), a release time determination process is executed (S4237) and the process proceeds to S4215. This release time determination process (S4237) is a process for determining whether or not the advance lottery prohibition state has been released, and for determining whether or not a continuous advance lottery performance can be executed according to the fluctuation type of each reserved ball when the advance lottery prohibition state has been released. Details of this release time determination process (S4237) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

Next, the above-mentioned status command process (S4231) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 66. As described above, this status command process (S4231) is a process for updating the data in the game status storage area 223g according to the game status indicated by the status command.

In this state command process (see FIG. 66), first, the data stored in the game state storage area 223g is updated according to the game state indicated by the received state command (S4801), and then it is determined whether or not the current state command is a state command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802). That is, it is determined whether or not the state command is a state command set by the processing of S1015 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As described above, of the state command consisting of 1 byte of data, the lower two bits are data indicating the game state. That is, the lowest bit is a bit indicating whether or not the normal pattern is in a time-saving state, and the second lowest bit is a bit indicating whether or not the special pattern is in a probability variable state. In this fourth embodiment, if a predetermined bit other than the lower two bits (for example, the most significant bit) is on, it indicates that the state command was output at the end of the jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the state command was output at a time other than the end of the jackpot. That is, in the process of S1015 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the lowest 2 bits of the status command are set according to the game state after the jackpot, and a status command is generated with a specified bit (e.g., the most significant bit) set to on. As a result, in the process of S4802, simply by determining whether the specified bit (e.g., the most significant bit) is on, it is possible to easily determine whether the status command was output at the end of the jackpot.

In the process of S4802, if it is determined that the state command is output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: Yes), it means that the jackpot has ended, so the notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to ON (S4803), the above-mentioned release time determination process is executed (S4804), and this process is terminated. By setting the notice prohibition release flag 223j to ON in the process of S4802, in the release time determination process (S4804), it is possible to determine whether or not a continuous notice performance can be executed based on the variation type of the reserved balls reserved at the start of the jackpot and the reserved balls newly acquired during the execution of the jackpot. In this way, in the fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that the execution of the continuous notice performance is determined by the release time determination process (see FIG. 68), which is the exact same process, when the notice lottery prohibition state is released after the execution of the continuous notice performance is completed and when the jackpot ends. This makes it possible to simplify the description of the control program compared to a configuration in which the execution of the continuous notice performance is determined by a separate process depending on the release trigger of the notice lottery prohibition state. Therefore, the amount of work for the developer during development can be reduced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4802 that the status command received from the main control device 110 is not the command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: No), the processes of S4803 and S4804 are skipped and the process is terminated.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned winning information command process 4 (S4232) will be described with reference to FIG. 67. As described above, this winning information command process 4 (S4232) is a process that is executed in place of the winning information command process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment.

In the winning information command process 4 (S4232) in this fourth embodiment, steps S4301 to S4311 are executed in the same manner as steps S4301 to S4311 in the winning information command process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the winning information command process 4 (see FIG. 67) in this fourth embodiment, after the process of S4301 is completed, it is determined whether or not a reserved ball corresponding to a jackpot has already been reserved before the initial winning that triggered the output of the current winning information command (S4331). More specifically, the data of the execution area and each reserved area of the winning information storage area 223a is read out, and it is determined whether at least one of the data is a variable type corresponding to a jackpot (either a special reach hit, a super reach hit, or a normal reach hit). In other words, it calculates the logical sum of all reserved areas other than the reserved area that stores the data based on the current winning information command, and determines whether at least one of the upper three bits is on.

In the process of S4331, if it is determined that the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot is already reserved (one of the upper three bits of the logical sum is on) (S4331: Yes), even if a continuous preview performance is set up to the reserved ball based on the current start winning, if a jackpot occurs in the middle, the continuous preview performance will be reset, and the continuous preview performance will be incomplete (for example, a continuous preview performance that spans three fluctuations may be set, but the jackpot occurs on the first fluctuation). Therefore, in this case, this process is terminated without determining whether the continuous preview performance can be executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4331, if it is determined that the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot is not reserved (S4331: No), each process of S4302 to S4311 is executed to determine whether the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the fluctuation type indicated by the current winning information command.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned release time discrimination process (S4237, S4804) will be described with reference to FIG. 68. This release time discrimination process (S4237, S4804) is a process for determining whether or not a continuous preview performance can be executed and the range of execution based on the fluctuation type of each reserved ball when the preview lottery prohibition state is released. In other words, it is a process equivalent to the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. Note that in the first embodiment, the preview lottery prohibition state could only be released when the stop command was received, but in this fourth embodiment, the preview lottery prohibition state is also released when the jackpot ends. For this reason, the name of the process has been changed to "release time discrimination process".

In the release time discrimination process (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, the same processes as those in the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment are executed in each of the processes S4401 to S4415. In addition, in the release time discrimination process (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S4403 is completed, it is determined whether the variable display being executed or the variable display to be executed next is a variable display for notifying a jackpot (S4441). More specifically, the data of the execution area and the reserved first area of the winning information storage area 223a are read out, and it is determined whether data corresponding to the variable type of the jackpot is stored in either area. In the process of S4441, if it is determined that data corresponding to the variable type of the jackpot is stored (S4441: Yes), even if a continuous notice performance is set, it means that a jackpot will be achieved before the notice performance is executed continuously across multiple variable displays, and the setting of the continuous notice performance will be reset. Therefore, in this case, the process ends without determining whether or not the consecutive preview performance can be performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4441 that neither the variable display currently being executed nor the variable display to be executed next is a jackpot (S4441: No), the process executes the processes of S4404 to S4415 to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed and the range of execution, and then ends this process.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is configured to set the pre-notification lottery prohibition state not only when the execution of the continuous pre-notification performance is decided, but also when a jackpot occurs. The pre-notification lottery prohibition state is also released at the end of the jackpot, and the calculation of the logical sum data and the determination of whether or not the continuous pre-notification performance can be executed are performed. This allows the determination of whether or not the continuous pre-notification performance can be executed by taking into account the variation types of all reserved balls reserved at the end of the jackpot, so that it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous pre-notification performance being set based on reserved balls with low expectations even though reserved balls with higher expectations are reserved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the continuous pre-notification performance is set on reserved balls with low expectations immediately after the end of the jackpot, but the continuous pre-notification performance is not set on reserved balls with high expectations, or a situation in which reserved balls with high expectations are consumed in the middle of the continuous pre-notification performance, and reserved balls with low expectations are consumed in the final variation display of the continuous pre-notification performance. Therefore, it is possible to preferably execute the continuous pre-notification performance.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that when the preview lottery prohibition state is released after the execution of the consecutive preview performances has ended, and when a jackpot has ended, the same process, the release time determination process (see FIG. 68), is executed to determine whether or not the consecutive preview performances can be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the writing of the control program compared to a configuration in which the execution of the consecutive preview performances is determined by separate processes depending on the trigger for releasing the preview lottery prohibition state. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of work for developers during development.

In the fourth embodiment, the notification lottery prohibition state is released at the end of the jackpot, and a judgment is made as to whether or not to execute a continuous notification performance after the end of the jackpot based on the variation types of the reserved balls that were already reserved at the start of the jackpot and the reserved balls based on the start winning newly detected during the jackpot. However, the timing of releasing the notification lottery prohibition state and the timing of judging whether or not to execute the continuous notification performance are not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a start winning is detected during a jackpot and the notification lottery prohibition state is released and whether or not to execute the continuous notification performance is judged when the number of reserved balls reaches a maximum. This is because, since the number of reserved balls reaches a maximum, it is impossible for the number of reserved balls to increase thereafter (i.e., the variation type with the highest expectation does not change until the end of the jackpot), the same result as that of judging whether or not to execute the continuous notification performance at the end of the jackpot can be obtained. By configuring in this way, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the jackpot can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a malfunction such as a delay in the timing of starting the variation display of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 after the end of the jackpot.

In the fourth embodiment, the same process, the release time discrimination process (see FIG. 68), is executed when the advance lottery prohibition state is released based on the end of a jackpot and when the advance lottery prohibition state is released based on the end of a continuous advance notice performance. However, it is not necessary to execute the same process. Separate processes may be prepared. By configuring in this way, the process can be made different when the jackpot ends and when the continuous advance notice performance ends, so that the execution conditions of the continuous advance notice performance can be made different. This makes it possible to realize special control, such as, for example, allowing the execution of the continuous advance notice performance only when a win is ultimately obtained after the end of a jackpot. Therefore, the player can play the game while paying attention to the release conditions of the advance lottery prohibition state, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Modification of the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modified example of the fourth embodiment described above will be described with reference to Fig. 69 to Fig. 73. In the fourth embodiment described above, a notice lottery prohibition state is set during a jackpot, and the notice lottery prohibition state is released at the end of the jackpot to determine whether or not a continuous notice performance can be performed.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, the preview lottery prohibition state is released at a specific timing during the jackpot (at the start of the ending period) to determine whether or not a continuous preview performance can be executed. The ending performance of the jackpot is then configured to be able to indicate the degree of expectation of whether or not a continuous preview performance will start after the jackpot ends. This makes it possible to make the player feel a stronger sense of anticipation for the continuous preview performance when an ending performance with a high expectation of the execution of a continuous preview performance is executed, even before the variable display of the third pattern begins on the third pattern display device 81.

The pachinko machine 10 in this modified fourth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment described above in that the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the modified example of the fourth embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 69(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modified example will be described. FIG. 69(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 69(a), the ROM 222 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fourth embodiment described above (the same as the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12(a))) in that an ending selection table 222h is added. The other configurations are the same as those in the fourth embodiment described above, so details thereof will be omitted.

The ending selection table 222h is a data table that is referenced to determine the mode of the ending performance when the ending period of the jackpot begins. As described above, in this modified example, the mode of the ending performance indicates the expectation that the continuous preview performance will be executed after the jackpot ends. In this modified example, either the normal mode (mode with low expectation that the continuous preview performance will be executed) or the special mode (mode with high expectation that the continuous preview performance will be executed) of the ending performance is determined from the ending selection table 222h in a ratio according to the result of the judgment on whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the fact that the ending period of the jackpot has begun (see S4910 in FIG. 72).

Details of the ending selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the contents of the ending selection table 222h. As shown in FIG. 70, the ending performance selection table 222h specifies the range of the performance selection counter 223f value (random number value) for determining the normal ending with low expectation of the continuous preview performance and the range of the random number value (counter value) for determining the preview suggestion ending with high expectation of the continuous preview performance, in correspondence with each judgment result of the execution or non-execution of the continuous preview performance and the preview type. Although not shown in the figure, the background color during the ending performance is set to blue in the normal ending, while the background color is set to red in the preview suggestion ending. With this configuration, the player can easily distinguish whether it is a normal ending or a preview suggestion ending just by checking the color of the background. Therefore, at the start of the ending period of the jackpot, the player can play the game in the hope that the background will turn red.

As shown in Figure 70, for "Preview Performance A," the range of random number values (counter values) corresponding to normal endings is specified as "0 to 49," and the range of random number values (counter values) corresponding to preview suggested endings is specified as "50 to 99" (see 222h1 in Figure 70). Therefore, when "Preview Performance A" is determined in the lottery for whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performances executed during a jackpot, there is a 50% chance (50/100) that the preview suggested ending will be set as the ending performance of the jackpot.

For "preview performance B", the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to normal endings is specified as "0 to 24", and the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to preview suggested endings is specified as "25 to 99" (see 222h2 in FIG. 70). Therefore, when "preview performance B" is determined in the lottery for the execution of consecutive preview performances executed during a jackpot, the preview suggested ending is set as the jackpot ending performance with a probability of 75% (75/100). For "preview performance C", the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to normal endings is specified as "0 to 9", and the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to preview suggested endings is specified as "10 to 99" (see 222h3 in FIG. 70). Therefore, if "Preview Performance C" is determined in the lottery for whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performances during a jackpot, there is a 90% chance (90/100) that a preview suggestion ending will be set as the ending performance of the jackpot.

On the other hand, the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to cases where the consecutive preview performance is not executed after a jackpot (when the consecutive preview performance is not executed) is specified as "0 to 94", and the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to the preview suggested ending is specified as "95 to 99" (see 222h4 in Figure 70). For this reason, when the lottery for the execution of the consecutive preview performance executed during a jackpot determines that the consecutive preview performance will not be executed, the preview suggested ending is set as the jackpot ending performance only 5% of the time (5/100).

In this way, in this modified example, when the consecutive preview performance is not executed, the probability that the preview suggestive ending is set as the ending performance is set extremely low (5%), so that the expectation for the execution of the consecutive preview performance can be increased at the time when the preview suggestive ending is executed. In addition, in this modified example, the higher the preview type with a higher expectation of a jackpot is determined, the higher the probability of the preview suggestive ending being determined. That is, in the case of "preview performance A" with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot, the preview suggestive ending is determined with a probability of 50%, in the case of "preview performance B" with a higher expectation of a jackpot than "preview performance A", the preview suggestive ending is determined with a probability of 75%, and in the case of "preview performance C" with the highest expectation of a jackpot, the preview suggestive ending is determined with a probability of 90%. By configuring in this way, when the preview suggestive ending is executed, the player can be made to expect that "preview performance C" has been determined. In other words, when the preview suggestive ending is executed, the player's expectation for a jackpot can be increased, so that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the mode of the ending performance.

In this modified example, the background color during the execution of the ending performance is different between the normal ending and the preview suggestion ending, but this is merely an example, and any performance mode can be used as long as the player can distinguish between the normal ending and the preview suggestion ending. Specifically, for example, the text displayed during the ending performance may be different between the normal ending and the preview suggestion ending (for example, the text "See you!" is displayed in the normal ending and the text "Chance!" is displayed in the preview suggestion ending), or the character displayed during the ending performance may be different (for example, a female character is displayed in the normal ending and a male character is displayed in the preview suggestion ending). Furthermore, the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 is not the only way to make the normal ending and the preview suggestion ending different. For example, the music played during the ending performance may be different, or the light color or light pattern of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be different, to make the performance mode of the normal ending and the preview suggestion ending different.

In addition, in this modified example, only two types of ending performance modes, a normal ending and a preview hint ending, are provided, but this is not limited to this. For example, four types of ending performance modes may be provided, with each type set as a type that is likely to be selected when preview performance A is executed after a jackpot, a type that is likely to be selected when preview performance B is executed, a type that is likely to be selected when preview performance C is executed, and a type that is likely to be selected when continuous preview performance is not executed. By configuring it in this way, not only the expectation of continuous preview performances being executed from the ending performance mode, but also the type of preview performance that is likely to be executed can be predicted during the ending period, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the ending performance mode.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 69(b). FIG. 69(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 69(b), the RAM 223 in this modified example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment described above (which is the same as the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12(b))) in that a judgment unexecuted flag 223q has been added. The other configuration is the same as the fourth embodiment described above, so details thereof will be omitted.

The undetermined flag 223q is a flag that indicates whether or not a determination has been made as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed at the start of the ending period. If the undetermined flag 223q is on, it indicates that the execution of the continuous preview performance has not been performed at the start of the ending period, and if it is off, it indicates that a determination has been made as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed.

Here, in this modified example, the determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance is made only if the number of reserved balls has accumulated to the upper limit (four) at the start of the ending period. If it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance when the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit, then if a new start winning is detected during the execution of the ending performance, and the variation type of the new start winning has a higher expectation than the variation type of each reserved ball for which the continuous preview performance has already been set, a situation will occur in which a variation display with a higher expectation is executed immediately after the continuous preview performance ends.

Therefore, in this modified example, the system is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance only if the number of reserved balls has accumulated to the upper limit at the start of the ending period and there is no possibility that the status of the reserved balls will change during the ending period. Then, if it is not determined whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance at the start of the ending period, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance at the end of the jackpot. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance by taking into account the type of change in all reserved balls at the end of the jackpot, so the continuous preview performance can be executed optimally.

The unexecuted judgment flag 223q is set to ON if it has not been determined whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performance at the start of the ending period (see S4908 in FIG. 73), and is set to OFF if it is determined whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performance at the end of the jackpot (see S4812 in FIG. 72).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 71 to Fig. 73, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. First, referring to Fig. 71, details of the command determination process 5 (S4141) will be described. This command determination process 5 (S4141) is a process executed in place of the command determination process 4 (see Fig. 65) in the fourth embodiment, and is a process for performing control according to a command received from the main control device 110, similar to the command determination process 4 (see Fig. 65) in the fourth embodiment.

In command determination process 5 (see FIG. 71) in this modified example of the fourth embodiment, steps S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, S4216, and S4232 to S4237 are identical to steps S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, S4216, and S4232 to S4237 in command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment.

In addition, in command determination process 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4209 that a status command has been received (S4209: Yes), status command process 5 is executed (S4241) instead of the status command process in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 66), and this process ends. Details of this status command process 5 (S4241) will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

In addition, in command determination process 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4233 that the commands received from the main control unit 110 do not include an opening command (S4233: No), it is determined whether the commands received from the main control unit 110 include an ending command (S4242). Then, if it is determined in the process of S4242 that an ending command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4242: Yes), an ending command process is executed to select the mode of ending presentation (S4243), and this process is terminated. Details of this ending command process (S4243) will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

Next, the above-mentioned status command process 5 (S4241) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 72. This status command process 5 (S4241) is a process for updating the data in the game status storage area 223g according to the game status indicated by the status command received from the main control device 110, similar to the status command process in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 66).

In state command processing 5 (see FIG. 72) in this modified example of the fourth embodiment, steps S4801 to S4804 are executed in the same manner as steps S4801 to S4804 in the state command processing (see FIG. 66) in the fourth embodiment.

In addition, in status command processing 5 (see FIG. 72) in a modified example of the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the processing of S4802 that the current status command is a command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: Yes), it is determined whether the judgment not yet executed flag 223q is on (S4811), and if the judgment not yet executed flag 223q is on (S4811: Yes), this indicates that the judgment as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed has not been executed at the start of the ending period, so the judgment not yet executed flag 223q is set to off (S4812), and the processing of S4803 and S4804 is executed to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4811 that the determination not yet performed flag 223q is off (S4811: No), this means that the number of reserved balls reached the upper limit at the start of the ending period, and therefore the possibility of performing the continuous preview performance has already been determined, so the processes of S4812, S4803, and S4804 are skipped and this process ends as is.

By executing this state command process 5 (see FIG. 72), even if the determination as to whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performance has not been made at the start of the ending period, the determination as to whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performance can be made at the end of the jackpot, so that for each jackpot, the determination as to whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performance can be reliably made according to the fluctuation type of the reserved balls that were reserved at the start of the jackpot and the reserved balls that increased during the jackpot.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned ending command process (S4243) will be described with reference to FIG. 73. As described above, this ending command process is a process for selecting the mode of the ending presentation.

In this ending command process (see FIG. 73), first, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b is read (S4901), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 4 (S4902). That is, it is determined whether the reserved ball number has reached the upper limit value. In the process of S4902, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b is 4 (S4902: Yes), there is no possibility that the reserved balls corresponding to the variable type with higher expectation will increase during the ending period, so each process of S4903 and S4904 is executed to determine whether or not the continuous notice performance can be executed. That is, the notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to ON (S4903), the release time determination process is executed (S4904), and the process is shifted to S4905. Note that this release time determination process is exactly the same process as the release time determination process in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 68), so its description is omitted.

In the process of S4905, it is determined whether the counter value of the notice count counter 223i is greater than 0. In other words, it is determined whether the execution of the continuous notice performance was decided in the release time determination process (S4904), and whether a value corresponding to the number of consecutive notice performances was set in the notice count counter 223i. In the process of S4905, if it is determined that the counter value of the notice count counter 223i is greater than 0 (S4905: Yes), the performance type of the continuous notice performance decided this time is identified from the state of the notice type flag 223k (S4906), and the range of random number values (counter values) corresponding to the performance type identified in the process of S4906 in the ending selection table 222h (see FIG. 70) is compared with the value of the performance selection counter 223f (S4907).

Next, from the comparison result of the processing of S4907, the ending type (either a normal ending or a preview suggestion ending) corresponding to the value of the performance selection counter 223f is determined (S4910), and a display ending command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the determined ending type (S4911), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4902 that the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is less than 4 (S4902: No), if a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance, there is a possibility that a start winning corresponding to a variable type with a higher expectation will be detected during the ending period (it may become impossible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance based on the variable type with the highest expectation that is reserved at the end of the jackpot), so the determination not yet executed flag 223q is set to ON (S4908) and the process proceeds to S4909. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4905 that the value of the preview count counter 223i is 0 (i.e., execution of the continuous preview performance has not been decided) (S4905: No), the process proceeds to S4909.

In the process of S4909, the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to non-execution of the consecutive preview performance in the ending selection table 222h (see FIG. 70) (see 222h4 in FIG. 70) is compared with the counter value of the performance selection counter 223f (S4909), and the process proceeds to S4910, where the ending type is determined and the ending command for display is set, in the same manner as when it is decided to execute the consecutive preview performance.

By executing this ending command process (see Figure 73), the mode of the ending performance can be selected at a ratio according to the result of the determination of whether or not the consecutive preview performance can be executed, so that the player can be informed of whether or not the consecutive preview performance will be executed and the degree of expectation according to the type of preview.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified fourth embodiment is configured to release the advance notice lottery prohibition state at a specific timing during a jackpot (at the start of the ending period) and determine whether or not a continuous advance notice performance can be executed. The configuration is also such that it is possible to suggest the expectation of whether or not a continuous advance notice performance will start after the end of the jackpot, depending on the type of ending performance of the jackpot. As a result, when an ending performance with a high expectation of the execution of a continuous advance notice performance is executed, the player can have a stronger sense of expectation for the continuous advance notice performance before the variable display of the third pattern begins on the third pattern display device 81.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the background color during the ending performance is different between the normal ending and the preview suggestion ending, but this is merely one example, and any performance mode can be used as long as the player can distinguish between the normal ending and the preview suggestion ending. Specifically, for example, the text displayed during the ending performance may be different between the normal ending and the preview suggestion ending (for example, the text "See you later!" may be displayed in the normal ending and the text "Chance!" may be displayed in the preview suggestion ending), or the character displayed during the ending performance may be different (for example, a female character may be displayed in the normal ending and a male character may be displayed in the preview suggestion ending). Furthermore, the difference between the normal ending and the preview suggestion ending is not limited to the display mode of the third pattern display device 81. For example, the performance mode can be different between the normal ending and the preview suggestion ending by changing the music played during the ending performance or by changing the light color or light pattern of the illumination units 29 to 33.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, only two types of ending performances, a normal ending and a notice suggestion ending, are provided, but this is not limited to this. For example, four types of ending performances may be provided, and each may be set as a type that is likely to be selected when notice performance A is executed after a jackpot, a type that is likely to be selected when notice performance B is executed, a type that is likely to be selected when notice performance C is executed, and a type that is likely to be selected when a continuous notice performance is not executed. By configuring in this way, not only the expectation of a continuous notice performance being executed but also the performance type of a notice performance that is likely to be executed can be predicted during the ending period from the ending performance mode, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the ending performance mode. Alternatively, or in addition to these, the ending performance mode may suggest the expectation of a jackpot being included in the reserved balls that were reserved at the end of the jackpot and the reserved balls based on the start winning newly detected during the jackpot. In this case, instead of suggesting the expectation, an ending performance mode that is selected only when a jackpot is included may be provided. By configuring it in this way, players can pay more attention to the ending presentation as they play.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit (4) at the start timing of the ending period, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released and the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be performed is made. However, the timing of releasing the advance notice lottery prohibition state and the timing of determining whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be performed are not limited to this. For example, a start winning may be detected during a jackpot, and when the number of reserved balls reaches a maximum, the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be performed may be made even if the start timing of the ending period has not yet arrived. By configuring in this way, at the start timing of the ending period, only the selection process of the mode of the ending performance needs to be performed, and the timing of determining whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be performed can be made different. Therefore, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 at the start timing of the ending period can be reduced, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) a delay in the selection of the mode of the ending performance, which results in a delay in the execution of the ending performance, or an inability to properly select a mode corresponding to the result of the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be performed.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 74 to 76. In the first embodiment described above, the board configuration (arrangement of nails, arrangement of windmills, etc.) of the game board 13 is almost symmetrical, and the game ball shot toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 on the game board 13 (game ball shot to the right) and the game ball shot toward the flow path provided on the left side (game ball shot to the left) are configured so that the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the first ball entrance 64 or the variable winning device 65 is almost the same for the game ball shot toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 on the game board 13 (game ball shot to the left).

In contrast to this, in the fifth embodiment, the game board 13 is configured so that a game ball shot toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (a game ball shot from the right) takes longer to reach the first ball entrance 64 or the variable winning device 65 than a game ball shot toward the flow path provided on the left side (a game ball shot from the left). In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the specific winning port 65a is open, the game ball that flows down the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80 is configured to enter the specific winning port 65a at a higher rate than the game ball that flows down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80.

The pachinko machine 10 in this fifth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the surface configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed. The other configurations, the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

Figure 74 is a diagram showing the surface configuration of the game board 13 in this fifth embodiment. As shown in Figure 74, the surface configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment is different from the surface configuration of the game board 13 in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 2), in that a detouring device 700 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 on the game board 13, into which the game ball can enter. Details will be described later with reference to Figure 75, but this detouring device 700 is provided to extend the time it takes for a game ball hit to the right (shot to the right side of the game board 13) to reach the specific winning hole 65a. In other words, the detouring device 700 can extend the flow time of a game ball hit to the right so that the time it takes for a game ball shot by a right hit to reach the specific winning hole 65a is longer than the time it takes for a game ball shot by a left hit to reach the specific winning hole 65a. In addition, in this fifth embodiment, it takes 1 to 2 seconds for a game ball hit from the left to reach the specific winning hole 65a, while it takes 7 to 8 seconds for a game ball hit from the right to reach the specific winning hole 65a.

Here, referring to FIG. 75, the details of the detour role 700 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram showing the detour role 700. As shown in FIG. 75, the detour role 700 has an opening 710 at its upper part. A game ball launched by hitting from the right can enter the inside of the detour role 700 through this opening 710. In addition, an opening 720 is provided at the bottom of the detour role 700 for discharging the game ball that has flowed down inside the detour role 700 to the outside of the detour role 700. Furthermore, the detour role 700 is surrounded by a peripheral portion 730 on four sides, the front side, the back side, and the left and right directions, in order to prevent the ball that has progressed inside from being discharged to the outside without passing through the opening 720. This peripheral portion 730 is made of a semi-transparent material (e.g., PS material), so that the player can easily see the ball flowing down.

The flat surface of the peripheral portion 730 at the rear side as viewed from the front can be assembled so as to be substantially flush with the base plate 60, so that a gap is generated between the peripheral portion 730 and the base plate 60, which can prevent the ball from being caught in the gap. Furthermore, the flat surface of the peripheral portion 730 at the front side as viewed from the front and the glass unit 16 are configured to be in contact with each other without any gaps when the front frame 14 is closed, so that a gap is generated between the peripheral portion 730 and the glass unit 16, which can prevent the ball from being caught in the gap.

As shown in FIG. 75, inside the detouring device 700, there are multiple flow paths (guide flow paths 740-790) that are inclined downward from the detouring device 700. In each of the guide flow paths 740-790, the surface with which the ball comes into contact is substantially flat, and its width is configured to be substantially the same as the width of the inner part of the peripheral portion 730 (the distance between the inner wall on the far side as viewed from the front and the inner wall on the near side as viewed from the front). In other words, a gap is generated between the inner part of the peripheral portion 730 and each of the guide flow paths 740-790, preventing the ball from passing through the gap.

As shown in FIG. 75, the guide channels 740, 760, and 780 are inclined downward from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the front. The guide channels 750, 770, and 790 are inclined downward from the upper left to the lower right when viewed from the front. The guide channels 740, 750, 760, 770, 780, and 790 are arranged in order from the top of the detour device 700. In other words, channels inclined downward from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the front and channels inclined downward from the upper left to the lower right when viewed from the front are alternately provided.

The game ball that enters the opening 710 first falls into the guide flow path 740 and flows downward to the left when viewed from the front, along the slope of the guide flow path 740. When the game ball reaches the bottom end of the guide flow path 740, it falls from the guide flow path 740 toward the guide flow path 750. The fallen game ball then flows downward to the right when viewed from the front, along the guide flow path 750. When the flowing game ball reaches the bottom end of the guide flow path 750, it falls into the guide flow path 760 and flows downward to the left when viewed from the front, along the slope of the guide flow path 760.

The game ball continues to alternate between flowing down along the flow path and dropping into the lower flow path. Finally, the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide flow path 790 and drops from the lower end of the guide flow path 790 toward the opening 720. As a result, the ball that entered the detouring device 700 is discharged to the outside of the detouring device 700 through the opening 720. Since the direction in which the game ball flows down changes every time the flow path through which the game ball flows down (i.e., it changes from the lower right direction to the lower left direction, or from the lower left direction to the lower right direction), the momentum (flow speed) of the game ball flowing down can be reduced every time the flow path changes. Therefore, the time until the game ball that entered the detouring device 700 through the opening 710 is discharged to the outside through the opening 720 can be extended. This allows the time it takes for the ball to reach the bottom of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are located) to be longer (7 seconds or more) when the ball is shot to the right side of the game board 13 compared to when the ball is shot to the left side of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 75, each of the guide channels 740-790 is supported by a channel support shaft 741-791, and is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise around each channel support shaft as a rotation axis. The rotation is stopped when the bottom surface of each of the guide channels 740-790 comes into contact with a rotation stop member 742a-792a or a rotation stop member 742b-792b provided on the bottom side of each of the guide channels 740-790. This rotation will be explained using the guide channel 740 as an example.

As described above, the guide flow channel 740 is configured to be rotatable around the flow channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. This rotation action is performed based on the weight of the game ball flowing down the guide flow channel 740. Specifically, when the game ball flows down the upper half of the guide flow channel 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the upper half of the guide flow channel 740, and a force is generated in a direction that rotates the upper half of the guide flow channel 740 downward. In other words, since a force acts in a direction that rotates the guide flow channel 740 clockwise when viewed from the front, the guide flow channel 740 rotates clockwise around the flow channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotation action is stopped when the lower surface of the guide flow channel 740 comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742b. This rotation stop member 742b can prevent the guide flow channel 740 from rotating too much in the clockwise direction and causing the guide flow channel 740 to tilt in the opposite direction.

Here, rotation stop member 742b is a roughly cylindrical member, and is joined to the inner wall on the front side and the inner wall on the back side of peripheral portion 730, respectively. In other words, it is configured so that its position will not shift due to the impact when it comes into contact with the underside of induction flow channel 740. The other rotation stop members 742a to 792a and rotation stop members 752b to 792b have the same structure as rotation stop member 742b.

On the other hand, when the ball flows down the lower half of the guide flow path 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the lower half of the guide flow path 740, so a force is generated in the direction of rotating the lower half of the guide flow path 740 downward. In other words, a force acts in the direction of rotating the guide flow path 740 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so the guide flow path 740 rotates counterclockwise around the flow path support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. The rotation motion is stopped when the lower surface of the guide flow path 740 comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a. This rotation stop member 742a can prevent the guide flow path 740 from rotating too much counterclockwise. In other words, it can prevent the inclination of the guide flow path 740 from becoming too large, which makes it impossible to reduce the momentum of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball launched by hitting from the right can be reliably flowed down the lower part of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the specific winning entrance 65a are arranged) over 7 seconds or more. The path length and maximum inclination angle of each guide channel 740-790 are set so that when a game ball flows down with the inclination of each guide channel 740-790 at its maximum, it takes 7 seconds for the game ball to reach the second ball inlet 640. Since it is rare for a game ball to flow down with all of the guide channels 740-790 maintaining their maximum inclination angles, it is possible to ensure that the time it takes for the game ball to reach the second ball inlet 640 is 7 seconds or more.

In this way, by configuring the inclination of each guide flow path 740-790 to change based on the load caused by the weight of the game ball, the flow speed of the game ball flowing down each guide flow path 740-790 can be varied. Therefore, the time it takes for the game ball to finish passing through the detour device 700 can be varied. Also, in the above explanation, a case where one ball moves along the guide flow path 740 is explained, but during actual play, a situation may occur in which multiple balls move along the same guide flow path. In this case, the rotational movement of each guide flow path 740-790 can be made even more irregular, so that the time it takes for the game ball to finish passing through the detour device 700 can be varied.

As shown in FIG. 75, the left and right corners of the lower surface of each of the guide channels 740-790 are rounded compared to the left and right corners of the upper surface. This configuration makes it difficult for the corners of the lower surface to come into contact with the inner wall of the peripheral portion 730 when each of the guide channels 740-790 rotates. Therefore, each of the guide channels 740-790 can be arranged closer to the peripheral portion 730, so that a gap is formed between each of the guide channels 740-790 and the peripheral portion 730, and it is possible to prevent a game ball from being caught in the gap or passing through the gap. Note that each of the guide channels 740-790 is configured to return to the position with the largest inclination due to its own weight when no game ball is flowing down. For example, when no ball is flowing down the guide channel 740, the guide channel 740 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front with the channel support shaft 741 as the rotation axis due to its own weight. This rotational motion continues until the bottom surface of the guide flow path comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a, and stops when it comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a. Similarly, the guide flow paths 750-790 are configured to rotate until they come into contact with each of the rotation stop members 752a-792a due to their own weight when no game balls are flowing down. This makes it possible to vary the flow speed of the ball depending on whether the game ball flows down while each of the guide flow paths 750-790 is rotating, or whether the game ball flows down after the rotation of each of the guide flow paths 750-790 has ended. This makes it difficult for the player to aim at the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 may be configured not to rotate under its own weight, but to rotate only when a game ball passes through it. Also, for example, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 may be configured to rotate regularly or irregularly using a motor or the like.

Returning to FIG. 74, the explanation continues. As shown in FIG. 74, a number of nails are arranged below the detour device 700 so as to restrict the flow direction of game balls that flow out of the detour device 700 through the opening 720 on the lower end side of the detour device 700. These nails allow all game balls that flow out of the detour device 700 to fall onto the curved member 800 provided on the left side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front (the game balls can be prevented from flowing down in the direction of the first ball entry port 64). The game balls that fall onto this curved member 800 roll on the upper surface of the curved member 800 and are guided in the direction of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 74, the gap between the variable winning device 65 and the curved member 800 is very narrow (only a width less than one game ball), so when the specific winning opening 65a is open, almost all game balls guided to the left end of the curved member 800 can be won (entered) into the specific winning opening 65a. In contrast, a relatively wide space (flow path) (wider than one game ball) is provided on the left side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front, for guiding game balls to the outlet 66 below the variable winning device 65. For this reason, when the specific winning opening 65a is open and a game ball is shot by hitting it from the left, although many game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, some game balls (for example, 1 in 10 balls) do not enter the specific winning opening 65a and are guided from the left side of the variable winning device 65 to the outlet 66.

In this manner, in the fifth embodiment, a bypass device 700 and a curved member 800 are provided for the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. This allows the time it takes for a game ball hit to the right to reach the specific winning port 65a to be longer than the time it takes for a game ball hit to the left to reach the specific winning port 65a. Note that while a game ball hit to the right will generally take longer to reach the specific winning port 65a, depending on the direction of reflection and the shooting conditions of the game ball, it is possible that a game ball hit to the left will take longer to reach the specific winning port 65a (for example, when a game ball shot to the left temporarily stops, or when a ball becomes clogged in the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80). For this reason, it can be said that a game ball that flows down (passes through) the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 tends to take a longer time to reach the specific winning opening 65a than a game ball that flows down (passes through) the flow path on the left side (a game ball that flows down the flow path on the left side tends to take a shorter time to reach the specific winning opening 65a).

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the specific winning hole 65a is open, the rate at which the game balls hit to the right enter the specific winning hole 65a can be made higher than the rate at which the game balls hit to the left enter the specific winning hole 65a. This allows players who want to progress through the jackpot game quickly (end the jackpot game early) to play by hitting the left to the specific winning hole 65a, while accepting some losses (one wasted ball in every 10 balls) during the jackpot game. On the other hand, players who do not want to waste balls (losses) as much as possible can play by hitting the right to the specific winning hole 65a, while accepting that the jackpot game will last longer. Therefore, each player can select their preferred gameplay during the jackpot game, so that gameplay tailored to each player's taste can be realized. Each round of the jackpot ends when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round, or when 10 or more game balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a before 30 seconds have elapsed. Even if the game balls start to be released by hitting with the right hand after the start of each round of the jackpot, 10 game balls can be made to pass through the detouring device 700 and enter the specific winning hole 65a before 30 seconds have elapsed (10 game balls can be made to enter in about 13 to 14 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage in terms of winning balls when hitting with the right hand (the round ends before the specified number of game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a).

Next, referring to FIG. 76, the display mode during the execution of the jackpot game in this fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the fifth embodiment, when a jackpot occurs, roughly rectangular display areas HR2 and HR3 are formed on the upper left and upper right sides of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a roughly rectangular display area HR4 larger in area than display areas HR2 and HR3 is formed below display area HR2 and display area HR3. In display area HR2, an image resembling a left-pointing arrow is displayed, along with the words "High-speed mode with left-handed hit" and "You can consume the jackpot quickly." These display contents allow the player to easily understand that if a left-handed hit is performed during a jackpot, the jackpot can be consumed in a relatively short period of time (the jackpot progresses at a relatively high speed).

As shown in FIG. 76, an image resembling an arrow pointing to the right is displayed in the display area HR3, along with the words "Hit right for slow mode" and "You can enjoy the jackpot at your leisure." These display contents allow the player to easily understand that if he or she hits right during a jackpot, the jackpot can be enjoyed over a relatively long period of time (the jackpot will progress at a relatively slow speed).

As shown in FIG. 76, various images and information indicating that a jackpot is being won are displayed in the display area HR4. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76, an image TB that resembles a treasure chest containing a large amount of gold coins is displayed in the center of the display area HR4, and a display area HR6 with the word "jackpot" is formed in the upper right side of the display area HR4. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that a jackpot game is being played. In addition, a display area HR5 for displaying characters indicating the progress of the jackpot (number of rounds and number of prize balls paid out) is formed in the upper left side of the display area HR4. In the example of FIG. 76, the characters "ROUND: 01/16" (information indicating the comparison between the current number of rounds and the maximum number of rounds) and the characters "GET: 0000/1600" (information indicating the comparison between the number of prize balls paid out to date and the maximum number of prize balls paid out) are displayed. The display content shown in these display areas HR5 allows the player to easily understand the progress of the jackpot.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the time it takes for a game ball hit to the right to reach the specific winning port 65a is longer than the time it takes for a game ball hit to the left to reach the specific winning port 65a. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the specific winning port 65a is open, the rate at which a game ball hit to the right enters the specific winning port 65a is higher than the rate at which a game ball hit to the left enters the specific winning port 65a. With these configurations, players who want to progress through the jackpot game quickly (want to win a large number of prize balls in a short time) can play by hitting the ball from the left, aiming for the specific winning port 65a, while accepting some losses (about 1 wasted ball in 10 balls) during the jackpot game. On the other hand, for players who want to avoid wasting balls (losses) as much as possible, they can play by hitting the ball from the right and aiming for the specific winning hole 65a, with the understanding that the jackpot game period will be longer. Therefore, each player can select the gameplay they prefer during the jackpot game, so that gameplay that suits each player's tastes can be realized.

In the fifth embodiment, the detouring device 700 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80, so that the time it takes for the game ball launched by right hitting to reach the variable winning device 65 is longer than the time it takes for the game ball launched by left hitting to reach the variable winning device 65. In other words, the path length of the game ball launched by right hitting to flow down is made longer than the path length of the game ball launched by left hitting to flow down, so that the flow time is longer when the game ball is hit from the right than when the game ball is hit from the left, but this is not limited to this. For example, a known crane means may be provided in place of the detouring device 700 in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. By configuring in this way, the period from when the game ball reaches the crane means to when it passes through the crane means can be extended, so that the flow time of the game ball launched by right hitting can be extended. Also, for example, instead of the detouring device 700, a device that stops the flow of the game ball for a predetermined period of time may be provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80, or the right side of the base plate 60 of the game board 13 may be made of a material with a higher friction coefficient (e.g., an elastic body such as rubber) than the left side, so that the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 13 is easily slowed down by friction with the base plate 60. Also, instead of the detouring device 700, the arrangement of the nails may be different between the flow path on the left side and the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80, so that the time it takes for the game ball to reach the lower area of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are located) is longer when flowing down the flow path on the right side than when flowing down the flow path on the left side.

In the fifth embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the gameplay when a left hit is made and the gameplay when a right hit is made in the display area HR2 and the display area HR3 during a jackpot, respectively, but this is not limited to this. For example, during a jackpot, only an image encouraging a left hit may be displayed, or only an image encouraging a right hit may be displayed. By displaying only an image encouraging a left hit, the jackpot can be ended in a short time, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short time. This can increase the interest of the player. In addition, by displaying only an image encouraging a right hit, the number of wasted balls (game balls that do not enter the specific winning hole 65a and enter the out hole 66) can be reduced, and the player's profit in one jackpot can be increased.

In addition, when the launch direction is notified to the player during a jackpot, the notified launch direction may be different depending on the type of jackpot or the type of presentation executed during the jackpot. More specifically, for example, in the case of a probability jackpot, a lottery is used to determine whether a variable display presentation in which odd-numbered main symbols (probability jackpots) line up (presentation mode executed only when a probability jackpot is reached) or a variable display presentation in which even-numbered main symbols (normal symbols) line up (presentation mode executed without fail when a normal jackpot is reached) is executed. Then, in the case of a normal jackpot or a probability jackpot, and a presentation in which normal symbols line up is determined by lottery, a presentation is executed to notify whether or not the jackpot is a probability jackpot during the jackpot. In this case, the player may be allowed to select a presentation mode for informing whether or not it is a jackpot (for example, a presentation mode in which it is not known whether or not it is a jackpot until the final round of the jackpot, a presentation mode in which it is immediately notified at the end of the first round, or a presentation mode in which it is not known where in each round of the jackpot it is not notified) (i.e., an operating means such as a button or lever that the player can operate is provided, and the presentation mode corresponding to the operation content is determined), and the selection of the presentation mode may be executed in the first round. In order to secure a longer time for selecting the presentation mode, a configuration may be used in which a right hit is suggested in the first round of a jackpot notified by a variable display presentation in which normal symbols are lined up (a jackpot in which normal symbols are notified). By configuring in this way, a longer period for allowing the player to select the presentation mode can be secured, so that the player can more reliably select the presentation mode he or she prefers. On the other hand, if the player is not prompted to make any selection in the first round (for example, if a jackpot is notified by a variable display presentation in which normal symbols are lined up), a configuration may be used in which a left hit is notified during the jackpot. This configuration shortens the time it takes for the jackpot to end, allowing a large number of winning balls to be paid out in a relatively short period of time.

In addition, for example, when a normal jackpot or a special jackpot is obtained and a display in which normal symbols are aligned is determined by lottery, a display may be executed in the first round of the jackpot to notify the player whether or not the jackpot is a special jackpot, and within that display, a display (operation display) may be executed to prompt the player to operate the operation means. More specifically, for example, a push button that the player can press may be provided as the operation means, and a display may be executed to prompt the player to press the push button continuously within a predetermined period of time. Then, the display mode may be changed (for example, the indicator gauge fills up) depending on the number of times the push button is pressed, and the display mode may be changed to a specific display mode in conjunction with the pressing (for example, the gauge fills up to the maximum of the indicator), thereby notifying the player that the jackpot is a special jackpot. In this case, if a normal jackpot or a special jackpot occurs and the lottery determines that the normal symbols will line up (when the operation effect is executed), the round period of one round can be relatively long by configuring the notification to hit right in the first round of the jackpot, and therefore a longer period can be secured for the operation effect. This can further enhance the effect of the operation effect. On the other hand, if a special jackpot occurs and the lottery determines that the special symbols will line up (when the operation effect is not executed), the notification to hit left in the first round can shorten the period until the jackpot ends. This allows a large amount of prize balls to be paid out in a relatively short period of time.

In addition, instead of allowing the player to select the presentation mode when informing the player of whether or not the game is a guaranteed jackpot, for example, in the first round, the type of music (audio presentation) to be played during the execution of the jackpot game may be selected, and at least a right hit may be notified during the period for selecting the music (music selection period). More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, a music selection menu screen for selecting the type of music (audio presentation) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On this music selection menu screen, images corresponding to each of the multiple (e.g., 10) songs set in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. Also, instead of or in addition to the frame button 22, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be provided with an operating means such as a button that can be operated by the player, and one image displayed on the music selection menu screen is configured to be selectable depending on the operation content of the operating means. For example, on the music selection menu screen, images corresponding to each song are arranged in a vertical row, and one image (e.g., the image displayed in the center) appears lit, and the other images appear unlit. In addition, the operation means is configured to have three types of buttons: a button corresponding to an upward movement (up button), a button corresponding to a downward movement (down button), and a button corresponding to a decision operation (decision button). Then, by detecting a press of the up button during the music selection period, the image that was lit up just before the press is switched to an unlit appearance, and the image arranged one position above is switched to a lit appearance (the image with the lit appearance moves up by one position). Similarly, when the down button is pressed, the image with the lit appearance moves down by one position. Furthermore, by detecting a press of the decision button during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the image that is lit up at the time of the press is determined as the music to be played during the current jackpot. In other words, it is set as the music to be played from the end of the first round to the end of the final round of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, the music of the player's preference can be played during the jackpot, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot game can be further improved.

In such a situation, if the left hit is notified in the first round of the jackpot, the first round will end relatively early, and the song selection period will also be short. Therefore, there is a possibility that the song selection period will end before the player selects a favorite song by operating the up button and the down button and sets the playback by pressing the decision button. In contrast, by configuring the right hit to be notified during the first round (song selection period) of a jackpot in which a song selection period is set (a jackpot in which the execution of the performance to select a song is decided), the round period of the first round can be made relatively long, so that a longer period can be secured for the player to search for a favorite song from the song selection menu screen (by operating the up button or the down button so that the corresponding image appears to be lit) and decide (by pressing the decision button). This allows the player to select a favorite song reliably without rushing, thereby improving the convenience of the player when selecting a song. In addition, by configuring the system to notify the player of a left hit during the first round of a jackpot that does not have a music selection period (a jackpot that executes a normal jackpot performance), it is possible to prevent the game from dragging on and to complete the jackpot game quickly. Therefore, the player can be notified of the appropriate firing direction depending on the performance mode executed during the jackpot.

Furthermore, in the case where an effect (operation effect) that prompts the player to operate the operation means, such as setting a song selection period in the first round, is executed at a predetermined rate in the case of a jackpot, the launch direction notified in the first round may be varied according to the player's past operation status (operation history). More specifically, for example, information (operation history) on whether or not the player operated the operation means in the first round of a jackpot in which an operation effect is set may be stored. Then, when a jackpot in which an operation effect is set starts, if the player has not operated the operation means over a predetermined number of past jackpots in which an operation effect is set (for example, five times) based on the stored past operation history, a configuration may be adopted in which a left hit is notified, whereas a right hit is notified if the player has operated within the predetermined number of jackpots. That is, for players who tend not to perform operations even when the operation presentation is being executed, the notification of left hit allows the first round of the jackpot to end sooner, realizing gameplay that allows a large number of prize balls to be obtained in a short period of time, while for players who tend to perform operations actively during the operation presentation, the notification of right hit lengthens the execution period of the operation presentation, ensuring time for the player to perform sufficient operations on the operating means during the operation presentation. Thus, gameplay that suits the player's tendencies can be realized.

In the fifth embodiment, the right hand hit is slightly more advantageous in terms of the prize balls by configuring the board so that the balls will enter the specific winning hole 65a more frequently than the left hand hit, but the configuration for giving the right hand hit an advantage in terms of the prize balls is not limited to this. For example, instead of making the rate at which game balls shot by right hand hits and game balls shot by left hand hits enter the specific winning hole 65a the same, a general winning hole with a relatively large number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) may be provided to the right of the specific winning hole 65 (i.e., a position where game balls shot by left hand hits have difficulty entering and game balls shot by right hand hits can enter). That is, in a state where the specific winning hole 65a is open, a game ball hit from the left basically enters the specific winning hole 65a, and some game balls cannot enter the specific winning hole 65a and flow down to the out hole 66, while a game ball hit from the right basically enters the specific winning hole 65a, and some game balls enter the general winning hole. By configuring in this way, when a right hit is performed, the prize balls obtained by entering the general winning hole are awarded in addition to the prize balls for the jackpot (i.e., the prize balls obtained by the game ball entering the specific winning hole 65a), so that a right hit during a jackpot can be advantageous in terms of prize balls. Therefore, a player who wants to win more prize balls can be made to hit from the right, knowing that the jackpot period will be longer. On the other hand, a player who wants to win the jackpot prize balls in a shorter period can be made to hit from the left during a jackpot, knowing that the prize balls will be somewhat more disadvantageous than a right hit.

In the fifth embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, the characteristics of a right hit and the characteristics of a left hit are simply displayed in the display areas HR2 and HR3 (see FIG. 76), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a detection means such as a sensor capable of detecting whether a ball is hit from the right or left may be provided at a predetermined location of the game board 13 (for example, in the middle of the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and the flow path on the right side), and the direction in which the player is shooting the game ball may be determined from the detection result by the detection means. Then, the performance during the jackpot may be changed according to the determined shooting direction. For example, when a right hit is detected, the display area HR2 may be turned off and the display area HR3 may be turned on, while when a left hit is detected, the display area HR2 may be turned on and the display area HR3 may be turned off. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand what kind of gameplay will be achieved depending on the shooting direction selected by the player.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 77 to Fig. 89. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment described above, the path length of each flow path and the flow direction of the game ball are configured so that the time required for the game ball to reach the lower area of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entry port 64 and the variable winning device 65 are located) is longer when the game ball flows down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 than when the game ball flows down the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, the game board 13 is configured so that when the specific winning port 65a is open (i.e., during the execution of a jackpot game), the game ball is more likely to enter the specific winning port 65a (enter the ball) at a higher rate when the game ball is shot by hitting from the right than when the game ball is shot by hitting from the left.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in addition to the variable winning device 65, a right variable winning device 650 is provided as a variable winning device that opens and closes during a jackpot. The right specific winning port 650a of this right variable winning device 650 is set to an open state that allows balls to enter during the first round of the jackpot, and when a game ball enters during the jackpot, a special pattern probability state is awarded after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened from the second round onwards of the jackpot, and when a game ball enters, only a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded. The right specific winning hole 650a is located at a position where the game ball can reach whether the ball is hit from the left or the right, and although details will be described later, if the ball continues to be hit from the left in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 while the right specific winning hole 650a is in a ball-ready state will increase, but the rate at which the game balls that reach the right specific winning hole 650a enter the right specific winning hole 650a will decrease. On the other hand, if the ball continues to be hit from the right in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 while the right specific winning hole 650a is in a ball-ready state will decrease, but the rate at which the game balls that reach the right specific winning hole 650a enter the right specific winning hole 650a will increase. This allows the gameplay characteristics in the first round of a jackpot to differ depending on the direction in which the game balls are launched, allowing each player to choose the gameplay characteristics they prefer (either a gameplay characteristic in which the rate at which balls enter the right specific winning port 650a is low but the number of game balls that reach it is high, or a gameplay characteristic in which the number of balls that reach it is low but the rate at which balls enter is high).

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in that the game board 13 has a partially changed board configuration, that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed control. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in this sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 13 in this sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 77, the game board 13 in this sixth embodiment differs from the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 74) in that a curved member 810 is provided instead of the curved member 800 provided on the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 77, a right variable winning device 650 is disposed on part of the slope of this curved member 810.

The right variable winning device 650 has a right specific winning port 650a in a horizontally long rectangular shape in its approximate center. This specific winning port 650a is normally closed by an opening and closing door 650f1 (i.e., it is set to a state where it is difficult for a ball to enter), and when the first round of the jackpot starts, the opening and closing door 650f1 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern for each type of jackpot. In other words, in the first round of the jackpot, a state where it is possible for a ball to enter the right specific winning port 650a and a state where it is difficult for a ball to enter are switched in a specific switching pattern. Then, when a game ball enters the right specific winning port 650a while the opening and closing door 650f1 is open (while the right specific winning port 650a is in a state where it is possible for a ball to enter), the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to a special pattern probability state and a normal pattern time-saving state (the probability flag 203e is set to ON when the jackpot ends). In contrast, if no game ball enters the right specific winning port 650a even once during one jackpot, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a low probability state for special symbols and a time-saving state for normal symbols (the value of the time-saving counter 203f is set to 100). In other words, it is more advantageous for the player if a game ball enters the right specific winning port 650a than if no game ball enters the right specific winning port 650a even once during a jackpot (the game state after the jackpot ends is more advantageous).

As shown in FIG. 77, the right specific winning opening 650a is arranged along a curved path on the upper surface of the curved member 810, so that the game ball that passes through the detouring device 700 and falls into the curved member 810 can easily reach the right specific winning opening 650a by rolling along the upper surface of the curved member 810. In addition, as shown in FIG. 77, the left end of the upper surface of the curved member 810 and the left end of the right specific winning opening 650a are arranged on approximately the same horizontal plane. In addition, the curved member 820 provided below the left flow path of the game board 13 is configured so that the height of the right end on its upper surface is higher than the height of the left end under the conditions of the curved member 810. And, between the curved member 820 and the curved member 810, as shown in FIG. 77, multiple nails are arranged to form a downward slope from the curved member 820 to the curved member 810. With these configurations, when a game ball that is hit from the left and passes through the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 reaches the upper surface of the curved member 820, it rolls on the upper surface of the curved member 820 and reaches the right end of the curved member 820. Then, the game ball that is shot from the right end of the curved member 820 to the right as viewed from the front flows down to the lower right as viewed from the front while interfering with the nails planted between the curved member 820 and the curved member 810, and reaches the left end of the curved member 810. A game ball that reaches the upper surface of the curved member 810 from the left side of the curved member 810 can easily reach the right specific winning hole 650a by rolling on the upper surface of the curved member 810 to the right as viewed from the front. Therefore, in the first round of a jackpot, the game ball can be made to reach the right variable winning device 650 whether it is hit from the right or left. Therefore, in the first round of a jackpot, the game ball can be launched in a desired direction.

Next, the structure of the right variable winning device 650 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78(a) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device 650 with the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 closed (a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right specific winning opening 650a), and FIG. 78(b) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device 650 with the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 in the middle of switching from a closed state to an open state (switching from a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right specific winning opening 650a to a state in which it is possible).

As shown in FIG. 78(a), when the right specific winning opening 650a is closed, the left end of the opening/closing door 650f1 that closes the right specific winning opening 650a and the part of the upper surface of the curved member 810 to the left of the right variable winning device 650 (left floor surface 810b) are smoothly connected with almost no step. On the other hand, a convex portion 650g1 is provided on the right end of the opening/closing door 650f1 to prevent a game ball rolling from the left side when viewed from the front from passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 and rolling to the right. Since this convex portion 650g1 protrudes from the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1, the game ball rolling from the left side of the opening/closing door 650f1 on the opening/closing door 650f1 is prevented from rolling by the convex portion 650g1 and stops rolling. As shown in FIG. 78(a), the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 is inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, so the game ball prevented from rolling by the convex portion 650g1 flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 toward the lower left direction when viewed from the front. Then, it rolls leftward on the left floor surface 810b when viewed from the front, and falls toward the outlet 66 from the left end of the curved member 810. Note that the game ball that flows down from the right side of the right variable winning device 650 (rolling along the right floor surface 810a) has a stronger flowing force due to the inclination of the right floor surface 810, so when the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed, it can flow down to the outlet 66 by climbing over the convex portion 650g1. In this way, by positioning the right variable winning device 650 at an angle, it is possible to prevent game balls from accumulating at the top of the opening and closing door 650f1 while the opening and closing door 650f1 is closed, and to allow them to flow down to the outlet 66.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), when the right specific winning hole 650a is switched to a state in which a ball can enter during the first round of a jackpot, the opening and closing door 650f1 that was blocking the top of the right specific winning hole 650a slides leftward as viewed from the front, thereby opening the opening and closing door 650f1. As shown in FIG. 78(b), while the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the process of opening, a game ball rolling from the right side as viewed from the front can enter the right specific winning hole 650a, but a game ball rolling from the left side as viewed from the front is blocked by the protrusion 650g1 and has difficulty entering the right specific winning hole 650. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 79, but when the opening and closing door 650f1 is completely opened, the upper end of the convex portion 650g1 and the left floor surface 810b are at approximately the same height (they are connected almost smoothly), so that a game ball rolling from the left side relative to the right variable winning device 650 can also pass through the convex portion 650g1 and enter the right specific winning port 650a.

Next, referring to FIG. 79, the flow direction of the game ball that reaches the right variable winning device 650 when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is closed and when it is open will be described. First, FIG. 79(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right variable winning device 650 and the curved member 810 when the opening and closing door 650f1 is fully open. As shown in FIG. 79(a), when the opening and closing door 650f1 is fully open, the height of the upper end of the convex portion 650g1 provided at the right end of the opening and closing door 650f1 and the left floor surface 810b are approximately the same, so that the game ball that has rolled from the left direction when viewed from the front relative to the right variable winning device 650 can easily pass through the convex portion 650g1. In other words, the ball can easily enter (win) the right specific winning port 650a without being obstructed by the convex portion 650g1. In addition, a game ball that rolls from the right direction when viewed from the front toward the right variable winning device 650 (flowing down along the right floor surface 810a) can easily enter (win) the right specific winning port 650a because there is nothing to prevent the ball from entering (winning) the right specific winning port 650a.

Figure 79 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right variable winning device 650 and the curved member 810 when the opening and closing door 650f1 is completely closed. As shown in Figure 79 (b), when the opening and closing door 650f1 is closed, the right specific winning port 650a is blocked by the opening and closing door 650f1, making it impossible for the game ball to enter. In this state, the game ball rolling from the left side when viewed from the front toward the right variable winning device 650 is subjected to gravity in a downward direction to the left due to the upward inclination in the upper right direction formed by the opening and closing door 650f1, so that the momentum of the rolling is reduced. In addition, the right end of the door 650f1 has a protrusion 650g1 that protrudes higher than the other parts of the door 650f1, so even if the momentum of the rolling to the right is strong and the door 650f1 is able to climb almost all the way up, the protrusion 650g1 will prevent the door from reaching the right floor surface 810a. Therefore, the door 650f1 flows down and to the left along the slope of the door 650f1, and falls from the left end of the curved member 810 toward the outlet 66.

On the other hand, a game ball rolling from the right direction when viewed from the front toward the right variable winning device 650 is given sufficient momentum to overcome the convex portion 650g1 due to the inclination of the right floor surface 810a, so the game ball can overcome the convex portion 650g1 and pass through the opening and closing door 650f1. This allows the game ball to fall from the left end of the curved member 810 toward the outlet 66.

Next, referring to Figures 80 and 81, the opening pattern of the opening and closing door 650f1 (right specific winning port 650a) in the first round of the jackpot will be described. Here, in this sixth embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, a jackpot type (jackpot A6) in which the right specific winning port 650a is set to a state in which balls can be entered for a relatively long period of time, and a jackpot type (jackpot B6) in which the right specific winning port 650a is set to a state in which balls can be entered for a relatively short period of time are provided. If the ball-entering state becomes longer, there are more opportunities to enter the game ball into the right specific winning port 650a, so that the game state after the jackpot ends is more likely to be set to an advantageous state (a special pattern probability state and a normal pattern time-saving state). Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot A6 is a jackpot type that is more advantageous for the player (the game state after the jackpot ends more easily becomes advantageous) than the jackpot B6. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the opening pattern of the right specific winning port 650a set in the first round of the jackpot A6 will be referred to as the opening pattern that allows for a V win, and the opening pattern of the right specific winning port 650a set in the first round of the jackpot B6 will be referred to as the opening pattern that makes it difficult for a V win to occur.

Figure 80(a) is a diagram showing the change over time in the state of the right specific winning port 650a when a V-winning opening pattern (an opening pattern set in the first round of the big win A6) is set. When a V-winning opening pattern is set, the right specific winning port 650a is first kept closed for 1.5 seconds from the start of the first round. Then, at the point where 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the right specific winning port 650a is switched from the closed state to the open state. As shown in Figure 80(a), it takes 0.3 seconds from the start of the opening operation of the right specific winning port 650a until the right specific winning port 650a is completely opened. Therefore, it is completely opened at the point where 1.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. This completely open state continues for 0.2 seconds, and the closing operation of the right specific winning port 650a is started at the point where 0.2 seconds have elapsed (i.e., 2.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round). This closing operation, like the opening operation, is completed in 0.3 seconds (it is completely closed 2.3 seconds after the start of the first round). Then, when the right specific winning opening 650a is completely closed, the right specific winning opening 650a remains closed for 0.5 seconds. Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed (i.e., when 2.8 seconds have passed from the start of the first round), the right specific winning opening 650a is opened again. In this opening operation, the same operation as the first opening operation is repeated. That is, it is completely opened over 0.3 seconds, the open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds, and then it is closed over 0.3 seconds.

After that, a completely closed state for 0.5 seconds and an opening operation for 0.8 seconds (a series of operations in which the right specific winning port 650a is completely opened for 0.3 seconds, the open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds, and then closed for 0.3 seconds) are repeated. With this repeated operation, in the opening pattern in which a V winning is possible, the opening operation for 0.8 seconds is repeated six times in the first round of the jackpot. Also, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the final opening and closing operation is performed after 8.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first round. Here, in this sixth embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, a detouring device 700 is arranged in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 to extend the flow time of the game ball. By passing through the detouring device 700, the time it takes for the game ball hit to the right to reach the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the right variable winning device 650 are arranged) is 7 to 8 seconds, as in the fifth embodiment. Therefore, if a right hit is started in the first round of a jackpot, it takes at least seven seconds from the start of the round for the game ball to reach the right variable winning device 650. Therefore, if a right hit is performed, the game ball will reach the right variable winning device 650 around the start of the last opening period in the opening pattern in which a V win is possible (8 seconds after the start of the first round). For this reason, if a right hit is performed in the first round, it is possible to get the game ball to enter the right specific winning port 650a only in the last opening period out of the six opening periods.

On the other hand, if the player continues to hit the ball from the left side in the first round of the big win, the ball will reach the lower area of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the right variable winning device 650, etc. are arranged) in about 1 to 2 seconds, so if the player hits the ball from the left side immediately at the start of the first round, the ball can reach the specific winning port 650a from the first opening period. In other words, the player can get up to six opportunities to enter the right specific winning port 650a. However, as mentioned above, the game ball that has rolled from the left side toward the right specific winning port 650a has a shorter period in which it can enter the right specific winning port 650a during one opening period (0.8 seconds from the start of opening to the complete closing) compared to the game ball that has rolled from the right side. Furthermore, when the player hits the ball from the left side, more game balls cannot reach the right variable winning device 650 than when the player hits the ball from the right side. That is, by slipping through the nails planted between the curved member 820 and the curved member 810, the game ball may not reach the curved member 810 and enter the out hole 66, or may enter the first ball entry hole 64. Therefore, when an opening pattern that allows V entry is set, by hitting from the left in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right specific winning hole 650a while it is open is large, but the rate of balls entering is low, and there are also many wasted balls. On the other hand, when hitting from the right in the first round of a jackpot, the number of game balls that reach the right specific winning hole 650a while it is open is small, but the rate of balls entering is high. Therefore, the game play in the first round can be changed according to the launch direction of the game ball, so that the interest of the player in the first round of a jackpot can be improved. The opening period and board configuration are set so that the chances of the game ball entering the jackpot during one round are roughly the same (for example, about 80%) whether you hit from the right or the left during the first round of a jackpot.

Figure 80(b) is a diagram showing the change over time in the state of the right specific winning port 650a when an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V (an opening pattern set in the first round of the jackpot B6) is set. When an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V is set, as shown in Figure 80(b), the right specific winning port 650a opens at the same time as the start of the first round, and closes immediately after it is completely opened. Therefore, whether the player hits from the left or right, it is extremely difficult to get a game ball to enter the right specific winning port 650a while it is open (the possibility of the game ball entering during one round is almost 0%). Therefore, when the player wins a jackpot, the player can expect that the jackpot type will be jackpot A6 (an opening pattern that allows a V win is set).

Figure 81 is a diagram showing in more detail the state of the opening door 650f1 during one opening period when an opening pattern that allows V winning is set. As shown in Figure 81, the upper part of the right specific winning opening 650a is blocked by the opening door 650f1 until the opening operation is started, so that the game ball cannot enter the right specific winning opening 650a (see Figure 81 (a)). Then, when the opening and closing door 650f1 starts to open, the opening and closing door 650f1 slides leftward as viewed from the front, and is stored inside the curved member 810. When 0.1 seconds have passed since the start of the opening operation, the width of the part of the right specific winning opening 650a that is not blocked by the opening and closing door 650f1 at the top becomes the width of one game ball or more (see Figure 81 (b)). As a result, the game ball rolling from the right direction can enter the right specific winning opening 650a. On the other hand, a game ball rolling from the left direction is prevented from entering the right specific winning opening 650a by the upward inclination toward the upper right direction formed by the part of the opening/closing door 650f1 that is not stored inside the curved member 810 and by the convex portion 650g1. In other words, a game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the right specific winning opening 650a, just like when the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely closed. This state in which the game ball rolling from the right side can enter the right specific winning hole 650a and the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter continues for 0.1 seconds, and when 0.1 seconds have passed (i.e., when 0.2 seconds have passed from the start of the opening operation), most of the opening and closing door 650f1 is stored inside the curved surface 810 (the width between the convex portion 650g1 and the right end of the left floor surface 810b is less than one game ball), so that the game ball that has reached the right end of the left floor surface 810b can pass directly above the convex portion 650g1 without passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 (see FIG. 81(c)). Therefore, even the game ball rolling from the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the right variable winning device 650 can pass through the convex portion 650g1 and enter the right specific winning hole 650a. That is, both game balls rolling from the right (game balls launched by hitting with the right) and game balls rolling from the left (game balls launched by hitting with the left) can enter the right specific winning opening 650a. From then on, until the opening and closing door 650f1 is completely opened, game balls rolling from both directions (both the right and left) can enter the right specific winning opening 650a.

As shown in FIG. 81, when 0.3 seconds have elapsed since the opening operation started, the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely stored inside the curved member 810, and only the convex portion 650g1 is exposed to the outside (the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely open) (see FIG. 81(d)). This completely open state continues for 0.2 seconds as described above, and when 0.2 seconds have elapsed, the closing operation starts. This closing operation is the reverse of the opening operation and is performed over the same time (i.e., 0.3 seconds). Therefore, the period during which the game ball can enter the right variable winning device 650a from the start of the opening operation until the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed again is 0.6 seconds from 0.1 seconds after the start of the opening operation to 0.1 seconds before the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely closed when hitting from the right. On the other hand, when hitting from the left, it is 0.4 seconds from 0.2 seconds after the start of the opening operation to 0.2 seconds before the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely closed. In other words, the percentage of balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 and enter the ball is higher when the ball is hit from the right side than when the ball is hit from the left side.

In this way, in the sixth embodiment, the period during which the game ball is available for the right specific winning port 650a is variable depending on whether the game ball arrives from the right side or the left side of the right variable winning device 650. As a result, when the game ball arrives from the right side of the right variable winning device 650, it is more likely that the ball will enter the right specific winning port 650a. Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, more game balls reach the right variable winning device 650 in the first round of a jackpot when the ball is hit from the left than when the ball is hit from the right. Therefore, when the ball is hit from the left in the first round of a jackpot, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right specific winning port 650a, but a gameplay in which there are many opportunities to enter the ball can be realized, while when the ball is hit from the right, it is easy for the game ball to enter the left specific winning port 650a, but a gameplay in which there are few opportunities to enter the ball can be realized. Therefore, the playability in the first round of a jackpot can be changed depending on the direction in which the game ball is launched, which can increase the player's interest in the game in the first round.

In the sixth embodiment, the right end of the door 650f1 is provided with a protrusion 650g1 to shorten the period during which a game ball rolling from the left side can enter the right specific winning opening 650a, compared to the period during which a game ball rolling from the right side can enter. However, it is not necessary to provide the protrusion 650g1. Even if the protrusion 650g1 is removed, the upwardly upward slope formed by the door 650f1 can prevent a game ball rolling from the left side from entering the right specific winning opening 650a during the opening operation of the door 650f1 (for example, the arrangement shown in FIG. 81(b)).

Next, referring to FIG. 82, a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the first round of the jackpot A6 (a jackpot in which an opening pattern that allows a V win is set) in this sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, when the first round of the jackpot A6 starts, the text "Left-handed hit multiple times to win mode", the text "Lots of hits, but it's hard to get into the V!", and an image imitating a left-facing arrow are displayed in the display area HR2 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that hitting from the left will allow more game balls to reach the right variable winning device 650, but will make it harder for the game ball to enter the right specific winning port 650a (harder to win the V).

As shown in FIG. 82, the text "One-hit kill mode with right hit", the text "Fewer hits, but it's easier to get a V!", and an image resembling an arrow pointing to the right are displayed in the display area HR3. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that when hitting to the right, fewer game balls will reach the right variable winning device 650, but it will be easier for game balls to enter the right specific winning port 650a (easier to win a V).

As shown in FIG. 82, the display area HR4 in the third symbol display device 81 displays an image that resembles the right variable winning device 650 and the curved member 810. The front side of the variable winning device 650 as viewed from the front is displayed with a decoration that resembles the letter "V," and the upper left side of the display area HR4 as viewed from the front displays a display area HR7 with the words "Aim for the V!!" These display contents allow the player to easily understand that by getting the game ball to enter the right variable winning device 650, which is decorated with the letter "V," a favorable result will be achieved for the player (a special symbol will be in a high probability state after the big win).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 82, in the display area HR4, an image of an arrow pointing in the direction of the right variable winning device 650 is displayed on the left side as viewed from the front and on the upper right side as viewed from the front of the image simulating the right variable winning device 650. The image of the arrow displayed on the left side as viewed from the front of the image simulating the right variable winning device 650 has the words "Try it and you'll win," and the image of the arrow displayed on the upper right side as viewed from the front has the words "One hit kill." These display contents allow the player to easily understand that when the player hits left according to the display contents of the display area HR2 (selecting the mode where you hit it and you'll win), the game ball will roll toward the right variable winning device 650 from the left direction as viewed from the front. Also, when the player hits right according to the display contents of the display area HR3 (selecting the one hit kill mode), the player can easily understand that the game ball will roll toward the right variable winning device 650 from the upper right direction as viewed from the front. This allows the player to easily understand which direction to look in to see if the game ball will land in the right specific winning hole 650a.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 83, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 9(a)) in that an opening pattern table 202aa is added. In addition, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b are changed. The other configurations are the same as those in the fifth embodiment, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The opening pattern table 202aa is a data table that specifies the opening pattern of the right specific winning port 650a in the first round of a jackpot (either an opening pattern that allows a V win or an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V win) for each type of jackpot. This opening pattern table 202aa specifies data that indicates the start timing of the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing door 650f1. At the start of the first round of a jackpot, an opening pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type is selected from this opening pattern table 202aa and set as the opening pattern for the first round. By specifying the opening pattern (start timing of the opening and closing operation) in advance in the opening pattern table 202aa, the opening and closing door 650f1 can be opened and closed in the same opening pattern for every jackpot.

Next, referring to FIG. 83(b), the details of the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83(b), in the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 79" is associated with "jackpot A6" (see 202b1 in FIG. 83). This "jackpot A6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds and an opening pattern that allows V winning in the first round of the jackpot (an opening pattern that allows the game ball to enter the right specific winning port 650a at a rate of about 80%) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first winning type counter C2, 80 counter values (random number values) from 0 to 79 are associated with "jackpot A6", so the probability that "jackpot A6" will be determined when a jackpot occurs is 80% (80/100).

As shown in FIG. 83(b), in the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99" is specified to correspond to "jackpot B6" (see 202b2 in FIG. 83). This "jackpot B6" is a jackpot type with 16 rounds and an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V in the first round of the jackpot (an opening pattern that makes it almost impossible to get a game ball into the right specific winning hole 650a). Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random number values) associated with "jackpot B6" are 20 from "80 to 99", so the probability that "jackpot B6" will be determined when a jackpot occurs is 20% (20/100).

In the sixth embodiment, a jackpot type is set in which an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V is set, but it is not necessary to set an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V. For example, instead of setting an opening pattern that always allows a V win when a jackpot occurs, the rate at which a V win occurs may be lowered to adjust the rate at which a special state is set after the jackpot ends to be the same as in the sixth embodiment. By configuring in this way, the number of opening patterns can be reduced, and the amount of data in the opening pattern table 202aa can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 84, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 84, the RAM 203 in this sixth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 8) in that a special chance setting flag 203aa, a special chance passing counter 203ab, a winning number counter 203ac, a remaining ball timer flag 203ad, a remaining ball timer 203ae, a special chance effective flag 203ag, a special chance effective timer 203ah, and a discharge number counter 203af have been added.

The probability change setting flag 203aa is a flag indicating whether or not the game state is to be changed to the probability change state after a jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is to be set to the probability change state is determined by whether or not a game ball has entered the right specific winning port 650a during a jackpot game. Here, inside the right variable winning device 650, a probability change switch 650e (not shown) is arranged at a position where a game ball entering from the right specific winning port 650a always passes through. When the output of this probability change switch 650e is turned on, it is determined that a game ball has entered the right specific winning port 650a, and the probability change setting flag 203aa is set to on (see S1305 in FIG. 88 and S1410 in FIG. 89). On the other hand, this probability change setting flag 203aa is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S1205 in FIG. 87). This high probability setting flag 203aa is backed up when the power is turned off, and when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), it is set to the state it was in just before the power was turned off. Also, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

If the special chance setting flag 203aa is set to on when the power is turned on, it may be configured to determine whether the game ball passed the special chance switch 650e before the power was cut off, and to set the special chance setting flag 203aa officially to on and restore the game only if it is determined that the game ball passed through the special chance switch 650e before the power was cut off. In this case, whether the game ball passed through the special chance switch 650e before the power was cut off can be determined by whether the special chance passing counter 203ab, which will be described later, is greater than 0. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine fraud such as rewriting only the special chance setting flag 203aa to on and turning the power back on while the power is cut off, thereby reducing damage to the hall.

The probability change passing counter 203ab is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability change switch 650e after the end of one round during a jackpot game (in this embodiment, one round of the jackpot). In addition, the sum of the probability change passing counter 203ab and the discharge number counter 203af described later can be used to determine whether all game balls that entered the right specific winning port 650a of the right variable winning device 650 in the first round have been discharged. The probability change passing counter 203ab is updated by adding one to the value each time the passage of the probability change switch 650e is detected during a predetermined period (so-called ball discharge period) after the end of one round (S1409 in FIG. 89). In addition, after executing a process to determine whether the number of game balls that entered the right specific winning port 650a and the number of discharged balls match, the counter is reset to the initial value "0" (S1415 in FIG. 89). In addition, the probability change passing counter 203ab is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, when initialized, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203ac is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the right specific winning port 650a of the right variable winning device 650 in each round of the big win game. Specifically, it is updated by adding one to the number of balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 or the right specific winning port 650a of the right variable winning device 650 when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 or the above-mentioned special chance switch 650e provided in the right variable winning device 650 (S1303 in FIG. 88). On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is determined whether the number of balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650 (the total value of the winning number counter 203ac and the special chance passing counter 203ab) and the number of balls that have been discharged (the value of the discharge number counter 203af) match, and then it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1415 in FIG. 89). The value of this winning number counter 203ac is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, when initialized, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203ad is a flag that indicates whether or not it is the ball draining period for discharging the remaining game balls when there are game balls remaining inside the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 at the end of the round. When this remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to on, it means that it is the ball draining period. While this remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to on, the remaining ball timer 203ae, which will be described later, is updated by incrementing by one (see S1405 in FIG. 89).

The remaining ball timer 203ae is a counter for determining whether the time required for the remaining game balls to be discharged has elapsed when the specific winning port 65a or the right specific winning port 650a is closed after one round ends and there are game balls remaining inside the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650. The time required for the game balls to be discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in this sixth embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203ae. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203ae (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), a determination is made as to whether the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 matches the number of balls discharged (S1411 in FIG. 89). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notice is issued to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650. It also prevents fraudulent behavior such as leaving game balls in the right variable winning device 650 and then timing the first round of a jackpot to cause the game balls to flow down to the guaranteed win switch 65e.

If the number of winning balls and the number of balls dispensed do not match, a dedicated flag may be set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the special probability setting flag 203aa may not be set to ON even if the game ball passes through the special probability switch 650e. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the special probability state from being improperly granted.

The discharged ball counter 203af is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 in each round of a jackpot. This discharged ball counter 203af is updated by adding 1 each time a game ball passes through a ball discharge port for discharging game balls from each variable winning device (variable winning device 65 or right variable winning device 650) (the ball discharge port switch provided at the ball discharge port is turned on by the game ball passing through) (see S1403 in FIG. 89). This discharged ball counter 203af is reset to the initial value of 0 after it is determined that the number of balls that won the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 matches the number of balls discharged (S1414 in FIG. 89).

<Regarding control process of main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 85 to Fig. 89. First, the big win control process 7 (S921) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 85. This big win control process 7 (S921) is a process executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see Fig. 29) instead of the big win control process (see Fig. 30, S904) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In the jackpot control process 7 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 85), steps S1001 to S1004 and steps S1009 to S1011 are the same as steps S1001 to S1004 and steps S1009 to S1011 in the jackpot control process in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 30). In the jackpot control process 7 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 85), if it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is time to start a new round (S1004: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1021) to set the opening operation according to the round and jackpot type, and this process is terminated. Details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1021) will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is the timing to end the ending presentation (S1011 Yes), a jackpot end process is executed to set the game state after the jackpot ends (S1022), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot end process (S1022) will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

In the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is not the time to end the ending presentation (S1011: No), a winning process is executed (S1023) to perform processing according to winning into the specific winning hole 65a and the right specific winning hole 650a. Details of this winning process (S1023) will be described later with reference to FIG. 88. After the winning process (S1023) is completed, an abnormality process is executed (S1024) to determine whether the game balls that entered the specific winning hole 65a and the right specific winning hole 650a were discharged normally, and this process is terminated. Details of this abnormality process (S1024) will be described later with reference to FIG. 89.

Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1021) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1021). As described above, this jackpot operation setting process (S1021) is a process for setting the opening operation according to the round and jackpot type.

In the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 86), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round (S1101). If it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first round of the jackpot (S1101: No), the opening of the specific winning port 65a is set (S1102), and the process proceeds to S1105.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the first round (S1101: Yes), the opening pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the opening pattern table 202aa (S1103). In the process of S1103, if the current jackpot type is jackpot A6, an opening pattern that allows a V win (see FIG. 80(a)) is read, whereas if the current jackpot type is jackpot B6, an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V win (see FIG. 80(b)) is read.

When the processing of S1103 is completed, the start of the opening pattern read in the processing of S1103 is then set (S1104), and processing proceeds to S1105. In the processing of S1105, which is executed after the processing of S1102 or S1104, a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S1105), and this processing ends. By executing this jackpot operation setting processing (see FIG. 86), the right specific winning port 650a can be controlled to open and close with an appropriate opening pattern depending on the type of jackpot.

Next, referring to FIG. 87, the details of the jackpot end process (S1022) will be described. As described above, this jackpot end process (S1022) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends. In this jackpot end process (S1022), first, it is determined whether the probability setting flag 203aa is on or not (S1201). If it is determined that the probability setting flag 203aa is off (S1201: No), this means that no game ball entered (won) the right specific winning hole 650a during this jackpot, so the value of the time-saving counter 203f is set to 100 to set the game state after the jackpot ends to a low probability state for special symbols and a time-saving state for normal symbols (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the special chance setting flag 203aa is on (S1201: Yes), this means that a game ball entered the right specific winning slot 650a during the current jackpot, so the special chance flag 203e is set to on to set the game state after the jackpot ends to a special chance state for the special symbol and a time-saving state for the normal symbol (S1203), and the processing proceeds to S1204.

In the process of S1204, which is executed after the process of S1202 or S1203, a state command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the state after the jackpot set by the process of S1202 or S1203 (S1204), the special probability setting flag 203aa is set to OFF (S1205), and this process ends. By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 87), it is possible to set an appropriate game state according to the state of the special probability setting flag 203aa.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1023) will be described with reference to FIG. 88. As described above, this winning process (S1023) is a process for carrying out processing in response to winning at the specific winning port 65a and the right specific winning port 650a. In this winning process (S1023), it is first determined whether the current time is the round valid period (S1301). Here, the round valid period is the period during which a round of play is set, that is, the period from the opening of the specific winning port 65a or the right specific winning port 650a until the end of the interval period. In the process of S1301, if it is not the round valid period (S1301: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that the current round valid period is in progress (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether a win has been detected in any of the specific winning ports (specific winning port 65a or right specific winning port 650a) (S1302), and if it is determined that a win has not been detected in the specific winning port (specific winning port 65a or right specific winning port 650a) (S1302: No), the process proceeds to S1306. On the other hand, if it is determined that a win has been detected in the specific winning port (specific winning port 65a or right specific winning port 650a) (S1302: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203ac is updated by adding 1 (S1303). Next, it is determined whether the current round is the first round (S1304), and if it is determined that it is the first round (S1304: Yes), this means that the ball entered the right specific winning slot 650a (a win) in the first round of the jackpot, so the special probability setting flag 203aa is set to ON (S1305) and processing proceeds to S1306. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1304 that the current round is not the first round (S1304: No), processing of S1305 is skipped and processing proceeds to S1306.

In the process of S1306, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203ac is 10 or more (S1306), and if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203ac is 10 or more (S1306: Yes), the process proceeds to S1308 and sets the end of the current round. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1306 that the value of the winning number counter 203ac is less than 10 (S1306: No), it is next determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1307), and if the round time has elapsed (S1307: Yes), the process proceeds to S1308 and sets the end of the current round. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round period has not elapsed (S1307: No), there is no need to end the round, so the process is terminated as it is. In the process of S1307, if the current round is the first round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if the end timing of the set release pattern has arrived, whereas if it is the second round or later, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round.

In the process of S1308, the specific winning port (specific winning port 65a or right specific winning port 650a) is set to be closed (S1308), and a close command indicating that the specific winning port has been closed is set (S1309). Next, the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to on to set the ball clearing period (S1310), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 89, the details of the abnormality processing (S1024) will be described. As described above, this abnormality processing (S1024) is a process for determining whether the game balls that entered the specific winning port 65a and the right specific winning port 650a were discharged normally. In this abnormality processing (S1024), it is first determined whether the current time is the valid round period (S1401), and if the current time is not the valid round period (S1401: No), this processing ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is the valid round period (S1401: Yes), it is then determined whether the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (whether the game ball has been discharged from the discharge port for discharging the game ball from each variable winning device) (S1402).

If it is determined in the process of S1402 that the gaming ball has passed through the ball discharge switch (S1402: Yes), the value of the discharged ball counter 203af is incremented by 1 (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1402 that the gaming ball has not passed through the ball discharge switch (S1402: No), the process skips S1403 and proceeds to S1404.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is on (S1404), and if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is off (S1404: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is on (S1404: Yes), this means that the ball removal period is currently in progress, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is updated by adding 1 (S1405). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is the upper limit value (i.e., whether the ball discharge period ends (0.8 seconds after the end of the round)) (S1406). If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is not the upper limit value (not the end of the ball discharge period) (S1406: No), it is determined whether the current time is the ball discharge period after the end of the first round (S1407). If it is determined that the current time is the ball discharge period after the end of one round (S1407: Yes), it is then determined whether the game ball has passed through the special rate switch 650e (S1408). If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the special rate switch 650e (S1408: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1408 that the game ball has passed the special chance switch 650e (S1408: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special chance passing counter 203ab (S1409), the special chance setting flag 203aa is set to ON (S1410), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1407 that the current ball discharge period is the ball discharge period after the end of the second or subsequent rounds (S1407: No), each process of S1408 to S1410 is skipped and this process ends as is.

In addition, in the process of S1406, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is the upper limit (the end timing of the ball discharge period) (S1406: Yes), it is then determined whether the number of dispensed balls (the value of the dispensed ball number counter 203af) matches the number of winning balls (the sum of the value of the winning ball number counter 203ac and the value of the special chance passing counter 203ab) (S1411).

If it is determined in the process of S1411 that the number of dispensed balls does not match the number of winning balls (S1411: No), an error command is set (S1412) and the process proceeds to S1413. When the error command is received by the sound and lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, the text "Winning balls mismatch error" is displayed) and an error signal is output to the hall computer. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent behavior in which game balls are passed through the special winning switch 650e3 while the right specific winning port 650a is closed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1411 that the number of dispensed balls matches the number of winning balls (S1411: Yes), the process of S1412 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1413. In the process of S1413, the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to OFF (S1413), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is reset (S1414). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203ac, the dispensed number counter 203af, and the special chance passing counter 203ab are each reset (S1415), and this process ends.

By executing this abnormality processing (see Figure 89), it is possible to detect and notify early on of malfunctions that may cause game balls that have entered each specific winning port (specific winning port 65a and right variable winning device 650a) to be unable to be discharged normally due to ball clogging inside each variable winning device (variable winning device 65 and right variable winning device 650).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is configured to provide two types of variable winning devices, the variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650, which are variable winning devices that provide a bonus (prize balls) to the player when a game ball enters the right variable winning device 650 during the execution of a jackpot game (special game state). The right specific winning port 650a of the right variable winning device 650 is set to an open state that allows balls to enter during the first round of the jackpot, and when a game ball enters the right specific winning port 650a during the jackpot, in addition to the prize balls, a special pattern probability state is provided after the jackpot ends. Therefore, whether or not the game state after the jackpot is advantageous for the player depends on whether or not the game ball enters the right specific winning port 650a, so the player can play the game while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the right specific winning port 650a during the first round of the jackpot.

The right specific winning port 650a is located at a position where the game ball can reach whether the player hits from the left or the right, and if the player continues hitting from the left in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 while the right specific winning port 650a is in a ball-entering state will increase, but the rate at which the game balls that reach the right specific winning port 650a enter the right specific winning port 650a will be low. On the other hand, if the player continues hitting from the right in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 while the right specific winning port 650a is in a ball-entering state will decrease, but the rate at which the game balls that reach the right specific winning port 650a enter the right specific winning port 650a will be high. In other words, the aspect (element) of the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 during a predetermined period (the period until the opening pattern of one round ends) (the number of opportunities to enter the right specific winning port 650a) is configured to be more advantageous for left-handed players than for right-handed players. In addition, the aspect (element) of the ease of ball entry into the right variable winning device 650 (ball entry rate) is configured to be more advantageous for right-handed hits than for left-handed hits. As a result, the playability in the first round of a jackpot can be varied depending on the direction in which the game ball is shot, allowing each player to select their preferred playability (either a playability in which the ball entry rate into the right specific winning port 650a is low but the number of game balls that reach it is high, or a playability in which the number of balls that reach it is low but the ball entry rate is high). This allows playability that suits the tastes of more players to be realized, thereby improving the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

In the sixth embodiment, during the specified period (first round) of the jackpot, right-handed hits are more advantageous in terms of ball entry rate (the game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650a are more likely to enter the right specific winning port 650a) than left-handed hits, while left-handed hits are more advantageous in terms of the number of balls reached (more game balls are more likely to reach the right variable winning device 650a) than right-handed hits. This realizes a game that allows the player to choose between right-handed hits and left-handed hits by differentiating the advantages and disadvantages between right-handed hits and left-handed hits, but the difference in advantage between right-handed hits and left-handed hits is not limited to this. For example, a specific winning hole that has a short opening time (for example, a maximum of 1 second) but many prize balls (for example, 15 balls per ball entry) may be provided at a position where the game ball is easy to enter when the player hits from the left (it is difficult to enter when the player hits from the right), and a specific winning hole that has a long opening time (for example, a maximum of 5 seconds) but few prize balls (for example, 3 balls per ball entry) may be provided at a position where the game ball is easy to enter when the player hits from the right (it is difficult to enter when the player hits from the left). The specific winning hole that is opened may be alternately switched for each round, and the interval between rounds may be extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds). By configuring in this way, if the player continues to hit from the left during a jackpot, the number of game balls that enter the specific winning hole is likely to be small, but it is possible to realize a game in which many prize balls are awarded when the ball enters the specific winning hole. On the other hand, if the player continues to hit the right side during a big win, more game balls are likely to enter the specific winning hole, but fewer prize balls are given when the ball enters the specific winning hole. This allows the player to select the game play that suits him/her. Also, for example, the variable winning device 65 may be provided at a position where the game ball is likely to enter when the player hits the left side (where it is difficult to enter when the player hits the right side), and the right variable winning device 650 may be provided at a position where the game ball is likely to enter when the player hits the right side (where it is difficult to enter when the player hits the left side), and the period during which the right variable winning device 650 is opened during one big win may be shorter than the period during which the variable winning device 65 is opened. That is, if the player continues to hit the ball from the right side in one big win, the ball will enter the right specific winning hole 650a, and the probability of the ball entering the special winning hole 650a after the big win will increase, while the number of prize balls obtained will decrease. If the player continues to hit the ball from the left side, many game balls will enter the special winning hole 65a, making it possible to obtain a large number of prize balls, while it will be difficult to make the ball enter the right specific winning hole 650a, making the game state after the big win unfavorable. Even in this configuration, the advantage can be made different for each launch direction during the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, the positional relationship between the variable winning device 65 (a variable winning device in which only prize balls are awarded for balls entering the hole) and the right variable winning device 650 (a variable winning device in which prize balls are awarded for balls entering the hole and a special winning state is also awarded) may be reversed. In addition, the setting of the side (element) in which the player is more favorable to the right side and the side (element) in which the player is more favorable to the left side are not limited to the first round of the big win. For example, during normal play, a configuration may be provided in which a left hit is more advantageous than a right hit, and a right hit is more advantageous than a left hit. More specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a left ball entry port into which a game ball shot by a left hit can enter, and a right ball entry port into which a game ball shot by a right hit can enter, and a configuration may be configured in which a lottery for a special pattern is executed when a game ball enters either ball entry port. In addition, in a time-saving state of a normal pattern, a right hit aimed at the right ball entry port is more advantageous in terms of game efficiency than a left hit, while a left hit is less advantageous in terms of game efficiency than a right hit, but when a jackpot is won, a jackpot type (a type that is more advantageous in terms of the number of rounds or the continuation rate of an advantageous state) that is more advantageous than a right hit is more likely to be selected.

In the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined period (first round) of a jackpot, when a right hit is made, the game ball that reaches the right variable winning device 650a is more likely to enter the right specific winning port 650a than when a left hit is made, while when a left hit is made, more game balls are more likely to reach the right variable winning device 650a than when a right hit is made. In addition to this, a sensor or the like capable of detecting the launch direction of the game ball in the first round of a jackpot may be provided on the game board 13. Then, a corresponding performance may be executed according to the launch direction detected by the sensor. More specifically, for example, when a left hit is detected, the display mode of the first round (see FIG. 82) may be set to a display mode in which the display area HR2 is lit and the display area HR3 is unlit, while when a right hit is detected, the display mode may be set to a display mode in which the display area HR3 is lit and the display area HR2 is unlit. By configuring in this way, the player can more easily understand the gameplay selected by the accident.

In the sixth embodiment, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is configured to be opened by sliding leftward when viewed from the front, so that the period during which a game ball rolling from the right side of the right variable winning device 650 can enter is longer than the period during which a game ball rolling from the left side can enter the right variable winning device 650, but the shape and operation of the opening and closing door 650f1 are not limited to this. For example, the opening and closing door 650f1 may be configured to open from the front side when viewed from the front toward the back side. The length of the opening and closing door 650f1 on the right front side when viewed from the front may be shorter than the length of the left front side when viewed from the front by one game ball or more. That is, when the opening and closing door 650f1 is being stored toward the back side when viewed from the front, the right side of the opening and closing door 650f1 can be configured to be in a state where game balls can be entered earlier than the left side, and when the opening and closing door 650f1 is closed, when the opening and closing door 650f1 protrudes forward in front of the front, the left side of the opening and closing door 650f1 can be configured to be in a state where game balls can be entered earlier. Even when configured in this way, as in the sixth embodiment described above, it is possible to configure the right variable winning device 650 so that the period during which game balls rolling from the right side can enter the right variable winning device 650 is longer than the period during which game balls rolling from the left side can enter the right variable winning device 650.

In the sixth embodiment, the board configuration is configured to provide a surface where left-handed hits are more advantageous than right-handed hits (i.e., the proportion of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 that enter the right specific winning port 650a) and a surface where right-handed hits are more advantageous than left-handed hits (i.e., the number of game balls that can reach the right variable winning device 650 during one round), but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be realized by control. More specifically, for example, the right specific winning port 650a is provided at a position where the arrival rate of game balls is the same whether the player hits right or left. Then, in the first round of a jackpot, it may be configured to detect whether the player hits right or left, and the opening pattern may be different when it is detected that the player is hitting right and when it is detected that the player is hitting left. That is, when a right hit is detected, the right specific winning opening 650a is opened less frequently but with a relatively long opening period for each opening, whereas when a left hit is detected, the right specific winning opening 650a is opened more frequently but with a relatively short opening period for each opening. Also, the player may select the jackpot playability by operating a button or other operating means, rather than the direction in which the game ball is launched.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 90 to 95. In the above-mentioned fifth embodiment, all game balls launched by right-handed hits were configured to pass through the detouring device 700. That is, when a right-handed hit is performed, the balls always flow down to the lower area of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are provided) over a period of 7 to 8 seconds. That is, in a normal game state other than when a big win game is being performed, right-handed hits are configured to deteriorate game efficiency.

In contrast, in the seventh embodiment, two types of flow paths are provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and when the game ball flows down one of the flow paths, it passes through the detour device 700 and flows down to the variable winning device 65 as in the fifth embodiment, whereas when the game ball flows down the other flow path, it avoids entering the detour device 700 and also makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning port 65a. In other words, two types of flow paths are provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80: a flow path that takes a relatively long time for the game ball to enter one of the ball entry ports (the first ball entry port 64, the specific winning port 65, the out port 66, the general winning port 63, etc.), and a flow path that takes a relatively short time for the game ball to enter one of the ball entry ports. This allows the gameplay to be varied depending on the direction in which the game ball is launched during a jackpot (selecting between a gameplay that may result in some wasted balls but allows the jackpot to be consumed quickly, and a gameplay that is less likely to result in wasted balls but allows the jackpot to be consumed over a longer period of time), while preventing a deterioration in game efficiency when playing by hitting from the right.

The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in that the game board 13 has a partially changed board configuration, the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed control. The rest of the configuration, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fifth embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 90, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90, the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment differs from the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment in that a flow path through which game balls can flow is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front and on the left side of the detour device 700 as viewed from the front. Also, it differs in that the electric device 64a provided in association with the first ball entrance 64 has been deleted. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, the flow path in which the detour device 700 is provided will be referred to as the right first flow path, and the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front and on the left side of the detour device 700 as viewed from the front will be referred to as the right second flow path.

As shown in FIG. 90, a normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 through which a gaming ball can pass is provided at the top of the right second flow path, and when a gaming ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67, a lottery for a normal pattern is executed as in the fifth embodiment and the like. As shown in FIG. 90, this normal ball entry port 67 is marked with the letter "GO." Below the normal ball entry port 67, a second ball entry port 640 through which a gaming ball can enter is provided. When a gaming ball enters this second ball entry port 640, a lottery for a special pattern is executed as in the case where a gaming ball enters the first ball entry port 64. In addition, the lottery for the special symbol (lottery for the first special symbol) executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the lottery for the special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 are configured so that the rate of winning the jackpot is the same regardless of the state (whether it is a low probability state of the special symbol or a probability variable state of the special symbol). On the other hand, the jackpot type determined when the jackpot is won by the lottery for the special symbol is configured to be different between the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery for the first special symbol and the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery for the second special symbol (see FIG. 92(a)). More specifically, it is configured so that the jackpot type with a larger number of rounds is more likely to be determined when the jackpot is won by the lottery for the second special symbol than when the jackpot is won by the lottery for the first special symbol. This allows players to feel greater joy when they win a jackpot on the second special symbol drawing than when they win a jackpot on the first special symbol drawing.

The second ball entrance 640 is provided with an electric device 640a that can perform an opening operation to the right when viewed from the front. While this electric device 640a is closed (standing up vertically), the game balls that flow into the right second flow path cannot enter the second ball entrance 640, while the electric device 640a is open (tilted to the right when viewed from the front), most of the game balls that flow into the right second flow path can enter the second ball entrance 640. This electric device 640a is variable to an open state under the same conditions as the electric device 64a of the fifth embodiment, etc. More specifically, in the normal state of the normal pattern, when the lottery for the normal pattern is a hit, the opening period and the number of times of opening are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time", while in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, when the lottery for the normal pattern is a hit, the opening period and the number of times of opening are set to "1 second x 2 times". In addition, as in the fifth embodiment, in the normal state of the normal pattern, the variation time of the normal pattern is 30 seconds, whereas in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the variation time of the normal pattern is very short at 3 seconds. Therefore, when the game method of shooting the game ball aiming at the right second flow path is performed in the normal state of the normal pattern, the game ball can hardly enter the second ball entrance 640 (the game ball is wasted), whereas in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the game ball can be frequently entered into the second ball entrance 640 (to the extent that the number of game balls shot and the number of prize balls paid out by entering the second ball entrance 640 are almost equal) by the game method of shooting the game ball aiming at the right second flow path. Therefore, in a game state where the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set (a special pattern probability state and a normal pattern time-saving state, or a special pattern low probability state and a normal pattern time-saving state), by continuing to shoot the game ball aiming at the right second flow path, the lottery for the second special pattern, which is likely to determine a favorable jackpot type (a jackpot type with a relatively large number of rounds) in the event of a jackpot, can be executed continuously without reducing the number of balls held. On the other hand, in a normal state of the normal pattern, since most of the game balls will be wasted even if the right second flow path is aimed, it is necessary to play by shooting the game ball aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting from the left. Even if a jackpot is obtained by the lottery for the first special pattern, an unfavorable jackpot type (a jackpot type with a relatively small number of rounds) is likely to be determined, and the more the left hit is continued, the fewer the number of balls held. Therefore, the player can play with a stronger expectation that the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set will be entered.

In addition, an outlet 66 is provided below the second ball inlet 640. When a game ball enters this outlet 66, the game ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 without being awarded a prize ball. This outlet 66 can prevent the game ball from becoming clogged in the right second flow path. As shown in FIG. 90, the right second flow path has almost no configuration that prevents the game ball from flowing down (changing the direction of travel or decelerating) until the game ball enters one of the ball inlets (the second ball inlet 640 or the outlet 66). Therefore, compared to the right first flow path, the period from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the ball into one of the ball inlets is extremely short (for example, about one second). Therefore, by launching the game ball aiming at the right second flow path, the game can be played efficiently.

Thus, in the seventh embodiment, in addition to the right first flow path in which the detouring device 700 is provided, the right side of the variable display unit 80 is provided with the normal ball entrance 67 and the right second flow path in which the second ball entrance 640 is provided. The second ball entrance 640 is in a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter (the electric device 640a is easy to open) during the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, so that the player can hit left in the normal state of the normal pattern and hit right in the high probability state of the normal pattern. In other words, even in the presence of the detouring device 700, the player can enjoy switching the direction in which the game ball is launched depending on the game state during normal play (game state other than during jackpot play).

Next, referring to FIG. 91, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a game state in which a time-saving state of a normal symbol is set (a special symbol probability state, a normal symbol time-saving state, a special symbol low probability state, and a normal symbol time-saving state). As shown in FIG. 91, when a time-saving state of a normal symbol is set, a display area HR8 having a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular shape is formed on the upper side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front (above the display area in which the variable display of the third symbol is being executed). In this display area HR8, as shown in FIG. 91, the text "Aim for "GO" with a right hit!!" and an image imitating a right-pointing arrow are displayed. These displays allow the player to easily understand that by hitting the game ball to the right with a launch strength (launch speed) that will pass through the normal ball entry (through gate) 67 marked with the letter "GO," the game ball can also enter the second ball entry gate 640.

In the seventh embodiment, the game ball can flow into the right first flow path by launching the game ball with a launch strength of 85% to 100% (i.e., by rotating the operation handle 51 to a position of 85% to 100% of the movable range), and the game ball can flow into the right second flow path by launching the game ball with a launch strength of 60% to 90% (i.e., by rotating the operation handle 51 to a position of 60% to 90% of the movable range). Here, when the game ball is launched in the range of 85% to 90% launch strength, it may flow into both the right first flow path and the right second flow path depending on the rebound direction of the game ball. Also, when the game ball is launched with a launch strength of 60% to 65%, it may flow into the right second flow path and into the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80. On the other hand, when the game ball is launched within the range of launch strength of 91% to 100%, the game ball will almost certainly flow into the right first flow path. Furthermore, if the game ball is launched with a launch strength in the range of 66% to 84%, it will almost certainly flow into the second right flow path. If the game ball is launched with a launch strength of 25% to 59%, it will almost certainly flow into the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80. If the game ball is launched with a launch strength of less than 25%, it will not be able to pass over the return ball prevention member 68, and therefore will not be launched into the game area.

<Electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 92, the first winning type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment is only a partial change in the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b compared to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 9(a)). As shown in FIG. 92(a), the first winning type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment specifies different jackpot types depending on whether the lottery at the time of winning the jackpot is a lottery of the first special symbol or a lottery of the second special symbol.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(a), when the value range of the first winning type counter C2 is "0-4" among the winnings by drawing the first special symbol, "jackpot A7" is associated with it as the winning type (see 202b1 in FIG. 92(a)). This "jackpot A7" is a winning type with 16 rounds, and the game state after the winning is set to a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol time-saving state. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first winning type counter C2, the counter values (random number values) associated with "jackpot A7" are 5, "0-4", so the rate (probability) of "jackpot A7" being determined when the first special symbol is drawn as a winning jackpot is 5% (5/100).

As shown in FIG. 92(a), among the jackpots obtained by drawing the first special symbol, when the value range of the first jackpot type counter C2 is "5 to 59", "jackpot B7" is associated with it as the jackpot type (see 202b2 in FIG. 92(a)). This "jackpot B7" is a jackpot type with 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol time-saving state. In other words, although the number of rounds is less than "jackpot A7", the game state after the jackpot ends is the most advantageous game state, so it is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous to the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first winning type counter C2, 55 counter values (random number values) are associated with "jackpot B7", from "5 to 59". Therefore, if a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the first special symbol, the rate (probability) that "jackpot B7" will be determined is 55% (55/100).

As shown in FIG. 92(a), among the jackpots resulting from the drawing of the first special symbol, when the value range of the first jackpot type counter C2 is "60 to 99", "jackpot C7" is associated with it as the jackpot type (see 202b3 in FIG. 92(a)). This "jackpot C7" is a jackpot type with 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a low probability state for the special symbol and a time-saving state for the normal symbol. In other words, "jackpot C7" is the least favorable jackpot type, since it has the fewest number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is a relatively unfavorable state. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first winning type counter C2, the counter values (random number values) associated with "jackpot C7" are 40, ranging from "60 to 99." Therefore, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, the rate (probability) that "jackpot C7" will be determined is 40% (40/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92(a), for the jackpots resulting from the drawing of the second special symbol, the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0-59", and "jackpot D7" is associated with it as the jackpot type (see 202b4 in FIG. 92(a)). This "jackpot D7" is a jackpot type with 16 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a special symbol probability state and a normal symbol time-saving state. In other words, like the "jackpot A7", it is the jackpot type that is most advantageous for the player in terms of the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first winning type counter C2, the counter values (random number values) associated with the "jackpot D7" are 60, ranging from "0-59", so the rate (probability) of the "jackpot D7" being determined when the jackpot is drawn for the first special symbol is 60% (60/100).

As shown in FIG. 92(a), for the jackpots resulting from the drawing of the second special symbol, the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "60-99", and "jackpot E7" is associated with it as the jackpot type (see 202b5 in FIG. 92(a)). This "jackpot E7" is a jackpot type with 16 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a low probability state of the special symbol and a time-saving state of the normal symbol. In other words, it is a jackpot type with the largest number of rounds, but with a relatively disadvantageous game state after the jackpot. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first winning type counter C2, the counter values (random number values) associated with "jackpot E7" are 40 from "60-99", so the rate (probability) of "jackpot E7" being determined when the jackpot is drawn by drawing the first special symbol is 40% (40/100).

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, there is a 95% chance that a jackpot of 8 rounds (a relatively small number of rounds) (either jackpot B7 or jackpot C7) will be determined, and there is only a 5% chance that a jackpot of 16 rounds (a relatively large number of rounds) (jackpot A7) will be determined. On the other hand, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the second special symbol, there is a 100% chance that a jackpot of 16 rounds (a relatively large number of rounds) (either jackpot D7 or jackpot E7) will be determined. As a result, a larger number of rounds is more likely to be determined in the drawing of the second special symbol than in the drawing of the first special symbol, so that a player can have a greater sense of expectation when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the second special symbol.

The method of making a jackpot resulting from the drawing of the second special symbol more advantageous than a jackpot resulting from the drawing of the first special symbol is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds, the probability of determining the jackpot type that will result in a special symbol probability change state after the jackpot ends may be configured to be higher for a jackpot resulting from the drawing of the second special symbol. Also, for example, the number of time-saving times in the event of a normal jackpot may be configured to be greater for a jackpot resulting from the drawing of the second special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 92(b), the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 92(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 92(b), the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 8) in that a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a1 and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a2 are provided instead of the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, and a first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c1 and a second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c2 are provided instead of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 each have the same configuration as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). That is, it has four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3. When a special symbol is drawn, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are shifted (moved) to the execution area (see FIG. 11), and a determination such as a drawing of a special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area. On the other hand, when the counter values are not stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 (when the reserved balls of the second special symbol are 0), the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 are shifted (moved) to the execution area (see FIG. 11), and a determination such as a drawing of a special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area. That is, in this seventh embodiment, the drawing of the second special symbol is performed with priority over the drawing of the first special symbol.

The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times, and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is initially set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S424 in FIG. 94). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S228 in FIG. 93). The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is initially set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the variable display number of reserved balls increases (see S430 in FIG. 94). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S223 in FIG. 93).

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 93 to Fig. 95. First, the special symbol variation process 8 (S121) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 93. This special symbol variation process 8 (S121) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see Fig. 22) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) in the timer interrupt process (see Fig. 21), and is a process for setting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, as in the special symbol variation process (see Fig. 22).

In the special symbol change process 8 (see FIG. 93) in the seventh embodiment, the same processes as those in S201, S202, and S208 to S217 in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 22) in the fifth embodiment (first embodiment) are executed in S201, S202, and S208 to S217. In addition, in the special symbol change process 8 (see FIG. 93) in the seventh embodiment, if it is determined in S202 that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 is acquired (S221), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 is greater than 0 (S222).

In the process of S222, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S222: Yes), then the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is updated by subtracting 1 from it (S223), and a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command indicating the updated value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is set (S224). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223.

After the special symbol 2 reserved ball count command is set by the process of S224, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted in sequence to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S222, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c2 is not greater than 0 (a value equal to or greater than 1) (i.e., it is 0) (S222: No), then the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c1 is obtained (S226), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c1 is greater than 0 (S227).

In the process of S227, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c1 is not greater than 0 (a value equal to or greater than 1) (i.e., it is 0) (S227: No), this means that there are no reserved balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and it is not possible to start a new display of the changing special patterns, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S227 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c1 is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S227: Yes), then the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c1 is updated by subtracting 1 from it (S228), and a special symbol 1 reserved ball count command indicating the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c1 is set (S229). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, just like the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201.

After the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command is set by the process of S229, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is shifted in the same manner as the process of S225 (S230), and the process proceeds to S208.

Next, referring to FIG. 94, details of the start winning process 8 (S122) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This start winning process 8 (S122) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) instead of the start winning process (see FIG. 24) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process for executing corresponding control when a ball is detected entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640.

In this start winning process 8 (S122), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S421). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S421, if it is determined that the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S421: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (the number of reserved variable display times N1 corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol) is obtained (S422). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S423).

If it is determined in the process of S421 that no ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S421: No), or if a game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 but the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (i.e., it is 4) in the process of S423 (S423: No), the process proceeds to S427. On the other hand, if a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S421: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is incremented by 1 (S424). Then, a special symbol 1 reserved ball count command is set to indicate the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 changed by the calculation (S425).

The special symbol 1 reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c1 from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b in the RAM 223.

After the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command is set by the process of S425, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type counter C3 updated by the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) described above are stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 of RAM 203 (S426), and the process proceeds to S427. Note that in the process of S426, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c1 is referenced, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is set as the first area.

In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (initial entry) (S427). In this process, as in the process of S421, the entry of the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S427, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S427: Yes), the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c2 (the number of reserved variable displays N2 corresponding to the lottery of the second special pattern) is obtained (S428), and it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S429).

If there is no winning ball in the second ball entrance 640 (S427: No), or if there is a winning ball in the second ball entrance 640 but the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 is not less than 4 (i.e., it is 4) (S429: No), the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, if there is a winning ball in the second ball entrance 640 (S427: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S429: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 (S430). Then, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count command is set to indicate the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 changed by the calculation (S431).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special pattern 2 reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c2 from the special pattern 2 reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b in the RAM 223.

After the special symbol 2 reserved ball count command is set by the process of S431, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type counter C3 updated by the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) described above are stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 of RAM 203 (S432), and the process proceeds to S433. Note that in the process of S432, as in the process of S426, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c2 is referenced, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 are set as the first area.

In the process of S433, a look-ahead process is executed to look ahead as to whether the player has won or lost from the various counter values obtained based on the initial winning (S433), and then the process ends. Details of this look-ahead process are described with reference to FIG. 95.

Figure 95 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process (S433). In this look-ahead process (S433), it is first determined whether or not a new ball has been detected at the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 during this start winning process 8 (see Figure 94) (S1501), and if it is determined that a new ball has not been detected (S1501: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1501 that a new ball has been detected (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball is at the upper limit (i.e., 4) (S1502), and if it is determined that it is at the upper limit (S1502: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1502 that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit (S1502: No), the system predicts whether the lottery for the special pattern is a win (whether it is a jackpot or not), its stop type (if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type), and its fluctuation pattern (S1503) based on the various counter values acquired at the time the ball was detected (various counter values stored in S426 or S432 of the start winning process 8 (see FIG. 94)).

After the process of S1503 predicts the winning or losing outcome of the special symbol lottery, the stop type (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot), and the fluctuation pattern, a winning information command including the predicted winning or losing outcome of the lottery, the predicted stop type, and the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S1504), and this process ends.

The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice and lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by MPU 201. When the voice and lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts the winning or losing status, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores this information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment, two flow paths are provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80: a right first flow path in which the time it takes for the game ball to enter one of the ball entry ports (the time it takes to reach the area below the game board 13) is relatively long (7 to 8 seconds), and a right second flow path in which the time it takes for the game ball to enter one of the ball entry ports is relatively short (about 1 second). By shooting the game ball aiming at the right first flow path in a jackpot, the time it takes to reach the specific winning port 65a is long (i.e., the time it takes to end the jackpot is long), as in the fifth embodiment described above, but the game ball can enter (win) the specific winning port 65a at a higher rate than when the game ball is shot aiming at the specific winning port 65a by hitting it from the left.

In addition, when a game ball is shot toward the right second flow path, the possibility of the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is almost zero, but it can be made to reach the second ball entry hole 640 in a relatively short period of time (about 1 second). Therefore, in a high probability state of a normal pattern in which the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entry hole 640 is easily opened, by continuing to shoot the game ball toward the right second flow path (hitting to the right with a shooting strength of 66% to 84%), it is possible to continuously draw the second special pattern without reducing the number of balls held. On the other hand, when a ball is shot to the left, the possibility of the ball entering the second ball entry hole 640 is almost zero, but the ball can enter the first ball entry hole 64 and can also enter the specific winning hole 65a. In addition, the game ball can reach the lower area of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the specific winning hole 65 are provided) in a shorter period (about 1 to 2 seconds) than when the game ball is launched toward the right first flow path. Therefore, a player who wants to end the big win in a short period (want to win many prize balls in a short period of time) can hit from the left. Also, even in the normal state of the normal pattern in which the electric role 640a is difficult to open, the player can play the game aiming to make the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 by hitting from the left. In this way, in the seventh embodiment, the flow path through which the game ball flows down can be changed according to the game state and the player's taste. Therefore, the player can be given the fun of hitting the game ball in different directions, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the seventh embodiment, the game balls that flow down the right second flow path are configured to enter either the second ball entrance 640 or the exit 66, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the game balls that flow into the right second flow path may be configured to be able to reach the first ball entrance 64 or the specific winning hole 65, etc. Conversely, the game balls that flow into the right first flow path may be configured to be able to reach the second ball entrance 640.

In the seventh embodiment, the right first flow path, which is easy for the ball to enter the specific winning port 65a and difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640, and the right second flow path, which is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning port 65a and easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640, are provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, but this is not limited to this. For example, the game ball that flows down the right second flow path may be configured to be able to enter the first ball entry port 64, and the winning rate into the specific winning port 65a may be lower than when it flows down the right first flow path. By configuring in this way, the game ball can enter the first ball entry port 64 even when playing by hitting left during normal times and when playing by hitting right and aiming at the right second flow path, so that the game ball can be launched in the launch direction of the player's preference during normal play. Also, for example, on the left side of the game board 13, a left first flow path that makes it easier for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a and harder for the ball to enter the first ball entry hole 64, and a left second flow path that makes it harder for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a than the left first flow path and easier for the ball to enter the first ball entry hole 64 than the left first flow path, may be provided.

In the seventh embodiment, during the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, a performance (see FIG. 91) is executed to suggest that the game ball be launched toward the normal ball entrance 67. In addition, if the player is hitting the ball to the left even though the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set (for example, when it is detected that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64), a performance (warning performance) that strongly requests the player to hit the ball to the normal ball entrance 67 may be executed. Similarly, if it is detected that the player is hitting the ball to the right in the normal state of the normal pattern (for example, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67), a performance (warning performance) that strongly requests the player to hit the ball to the left may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing the game while shooting the game ball in the wrong direction, resulting in the player's loss.

<First Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, various modified examples of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 96 to 98. First, a first modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 96. In the seventh embodiment described above, when the game ball flows down the right first flow path, the winning rate for the specific winning hole 65a is the highest, while the period until the game ball reaches the specific winning hole 65a is long. In addition, when the game ball flows down the right second flow path, the game ball is easily inserted into the second ball insertion hole 640, while it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a.

In contrast, in the first modified example, both the game ball that has flowed down the right first flow path and the game ball that has flowed down the right second flow path can reach the specific winning hole 65a. In addition, as will be described in detail later, by continuously hitting the right side during the execution of the jackpot game, the game ball that has flowed down the right first flow path and the game ball that has flowed down the right second flow path reach the variable winning device 65 almost simultaneously. As a result, two game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a during the execution of the jackpot game, making it easy to enter the game balls in each round beyond the maximum number of times that the specific winning hole 65a can be entered. More specifically, as described above, in each round of the jackpot, when the 10th ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, it is determined that the round end condition has been met and the specific winning hole 65a is closed. In this situation, if two game balls arrive at the specific winning port 65a at almost the same time while nine game balls have already entered the specific winning port 65a, an eleventh game ball that arrives at the specific winning port 65a at almost the same time as the tenth game ball can also be made to enter the specific winning port 65a between the detection of the tenth winning ball and the closing of the specific winning port 65a. In other words, in one round, it is relatively easy to obtain prize balls for eleven winning balls (prize balls for winning more than the specified number of times). Therefore, it is possible to obtain prize balls in excess of the original jackpot specifications of the pachinko machine 10, thereby increasing the player's interest in the jackpot game.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a front view of the game board 13 in the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 96, in the game board 13 in this first modified example, the right first flow path (the flow path formed on the rightmost side of the game board 13) is provided with multiple nails instead of the detouring device 700 in the seventh embodiment. These multiple nails allow the flow direction of the game ball to be switched multiple times. On the other hand, the right second flow path (the flow path formed between the variable display unit 80 and the right first flow path) has fewer structures that impede (slow down) the flow of the game ball compared to the right first flow path. Therefore, the period from when the game ball is launched to when it flows down the right second flow path until it reaches the lower area of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are located) is shorter than when it flows down the right first flow path. More specifically, the time it takes for the game ball to reach the variable winning device 65 after being launched is about 0.6 seconds shorter when the ball flows down the second flow path than when the ball flows down the first flow path.

In addition, above the right first flow path and the right second flow path, a distribution member 850 is provided to distribute game balls to either the right first flow path or the right second flow path. A game ball launched by hitting with the right hand always reaches this distribution member 850, and is distributed by the distribution member 850 to one of the flow paths (either the right first flow path or the right second flow path). As shown in FIG. 96, this distribution member 850 has two holding parts 850a, 850b that can receive and temporarily hold game balls that flow down. The distribution member 850 is basically in a state where one of the holding parts 850a, 850b faces upward and is stationary, and a game ball launched by a right hit is received by the holding part facing upward. FIG. 96 illustrates a situation in which a game ball launched by a right hit is received when the holding part 850a is stationary and facing upward.

When a game ball is received by either of the holding parts 850a and 850b, gravity due to the weight of the game ball acts on the distribution member 850. As a result, when a game ball is received by the holding part 850a, the distribution member 850 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation axis 850c as the rotation axis, and the holding part 850b faces upward. In this state, the holding part 850a forms a downward inclination to the lower left, so that the game ball held by the holding part 850a falls to the lower left when viewed from the front. That is, it flows down the right second flow path. On the other hand, when a game ball is received by the holding part 850b, the distribution member 850 rotates clockwise around the rotation axis 850c as the rotation axis, and the holding part 850a faces upward. In this state, the holding portion 850b forms an incline that slopes downward to the right, so the game ball held in the holding portion 850b falls to the lower right when viewed from the front. That is, it flows down the right first flow path. Therefore, every time the distribution member 850 distributes a game ball to one of the flow paths, a different holding portion faces upward. Therefore, every time a game ball reaches the distribution member 650, the game ball can be distributed alternately to the right first flow path and the right second flow path.

As described above, the time it takes for a ball to reach the variable winning device 65 is about 0.6 seconds shorter when it flows down the right second flow path than when it flows down the right first flow path. As described above, the balls are configured to be launched at a minimum interval of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, when the balls are continuously shot to the right, one game ball distributed to the right first flow path and a game ball launched after the one game ball and distributed to the right second flow path reach the variable winning device 65 almost simultaneously and win at the specific winning port 65a almost simultaneously. Therefore, in each round of a big win, in a state where nine game balls have already won at the specific winning port 65a (the specific winning port 65a will be closed if one more winning is detected), if two game balls that flow down the right first flow path and the right second flow path reach the specific winning port 65a almost simultaneously, 11 game balls can be entered in one round. In other words, by simply continuing to hit the right side in succession, it is possible to easily make more game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a than the maximum number of winning balls in each round of a jackpot, which is 10 balls (the number of winning balls that is the condition for ending the round) (generating a so-called over-winning). This can further increase the player's interest in the jackpot game.

In the first modified example, the game balls are alternately distributed between the right first flow path and the right second flow path by the distribution member 850 by simply continuing to hit the game balls to the right, but this is not limited to the above. The distribution member 850 may be omitted, and the player may adjust the firing strength to aim for over-winning. In this case, when the number of winning balls in the specific winning hole 65 in each round becomes nine (the number of winning balls is one less than the specified number), the game ball is first fired at the right first flow path, and then fired at the right second flow path, so that the game ball that has flowed down the right first flow path and the game ball that has flowed down the right second flow path can reach the variable winning device 65 almost simultaneously. In other words, the eleventh game ball can be made to win the specific winning hole 65a between the detection of the winning of the tenth game ball and the closing of the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, compared to the first modified example described above, the technique of quickly switching the launch direction is required, but for players who can accurately switch the launch direction, over-winning can be more reliably achieved. That is, in the first modified example described above, unless the tenth game ball is distributed to the right first flow path in one round, over-winning cannot occur. In other words, whether or not an over-winning is likely to occur depends on the state of the distribution member 850 at the start of the round. In contrast, if the distribution member 850 is removed, a player who has the technique of switching the launch direction can always cause the tenth and eleventh game balls to flow down the right first flow path and the right second flow path, so that over-winning can be more reliably achieved.

<Second Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a second modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 97. In the seventh embodiment described above, when the game ball flows down the right first flow path, the winning rate for the specific winning hole 65a is the highest, while the period until the game ball reaches the specific winning hole 65a is long. Also, when the game ball flows down the right second flow path, the game ball is easily inserted into the second ball insertion hole 640, while it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a.

In contrast, in the second modified example, instead of the variable winning device 65 in the seventh embodiment, a variable winning device 6500 is provided at a position where a game ball shot by a left hit cannot enter the ball as a variable winning device that awards a prize ball when the game ball enters the ball during a jackpot. This variable winning device 6500 is configured so that a game ball that has flowed down the right first flow path and a game ball that has flowed down the right second flow path can enter the ball. The right first flow path is configured so that it takes a longer time to reach the variable winning device 6500 than the right second flow path, and is configured so that the rate of balls entering the specific winning port 6500a is higher while the variable winning device 6500 is open. This allows different playability to be achieved when a game ball is shot aiming at the right first flow path and when a game ball is shot aiming at the right second flow path during a jackpot. That is, by continuing to shoot game balls aiming at the right first flow path, the execution period of the jackpot game will be longer, but the gameplay will be such that balls are less likely to be wasted, whereas by continuing to shoot game balls aiming at the right second flow path, the execution period of the jackpot game will be shorter, but the gameplay will be such that balls may be wasted.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a front view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 97, the second modified example differs from the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 90) only in that the variable winning device 65 has been removed, the lower part of the right second flow path is connected to the area below the game board 13, and a variable winning device 6500 is provided between the right first flow path and the right second flow path.

As shown in FIG. 97, the variable winning device 6500 awards a prize ball each time it detects an entry into a specific winning hole 6500a through which a game ball can enter. This variable winning device 6500 is provided with a pair of electric devices 6500a1, 6500a2 that can prevent game balls from entering. These electric devices 6500a1, 6500a2 are normally closed so that balls cannot enter the specific winning hole 6500a, and are opened for a predetermined period of time (until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 game balls have entered) during each round of a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 97, when the electric device 6500a1 installed on the right first flow path side is opened, the lower end of the first guide flow path (guide flow path 780) inside the bypass device 700 and the tip of the electric device 6500a1 are brought close to each other. In other words, as a result of it being impossible for the game ball to pass between the guide flow path 780 and the electric device 6500a1, the game ball that flows down the guide flow path 780 will almost certainly win in the specific winning hole 6500a.

On the other hand, when the electric device 6500a2 installed on the right second flow path side is opened, a gap of at least one game ball is opened to the left of the tip (top end) of the electric device 6500a. Therefore, the game ball that flows down the right second flow path is guided to the open electric device 6500a2 and is likely to enter the specific winning hole 6500a, but there is also a possibility that the game ball will pass through the left side of the tip (top end) of the electric device 6500a2 and flow down to the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the outlet 66 are provided).

In this way, in the second modified example of the seventh embodiment, when the game ball is launched toward the right second flow path, the game ball can enter the specific winning port 6500a. If the game ball continues to be launched toward the right first flow path during a jackpot, the period until the game ball reaches the variable winning device 6500 is long (the jackpot game is long), but the game can be played in such a way that almost all of the game balls that arrive while the specific winning port 6500a is open can be entered into the specific winning port 6500a. On the other hand, if the game ball continues to be launched toward the right second flow path during a jackpot, the period until the game ball reaches the variable winning device 6500 is short (the jackpot game can be completed in a short period of time), but there is a risk that some (for example, one in ten balls) of the game balls will enter the out port 66 without entering the specific winning port 6500a. Therefore, as in the fifth embodiment described above, the player can choose between a gameplay that extends the jackpot period but reduces the number of wasted balls (game balls that do not enter the specific winning port 6500a but end up in the out port 66), and a gameplay that allows the jackpot to be consumed quickly but results in a relatively large number of wasted balls.

<Third Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a third modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 98. In the seventh embodiment described above, the detouring device 700 provided in the right first flow path is configured to lengthen the period of time the ball passes through the right first flow path. As a result, when the game ball flows down the right first flow path, the winning rate for the specific winning hole 65a is the highest, while the period until the ball reaches the specific winning hole 65a is lengthened.

In contrast, in the third modified example, the detouring device 700 is removed from the right first flow path, and the width of the flow path is configured to be less than the width of two game balls (i.e., the width of the flow path is narrower than when the detouring device 700 is provided). In order to lengthen the period during which the game ball flows down the right first flow path, multiple rotating bodies 861-863 are arranged in the right first flow path. By narrowing the width of the right first flow path, the proportion of the area of the right first flow path in the area of the game board 13 can be reduced, which increases the freedom of arrangement of nails, windmills, etc. on the board.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 13 in the third modified example. As shown in FIG. 98, the game board 13 in this third modified example differs from the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 90) in that multiple rotating bodies 861-863 are provided in the right first flow path instead of the detouring device 700, and the width of the right first flow path is narrower and the width of the right second flow path is wider.

The above-mentioned rotating bodies 861 to 863 will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 98, three rotating bodies 861 to 863 are provided in the right first flow path. The operation of these three rotating bodies 861 to 863 will be described using the rotating body 861 as an example. As shown in FIG. 98, the rotating body 861 is configured in a roughly crescent shape with a part of a circle hollowed out, and is configured to be able to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front with the rotating shaft 861b as the rotation axis. In addition, the rotating body 861 is provided with a ball stopper 861a that can catch only one game ball that has flowed down. When the ball stopper 861a is facing the upstream direction of the right first flow path, the game ball that has reached the rotating body 861 is caught by the ball stopper 861a. The ball stopper 861a rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating body 861, so the game ball caught by the ball stopper 861a also rotates with the rotating shaft 861b as the rotation axis. Then, when the ball stopper 861a faces the downstream side of the right first flow path, gravity acts on the game ball, causing it to fall downstream of the right first flow path.

On the other hand, if the game ball reaches the rotating body 861 while the ball stopper 861a is not facing the upstream direction in the right first flow path, the game ball comes into contact with the upstream side of the outer periphery of the rotating body 861. The game ball continues to come into contact with this outer periphery until the rotating body 861 rotates so that the ball stopper 861a faces the upstream direction of the right first flow path. When the ball stopper 861a faces the upstream direction of the right first flow path, the game ball flows down to the ball stopper 861a, and thereafter, as described above, it rotates around the rotation axis 861b in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating body 861, and then falls to the downstream side of the right first flow path.

In this way, by providing the rotating bodies 861-863 for the right first flow path, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down each time it reaches each rotating body. The game ball can be made to perform multiple operations, such as stopping the game ball when it reaches each rotating body, receiving the game ball in the ball stopper, and rotating around the rotation axis in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating body. Therefore, compared to when the rotating bodies 861-863 are not provided, it is possible to lengthen the period required for a game ball that has reached the right first flow path to completely flow down the right first flow path. Therefore, compared to a game ball launched by a left hit, it is possible to lengthen the period required for a game ball launched toward the right first flow path to reach the lower area of the game board 13.

In this way, in the third modified example of the seventh embodiment, instead of the detouring device 700, multiple rotating bodies 861-863, which require a relatively small installation area, are arranged in the right first flow path. The rotating bodies 861-863 reduce the flow speed of the game ball (hinder the flow), so that the time it takes for a game ball launched toward the right first flow path to reach the lower area of the game board 13 is longer than the time it takes for a game ball launched by a left hit to reach the lower area. This makes it possible to reduce the area occupied by the right first flow path while realizing the same playability as in the seventh embodiment described above, thereby further improving the freedom of the board configuration.

In the third modified example of the seventh embodiment, three rotors are provided for the right first flow path, but the number and arrangement of the rotors are not limited to the third modified example and can be determined arbitrarily.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

In the fifth to seventh embodiments and their modified examples, the flow path having the detouring device 700 is arranged on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, but the panel configuration can be changed as desired. For example, the detouring device 700 may be arranged on the left side of the variable display unit 890.

In the fifth to seventh embodiments and their modified examples, the guide channels 740 to 790 of the detour role 700 are configured to protrude forward from the base plate 60 of the game board 13, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the detour role 700 may be configured to be provided on the back side of the base plate 60. That is, the detour role 700 is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60, and the front side of the detour role 700 of the base plate 60 is configured with at least a transparent material, so that the flow state of the game balls can be visually observed. And, the base plate 60 may be configured to have openings that penetrate the base plate 60 and are large enough for the game balls to pass through, on the upstream side of the detour role 700 (the position where the game balls that have advanced to the back side of the base plate 60 can flow into the opening 710) and the downstream side (the position where the game balls that have flowed out from the opening 720 can flow out to the front side of the base plate 60). By configuring it in this way, nails, windmills, etc. can be placed on the base plate 60 in front of the detouring device 700. In other words, the surface of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the possibility of executing the continuous preview performance is determined based on the result of predicting whether or not the performance will be successful and the fluctuation pattern (variation type), but this is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to these, the configuration may be such that the judgment of whether or not the continuous preview performance will be executed is executed based on the type of jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the type of jackpot in the event of a jackpot based on whether or not the continuous preview performance will be executed and the type of preview performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the continuous preview performance.

In each of the above embodiments, the higher the expected result of the lottery, the easier it is to execute the continuous notice performance, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the lower the expected result of the lottery, the easier it is to execute the continuous notice performance. By configuring in this way, a novel gameplay that allows the player to play in the hope that the continuous notice performance will not be executed can be realized. In addition, in each of the above embodiments, when the execution of the continuous notice performance is decided, the variable display accompanied by the notice performance is executed continuously across multiple variable displays, but it is not necessary to execute the notice performance across multiple consecutive variable displays. For example, at the start of each variable display in which the continuous notice performance is set, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to set the notice performance. In this case, the higher the expected value of the winning information that triggered the setting of the continuous notice performance, the higher the lottery probability of setting the notice performance in each variable display. By configuring in this way, the more consecutive notice performances are, the higher the expectation of the big win can be, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, when the advance lottery prohibition state is released, the one or more data stored in the winning information storage area 223a are not judged one by one, but the possibility of executing the continuous advance lottery performance is determined based on the data indicating the content of the reserved lottery result, such as the logical sum data (first embodiment), points (second embodiment), and the value of the high expectation type flag 223n (third embodiment), but this is not limited to this. It may be configured to judge one by one of the one or more data stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Also, in each of the above embodiments, only when the advance lottery prohibition state is released, the possibility of executing the continuous advance lottery performance is determined based on the data indicating the content of the reserved lottery result, such as the logical sum data (first embodiment), points (second embodiment), and the value of the high expectation type flag 223n (third embodiment), but this is not limited to this, and the judgment of the possibility of executing the continuous advance lottery performance executed during normal times may also be made based on the data indicating the content of the reserved lottery result. Conversely, in a state other than the advance notice lottery prohibition state (normal state), the decision as to whether or not to execute the consecutive advance notice performance may always be made based only on the lottery results notified by the winning information command (random number range command).

In each of the above embodiments, the prediction lottery prohibition state is set when the execution of the continuous prediction performance is decided, but the timing of setting the prediction lottery prohibition state is not limited to this and may be set arbitrarily. Specifically, for example, the prediction lottery prohibition state may be set only when the execution of the continuous prediction performance that will ultimately result in a jackpot is decided. In other words, the continuous prediction performance may be configured to be overwritten during the execution of the continuous prediction performance that will result in a miss. By configuring in this way, the frequency of execution of the continuous prediction performance can be increased, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, for example, the prediction lottery prohibition state may be set based on the start of a jackpot, or the prediction lottery prohibition state may be set based on the start of a special pattern's probability variable state or a normal pattern's time-saving state. In addition, for example, a configuration may be used in which it is determined whether or not to set the prediction lottery prohibition state by lottery each time the fluctuation start timing is reached, or, for example, a configuration may be used in which an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and the prediction lottery prohibition state is set and released depending on the operation content of the operation means. Similarly, the timing at which the advance lottery prohibition state is released is not limited to the timing at which one normal variable display ends after the continuous advance performance ends, and may be set arbitrarily. For example, the advance lottery prohibition state may not be released until five variable displays end after the continuous advance performance ends, or conversely, the advance lottery prohibition state may be released at the time the continuous advance performance ends. Alternatively, the advance lottery prohibition state may be released at a predetermined timing during the execution of the continuous advance performance, or may be released regardless of the continuous advance performance. For example, the advance lottery prohibition state may be released based on the end of a jackpot, a probability variable state, a time-saving state, or the like, or while the advance lottery prohibition state is set, it may be determined whether or not to release the advance lottery by lottery each time a variable display is executed. It may also be configured to be releasable based on the player's operation. Furthermore, the advance lottery prohibition state may not be provided.

In each of the above embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance based on the start winning command (random number range command) output from the main control device 110, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the main control device 110 may determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance and notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the determination result. In this case, information indicating whether or not the continuous preview performance is a set variation pattern may be included in the variation pattern command and sent, or may be sent by a separate command. Also, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to only output the decision to execute the continuous preview performance, and the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to keep track of the period during which the continuous preview performance will continue.

In the above embodiments, the advance lottery prohibition state is set only from the time when the execution of the continuous advance performance is decided until the end of one variable display after the end of the continuous advance performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, the advance lottery prohibition state may be set even when a jackpot is reached. Then, the advance lottery prohibition state may be released at the end of the jackpot, and the possibility of executing the continuous advance performance may be determined based on data indicating the lottery results (variation type) of each reserved ball reserved at that time (logical sum data (first embodiment), points (second embodiment), or the value of the high expectation type flag 223n (third embodiment)). Here, since the player shoots the ball aiming at the specific winning hole 65a during the jackpot, there is a high possibility that multiple balls will enter the first ball entrance 64 (see FIG. 2) provided vertically above the specific winning hole 65a during the jackpot. In other words, there is a high possibility that the number of reserved balls will increase by multiple from the start to the end of the jackpot. In this situation, if the configuration is such that the possibility of executing the continuous preview performance is determined each time a start winning is detected in the first ball entrance 64 that occurs during a jackpot, the continuous preview performance is determined based on the start winning corresponding to the variable type with a low expectation, and after the preview lottery prohibition state is set, a start winning corresponding to the variable type with a high expectation may occur. In other words, even if a reserved ball corresponding to a variable type with a high expectation is present in the reserve, there is a risk that it will not be possible to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the variable display based on the variable type with a high expectation. In contrast, if the preview lottery prohibition state is set during a jackpot, the preview lottery prohibition state is released at the end of the jackpot, and the possibility of executing the continuous preview performance is determined based on the lottery results of each reserved ball that is reserved at that time, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the reserved ball of the variable type with the highest expectation among the reserved balls that are reserved at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, the continuous preview performance can be set more preferably.

In the above embodiments, when the advance lottery prohibition state is released, the judgment of whether or not the continuous advance lottery performance can be performed is performed according to the variation type of the multiple reserved balls. However, the present invention is not limited to the judgment of whether or not the continuous advance lottery performance can be performed. For example, the technology of each of the above embodiments may be applied to a gaming machine configured to be able to change the state of the reserved pattern to a different state from the normal state (a gaming machine equipped with a so-called reserved advance lottery performance). That is, the prohibited state in which the state of the reserved pattern cannot be changed is set based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, when the execution of the reserved advance lottery performance is decided or when a jackpot is started), and when the prohibited state is released, the variation type of the multiple reserved balls reserved at the time of the release is determined, and the possibility of the reserved advance lottery and the state of the reserved pattern when the reserved advance lottery is performed are determined with the lottery probability according to the variation type with the highest expectation. In addition, the technology of each of the above embodiments is not limited to the case of judging the variation type of the reserved ball in order to execute the continuous advance lottery performance, the reserved advance lottery performance, etc. The technology of each of the above embodiments may be applied when some judgment is executed for multiple reserved balls.

In each of the above embodiments, when the advance lottery prohibition state is released, the determination of whether or not the continuous advance performance can be executed is performed according to the change type of the multiple reserved balls, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the advance lottery prohibition state may not be set, and each time a start winning is detected, a determination of whether or not the continuous advance performance can be executed is performed according to the change type of each reserved ball that is reserved at that time (if the continuous advance performance is being executed, a determination of whether or not the continuous advance performance can be extended). By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to change the control depending on whether or not the advance lottery prohibition state is in effect, and the contents of the control program can be simplified. This reduces the development burden on the developer.

The above-mentioned embodiments may be configured by combining all or part of them. More specifically, for example, the main control unit 110 may notify the voice lamp control unit 113 of the range of values to which the various counter values (random number values) in the second embodiment belong, and the voice lamp control unit 113 may perform a series of controls to perform a read-ahead process based on the range of values to which the various counter values (random number values) belong, which may be applied to the first and third embodiments.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Feature A group> (When the pre-reading prohibition state is released, all reserved calls are pre-read)
In a gaming machine having a main control means for executing main control regarding a game, and a slave control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means comprises: a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination by the discrimination means resulting in a first discrimination result; a first output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicative of the discrimination result by the discrimination means to the slave control means; a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used in the discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; and a second output means for outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is established, and the slave control means outputs the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means. a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to a determination result indicated by the received determination result signal based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means; information storage means for storing, based on the reception of the determination information signal by the signal receiving means, information according to the received determination information signal, up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, at least until the corresponding determination result signal is received by the signal receiving means; specific determination means for executing a specific determination based on information according to the plurality of determination information signals stored in the information storage means when a specific condition is met; and second effect execution means for executing a second effect for one or more execution periods of the first effects executed after the determination made by the specific determination means, based on the determination made by the specific determination means resulting in a second determination result.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a variable number of symbols, and when the symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded an advantageous jackpot. In addition to the symbols, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are implemented to increase the excitement of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines can perform the same type of effect (performing a so-called continuous preview effect) over the execution period of multiple variable displays, thereby maintaining a sustained sense of anticipation in the player over multiple consecutive variable displays.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, there were cases where the execution judgment for the consecutive preview performance was won again while one consecutive preview performance was being executed, resulting in the execution of the consecutive preview performance twice. In such cases, there was a problem in that it was difficult for the player to understand which variable display in the consecutive preview performance they should have high hopes for.

In contrast, in the gaming machine A1, the main control means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player by the bonus game execution means based on the first determination result of the determination by the determination means, which is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A determination result signal indicating the determination result by the determination means is output to the slave control means by the first output means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the determination information used for the determination by the determination means is acquired by the determination information acquisition means, and a determination information signal based on the acquired determination information is output to the slave control means by the second output means before the determination condition is established. In addition, in the slave control means, the determination result signal output by the first output means and the determination information signal output by the second output means are received by the signal receiving means. Based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means, the first performance corresponding to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal is executed by the first performance execution means. Based on the reception of a discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is stored by the information storage means, with a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit, until at least the corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means. Triggered by the establishment of a specific condition, a specific discrimination is performed by the specific discrimination means based on information corresponding to the multiple discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means, and based on the discrimination by the specific discrimination means resulting in a second discrimination result, a second performance is performed by the second performance execution means over the execution period of one or more first performances executed after the discrimination.

This allows the second performance to be executed over the execution period of one or more first performances, thereby diversifying the performances. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine A2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A1, a reception time discrimination means is provided which, when the discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means, discriminates whether to execute the second performance based on information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 has the effect that, when a discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means, the reception time discrimination means discriminates whether to execute the second performance based on information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal, thereby increasing the opportunities for the second performance to be executed, thereby making it possible to further diversify the performances.

In the gaming machine A2, the second performance execution means executes the second performance over a period of execution of a plurality of the first performances including at least the first performance corresponding to the discrimination information signal that triggered the discrimination when the reception time discrimination means determines that the second performance is to be executed. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 has the effect of diversifying the presentations, because when the reception time discrimination means discriminates that the second presentation is to be executed, the second presentation execution means executes the second presentation over a period of execution of a plurality of first presentations that includes at least the first presentation corresponding to the discrimination information signal that triggered the discrimination.

A gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it is provided with a restriction state setting means for setting a restriction state in which the discrimination by the reception time discrimination means is restricted based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition in the gaming machine A2 or A3, and a release means for releasing the discrimination restriction state based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition when the discrimination restriction state is set by the restriction state setting means, and the specific condition is established based on the establishment of the predetermined release condition.

Gaming machine A4 has the following effects in addition to the effects of gaming machines A2 and A3. That is, a discrimination limiting state in which discrimination by the reception time discrimination means is limited is set by the limiting state setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. When the discrimination limiting state is set by the limiting state setting means, the discrimination limiting state is released by the release means based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition. When the predetermined release condition is established, a specific condition is established.

As a result, when the discrimination restriction state is released, discrimination can be performed by the specific discrimination means based on information corresponding to multiple discrimination result signals already stored in the information storage means, resulting in the effect that the discrimination of whether or not the second performance can be executed can be performed based on information corresponding to a larger number of discrimination result signals.

Gaming machine A5 is characterized in that in gaming machine A4, the restriction state setting means sets the discrimination restriction state based on the fact that the reception time discrimination means has determined that the second performance will be executed.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine A4, gaming machine A5 has the effect of preventing the reception time discrimination means from discriminating that the second performance is to be executed by overlapping discrimination states set by the discrimination state setting means based on the discrimination means at the time of reception determining that the second performance is to be executed while the second performance is being executed.

Gaming machine A6 is characterized in that in gaming machine A5, the predetermined release condition is met based on at least one of the first effects being executed after the second effect has ended.

According to gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine A5, a predetermined release condition is met based on the execution of at least one first performance after the second performance has ended, so that if at least one first performance is being executed during the execution of the second performance and after the second performance has ended, it is possible to restrict the determination of whether to execute the second performance. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a first performance without a second performance at least once between the end of the second performance and the start of the next second performance, it is possible to allow the player to easily understand which first performance the second performance has continued to. This has the effect of realizing a performance that is easier to understand.

A gaming machine A7, which is any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, is characterized in that the specific discrimination means is such that the rate of the second discrimination result is higher when the information corresponding to the discrimination information signal stored in the information storage means contains information corresponding to the first discrimination result than when the information corresponding to the first discrimination result is not contained.

In addition to the effect of any of gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machine A7 has the effect that when the information corresponding to the discrimination information signal stored in the information storage means contains information corresponding to the first discrimination result, the discrimination by the specific discrimination means is performed so that the rate of the second discrimination result is higher than when the information corresponding to the first discrimination result is not contained, so that when the second presentation is executed, the player can play in the hope of executing a bonus game.

<Feature B group> (determine the type of fluctuation being held from the logical sum data of each holding area)
In a gaming machine having a main control means for executing main control regarding games, and a slave control means for controlling based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means comprises: a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination by the discrimination means resulting in a first discrimination result; a first output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means to the slave control means; a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used in the discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; and a second output means for outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is established, and the slave control means comprises: a signal receiving means configured to be capable of receiving at least the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to a determination result indicated by the received determination result signal based on the reception of the determination information signal by the signal receiving means; an information storage means for storing, based on the reception of the determination information signal by the signal receiving means, information according to the received determination information signal, up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, at least until the corresponding determination result signal is received by the signal receiving means; a calculation data calculation means for calculating predetermined calculation data by performing a predetermined calculation on information according to the plurality of the determination information signals stored in the information storage means when a specific condition is satisfied; a second effect execution determination means for determining whether to execute a second effect based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means; and a second effect execution means for executing the second effect over one or more execution periods of the first effects executed after the determination made by the second effect execution determination means.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a changing pattern, and when the patterns are displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded an advantageous jackpot. In addition to the patterns, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are implemented to increase the excitement of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

In addition, some conventional gaming machines perform the same type of presentation over the execution period of multiple variable displays (performing so-called continuous preview presentations), thereby creating a sustained sense of anticipation in the player over multiple consecutive variable displays.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, during the execution of one consecutive preview performance, the player may win the execution judgment of the consecutive preview performance again, and the consecutive preview performance may be executed twice. In this case, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand which variable display in the consecutive preview performance he should be excited about. In order to solve this problem, a method is considered in which, when one consecutive preview performance is decided, the judgment of whether or not the consecutive preview performance can be executed is limited until the consecutive preview performance ends. In this case, since the consecutive preview performance cannot be executed for the reserved ball based on the start winning detected during the execution of the consecutive preview performance, a relatively long period may be left between the end of one consecutive preview performance and the execution of the next consecutive preview performance. Furthermore, a method is also considered in which a judgment is made as to whether or not to execute the consecutive preview performance after the end of the consecutive preview performance based on the lottery results of all reserved balls reserved during the consecutive preview performance. However, since it is necessary to judge the lottery results of all reserved balls, there is a problem that the processing load increases compared to the judgment of whether or not the normal consecutive preview performance can be executed.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine B1, in the main control means, based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. A discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is output by the first output means to the slave control means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and a discrimination information signal based on the acquired discrimination information is output by the second output means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is established. In addition, in the slave control means, the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means are received by the signal receiving means. Based on the reception of the discrimination result signal by the signal receiving means, the first performance corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal is executed by the first performance execution means. Based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is stored by the information storage means until at least the corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means, with a predetermined number of pieces of information being the upper limit. When a specific condition is satisfied, the calculation data calculation means performs a predetermined calculation on information corresponding to the multiple discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means to calculate the predetermined calculation data. Based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, the second performance execution discrimination means discriminates whether to execute the second performance. Based on the discrimination by the second performance execution discrimination means that the second performance is to be executed, the second performance execution means executes the second performance over the execution period of one or more first performances executed after the discrimination.

This allows the determination of whether to execute the second performance to be made based on predetermined calculation data obtained as a result of performing a predetermined calculation on information corresponding to multiple discrimination information signals, which has the effect of reducing the processing load on the slave control means compared to a case in which all information stored in the information storage means is judged one by one and a determination of whether to execute the second performance is made based on each discrimination result.

In the gaming machine B1, an information discrimination means is provided for discriminating whether information corresponding to a predetermined specific discrimination information is included in the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals that are the subject of the predetermined calculation based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, and the second performance execution discrimination means is configured to determine whether to execute the second performance based on the predetermined calculation data when it is determined by the information discrimination means that information corresponding to the specific discrimination information is included.

Gaming machine B2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine B1. That is, based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, the information discrimination means discriminates whether information corresponding to a predetermined specific discrimination information is included in the information corresponding to the multiple discrimination information signals that were the subject of the predetermined calculation. If the information discrimination means discriminates that information corresponding to the specific discrimination information is included, the second performance execution discrimination means discriminates whether to execute the second performance based on the predetermined calculation data.

This limits the opportunities for the second performance execution discrimination means to make a discrimination when information corresponding to the specific discrimination information is included, thereby reducing the frequency of discrimination processing. This has the effect of reducing the processing load on the slave control means.

In the gaming machine B2, the predetermined types of specific discrimination information include at least a first discrimination information corresponding to the first discrimination result and a second discrimination information corresponding to a discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, and the second performance execution discrimination means determines that the second performance is to be executed at a higher rate when the information discrimination means determines that the first discrimination information is included than when the information discrimination means determines that the second discrimination information is included. In the gaming machine B3,

Gaming machine B3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine B2. That is, at least first discrimination information corresponding to a first discrimination result and second discrimination information corresponding to a discrimination result different from the first discrimination result are provided as types of predetermined specific discrimination information. The second performance execution discrimination means determines that the second performance will be executed at a higher rate when it is determined that the first discrimination information is included than when it is determined that the second discrimination information is included by the information discrimination means.

This has the effect of making the player expect that when the second presentation is executed, the first determination result will be obtained and a bonus game will be executed.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the main control means includes a pre-specifying means for specifying the result of the determination by the determination means before the determination condition is established based on the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means, and a discrimination information signal generating means for generating the discrimination information signal by including at least information corresponding to the determination result specified by the pre-specifying means, the information storage means includes a memory area composed of a plurality of bits corresponding to each of a plurality of determination results that can be specified by the pre-specifying means, for at least the predetermined number of pieces of information, the slave control means includes a bit setting means for setting a bit corresponding to the determination result indicated by the discrimination information signal to a specific state in one memory area provided in the information storage means based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, the calculation data calculation means calculates the logical sum of information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means as the predetermined calculation data, and the information determination means determines that information corresponding to the specific discrimination information is included when a specific bit of the logical sum is in the specific state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B2 and B3, gaming machine B4 achieves the following effects. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination result by the discrimination means is identified by the advance identification means before the discrimination condition is established, based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. A discrimination information signal including at least information corresponding to the discrimination result identified by the advance identification means is generated by the discrimination information signal generation means. A memory area consisting of a plurality of bits corresponding to each of a plurality of discrimination results that can be identified by the advance identification means is provided in the information storage means for at least a predetermined number of pieces of information. In the slave control means, based on the discrimination information signal being received by the signal receiving means, a bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal is set to a specific state by the bit setting means in one memory area provided in the information storage means. As a predetermined calculation, the logical sum of information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means is calculated as the predetermined calculation data by the calculation data calculation means. When a specific bit of the logical sum is in a specific state, the information discrimination means determines that information corresponding to the specific discrimination information is included.

This has the effect of reducing the processing load on the slave control means, since by simply determining the state of a specific bit in the logical sum, it is possible to obtain results equivalent to those obtained by determining all of the information used in the logical sum calculation.

Gaming machine B5 is characterized in that in gaming machine B4, the bit setting means sets the bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal to an ON state and sets the other bits to an OFF state.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine B4, gaming machine B5 has the effect that the bit corresponding to the determination result indicated by the determination information signal is set to an ON state by the bit setting means, while the other bits are set to an OFF state, so that the determination by the second performance execution determination means can be accurately executed.

Gaming machine B6, in which the specific discrimination information type is set to a plurality of types with different priorities to be discriminated by the second performance execution discrimination means, the information discrimination means discriminates the bit corresponding to the discrimination result with the highest priority among the bits in the specific state, and the second performance execution discrimination means discriminates whether to execute the second performance at a discrimination ratio corresponding to the bit discriminated by the discrimination means.

Gaming machine B6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines B4 and B5. That is, a plurality of types with different priorities to be discriminated by the second performance execution discrimination means are set as types of specific discrimination results. Among the bits that are in a specific state, the bit corresponding to the discrimination result with the highest priority is discriminated by the information discrimination means. The second performance execution discrimination means discriminates whether to execute the second performance using the discrimination ratio corresponding to the bit discriminated by the discrimination means.

This makes it possible to vary the rate at which it is determined that the second performance will be executed depending on the result of the determination made by the determination means identified by the advance determination means, thereby enabling the player to infer the result of the determination made by the second performance determination means from whether or not the second performance will be executed.

In gaming machine B6, the information discrimination means discriminates whether the specific bit is in the specific state in descending order of priority, starting with the bit corresponding to the discrimination result with the highest priority, when discriminating the specific bit, and the slave control means includes discrimination termination means for discontinuing the discrimination by the information discrimination means based on the discrimination by the information discrimination means that the specific state is in the gaming machine B7.

Gaming machine B7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B6. That is, when a specific bit is determined by the information determination means, whether or not a specific state is reached is determined in descending order of priority, starting with the bit corresponding to the determination result with the highest priority. In the slave control means, the determination by the information determination means is terminated by the determination termination means, based on the determination by the information determination means that a specific state is reached.

This has the effect of reducing the processing load on the slave control means, since the discrimination process can be terminated without discriminating all bits that make up a particular bit.

<Feature C Group> (specific information indicating the reserved contents is updated by the sub, and whether or not to execute the consecutive notice is determined based on the specific information)
In a gaming machine including a master control means for executing main control related to a game, and a slave control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the master control means, the master control means includes a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on a first discrimination result being obtained in the discrimination by the discrimination means, a first output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means to the slave control means, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used in the discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and a second output means for outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is established, and the slave control means is capable of receiving at least the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means. a first performance execution means for executing a first performance according to a determination result indicated by the determination result signal based on receipt of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means; a specific information storage means for storing specific information; a determination result specifying means for specifying a determination result made by the determination means corresponding to the received determination information signal based on receipt of the determination information signal by the signal receiving means; an information updating means for updating the specific information based on the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means; a second performance execution determination means for determining whether to execute a second performance based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means; and a second performance execution means for executing the second performance over one or more execution periods of the first performance executed after the determination made by the second performance execution determination means.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a changing pattern, and when the patterns are displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded an advantageous jackpot. In addition to the patterns, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are implemented to increase the excitement of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines can perform the same type of effect (performing a so-called continuous preview effect) over the execution period of multiple variable displays, thereby maintaining a sustained sense of anticipation in the player over multiple consecutive variable displays.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, there were cases where the judgment to execute the consecutive preview performance was won again while one consecutive preview performance was being executed, resulting in the execution of the consecutive preview performance twice. In such cases, there was a problem in that it was difficult for the player to know which variable display in the consecutive preview performance they should have high hopes for.

In contrast, according to gaming machine C1, in the master control means, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the first judgment result obtained by the judgment means. A judgment result signal indicating the judgment result by the judgment means is output by the first output means to the slave control means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, judgment information used for judgment by the judgment means is acquired by the judgment information acquisition means, and a judgment information signal based on the acquired judgment information is output by the second output means to the slave control means before the judgment condition is established. Also, in the slave control means, the judgment result signal output by the first output means and the judgment information signal output by the second output means are received by the signal receiving means. Based on the reception of the judgment result signal by the signal receiving means, a first performance corresponding to the judgment result indicated by the judgment result signal is executed by the first performance execution means. Based on the reception of a discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, the discrimination result by the discrimination means corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is identified by the discrimination result identifying means, and the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is updated by the information updating means based on the discrimination result identified by the discrimination result identifying means. Based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, the second performance execution determining means determines whether to execute the second performance, and based on the determination by the second performance execution determining means that the second performance will be executed, the second performance execution means executes the second performance over the execution period of one or more first performances executed after the determination.

This allows the second performance to be executed over the execution period of one or more first performances, thereby diversifying the performances. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine C2 is characterized in that it is provided with a reception discrimination means for discriminating whether to execute the second performance based on the discrimination result determined by the discrimination result determination means in the gaming machine C1, and a switching means for switching between having the second performance execution discrimination means or the reception discrimination means determine whether to execute the second performance.

Gaming machine C2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C1. That is, when the discrimination result is identified by the discrimination result identification means, the reception discrimination means determines whether to execute the second performance based on the identified discrimination result. The switching means switches between having the second performance execution means or the reception discrimination means determine whether to execute the second performance.

This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in determining whether to execute the second performance.

A gaming machine C3 is provided with a restriction state setting means for setting a restriction state in which the discrimination by the reception discrimination means is restricted based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and a release means for releasing the discrimination restriction state based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition when the discrimination restriction state is set by the restriction state setting means, and the switching means switches the determination of whether to execute the second performance to be performed by the second performance execution discrimination means based on the establishment of the predetermined release condition.

Gaming machine C3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine C2. That is, a discrimination limiting state in which discrimination by the reception discrimination means is limited is set by the limiting state setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and when the discrimination limiting state is set by the limiting state setting means, the discrimination limiting state is released by the releasing means based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition. Based on the establishment of the predetermined release condition, the switching means switches so that the second performance execution discrimination means determines whether to execute the second performance.

As a result, when the discrimination restriction state is released, the second performance execution discrimination means can determine whether to execute the second performance based on the specific information updated during the discrimination restriction state, which has the effect of allowing the second performance execution discrimination means to make a discrimination taking into account the discrimination result corresponding to the discrimination information signal received during the discrimination restriction state.

In gaming machine C3, the switching means switches so that the determination of whether to execute the second performance is made by the reception determination means based on the determination of whether to execute the second performance made by the second performance execution determination means. Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that it is.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine C3, gaming machine C4 has the effect of being able to suitably determine whether to execute the second performance, since the switching means switches the determination of whether to execute the second performance to be performed by the reception determination means based on the determination of whether to execute the second performance made by the second performance execution determination means.

Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that it is provided with an update avoidance means for preventing the specific information from being updated by the information update means from updating the specific information during the period from when the discrimination limit state is released by the release means to when the discrimination limit state is next set by the limit state setting means, in gaming machine C3 or C4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C3 or C4, gaming machine C4 has the advantage that the update avoidance means prevents the information update means from updating the specific information during the period from when the discrimination limit state is released by the release means to when the discrimination limit state is next set by the limit state setting means, thereby preventing the specific information from being updated unnecessarily during the period when it is difficult for the second performance execution means to perform discrimination using the specific information. This has the effect of reducing the processing load on the slave control means.

Gaming machine C6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines C1 to C5, the slave control means includes a stipulated information storage means that stores stipulated information that is specified by associating numerical data with each of the discrimination results that can be identified by the discrimination result identification means, and the information update means updates the specific information by performing a predetermined calculation using the numerical data that is specified in the stipulated information in association with the discrimination result identified by the discrimination result identification means.

Gaming machine C6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines C1 to C5. That is, in the slave control means, for each discrimination result that can be identified by the discrimination result identification means, stipulated information that is defined by associating numerical data with the discrimination result is stored in the stipulated information storage means. A predetermined calculation is performed by the information update means using the numerical data that is defined by associating the discrimination result identified by the discrimination result identification means to update the specific information.

This has the advantage that the processing load when updating specific information can be reduced, since the specific information can be updated through the simple process of reading out the numerical data defined for each discrimination result and performing a specified calculation.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the specific information storage means stores information indicating one discrimination result identified by the discrimination result identification means as the specific information, the slave control means includes a priority determination means for determining whether the priority corresponding to the discrimination result newly identified by the discrimination result identification means is higher than the priority corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the specific information already stored in the specific information storage means based on a priority predetermined for each discrimination result that can be identified by the discrimination result identification means, and the information update means updates the specific information to information indicating the newly identified discrimination result when it is determined by the priority determination means that the priority corresponding to the newly identified discrimination result is higher. C7 is characterized in that.

Gaming machine C7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines C1 to C5. That is, information indicating one discrimination result identified by the discrimination result identification means is stored in the specific information storage means as specific information. In the slave control means, based on a priority predetermined for each discrimination result that can be identified by the discrimination result identification means, the priority discrimination means determines whether the priority corresponding to the discrimination result newly identified by the discrimination result identification means is higher than the priority corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the specific information already stored in the specific information storage means. When it is determined by the priority discrimination means that the priority corresponding to the newly identified discrimination result is higher, the information update means updates the specific information to information indicating the newly identified discrimination result.

As a result, even if the discrimination information signal is output multiple times, the specific information storage means can store only information indicating the discrimination result with the highest priority among the multiple discrimination results notified by the multiple discrimination information signals, so that it is possible to determine whether to execute the second performance based on the discrimination information with the highest priority.

In gaming machine C7, the slave control means includes a number of times specifying means for specifying the number of times the first performance is executed until the determination by the determination means that results in the newly specified determination result is executed based on the specific information being updated by the information update means, and a number of times of performance information storage means for storing number of times of performance information corresponding to the number of times of the first performance specified by the number of times specifying means, and the second performance execution means executes the second performance over the execution period of the first performance the number of times indicated by the number of times of performance information stored in the number of times of performance information storage means. Gaming machine C8.

Gaming machine C8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine C7. That is, in the slave control means, based on the specific information being updated by the information update means, the number of times identifying means identifies the number of times the first performance is executed until the discrimination means executes a discrimination that results in a newly identified discrimination result. The number of times information corresponding to the number of times the first performance is executed identified by the number of times identifying means is stored by the number of times information storage means. The second performance execution means executes the second performance over the period of execution of the first performance the number of times indicated by the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means.

As a result, when the second performance execution determination means determines that the second performance is to be executed, the second performance can be executed by a simple control of setting the execution period of the first performance for the number of times indicated by the performance count information stored in the performance count information storage means as the execution period of the second performance, thereby reducing the processing load when the second performance is executed.

In gaming machine C8, the slave control means includes a performance count information update means for updating the performance count information stored in the performance count information storage means to the performance count information corresponding to one less number of times based on the reception of the discrimination result signal by the signal receiving means. Gaming machine C9.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine C8, gaming machine C9 has the effect that, in the slave control means, the performance count information stored in the performance count information storage means is updated by the performance count information update means to the performance count information corresponding to one less number of times based on the reception of the discrimination result signal by the signal receiving means, so that the second performance can be more reliably continued until the execution period of the first performance corresponding to the discrimination information with the highest priority.

<Feature D group> (The range of random numbers obtained at the time of the initial winning is sent to the sub as winning information)
In a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for executing main control regarding a game, and a slave control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means includes a judgment value generating means capable of updating and generating a judgment value within a predetermined range, a judgment value acquiring means for acquiring the judgment value generated by the judgment value generating means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, a determining means for determining whether the judgment value acquired by the judgment value acquiring means matches a predetermined specific value, a control process executing means for executing a process set corresponding to the specific value when it is determined by the determining means that the judgment value matches the specific value, and a control process executing means for executing a process set corresponding to the specific value when the judgment value acquiring means determines that the judgment value matches the specific value. a signal output means for outputting a small range signal indicating the small range identified by the small range identification means to the slave control means, the slave control means comprising: a signal receiving means for receiving the small range signal output by the signal output means; and a discrimination result determining means for, upon receipt of the small range signal by the signal receiving means, determining the discrimination result made by the discrimination means based on the small range indicated by the small range signal.

According to the gaming machine D1, in the main control means, the judgment value generated within a predetermined range by the judgment value generating means is acquired by the judgment value acquiring means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. The judgment value acquired by the judgment value acquiring means is judged by the discrimination means to match a specific value previously determined. When the discrimination means judges that the judgment value matches the specific value, the control process executing means executes a process set corresponding to the specific value. Based on the judgment value acquired by the judgment value acquiring means, the small range identifying means identifies which of a plurality of small ranges obtained by dividing the predetermined range into a plurality of small ranges to which the judgment value acquired this time belongs. A small range signal indicating the small range identified by the small range identifying means is output to the slave control means by the signal outputting means. In addition, in the slave control means, the small range signal output by the signal outputting means is received by the signal receiving means, and the reception of the small range signal by the signal receiving means is triggered by the discrimination result identifying means to identify the discrimination result by the discrimination means based on the small range indicated by the small range signal.

This has the effect of allowing the slave control means to appropriately determine the determination result by the determination means.

In the gaming machine D1, the slave control means includes a stipulated information storage means that stores stipulated information that stipulates the correspondence between the type of the small range that can be notified by the small range signal and the determination result by the determination means, and the determination result specification means specifies the determination result by the determination means based on the type of the small range indicated by the small range signal and the stipulated information stored in the stipulated information storage means. Gaming machine D2.

Gaming machine D2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine D1. That is, stipulated information that stipulates the correspondence between the type of small range that can be notified by the small range signal and the discrimination result by the discrimination means is stored in the stipulated information storage means. The discrimination result by the discrimination means is identified by the discrimination result identification means based on the type of small range indicated by the small range signal and the stipulated information stored in the stipulated information storage means.

This has the advantage that the discrimination result can be easily identified based on the correspondence relationship defined in the definition information.

Gaming machine D3, characterized in that in gaming machine D1 or D2, the specific value has multiple types including at least one or more values set as a first specific value and one or more values set as a second specific value, and the control process execution means executes a first process when the judgment value matches the first specific value, and executes a second process different from the first process when the judgment value matches the second specific value.

Gaming machine D3 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine D1 or D2. That is, the specific value is provided in a plurality of types including at least one or more values set as a first specific value and one or more values set as a second specific value. When the judgment value matches the first specific value, the control process execution means executes a first process, whereas when the judgment value matches the second specific value, the control process execution means executes a second process different from the first process.

This has the effect of allowing a variety of processes to be executed depending on the type of specific value with which the judgment value matches.

Gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D3, the small range in which the specific value is included is composed only of specific values of the same type.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D3, gaming machine D4 has a small range containing a specific value that is composed only of specific values of the same type, which makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of small ranges in which specific values of different types are mixed, or small ranges in which specific values are mixed with values different from the specific values. Therefore, it is possible to have a one-to-one correspondence between the small range and the determination result by the determination means, which has the effect of allowing the determination by the determination result determination means to be performed under conditions closer to the determination by the determination means.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines D1 to D4, the master control means includes a judgment value storage means for storing the judgment value acquired by the judgment value acquisition means at least until a judgment condition for executing judgment by the judgment means is satisfied, and the signal output means is capable of outputting the small range signal to the slave control means before the judgment condition is satisfied.

Gaming machine D5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines D1 to D4. That is, in the master control means, the judgment value acquired by the judgment value acquisition means is stored in the judgment value storage means at least until the judgment condition for executing judgment by the discrimination means is satisfied. Before the judgment condition is satisfied, a small range signal is output by the signal output means to the slave control means.

This has the effect of allowing the slave control means to determine the result of the discrimination made by the discrimination means before the discrimination condition is met.

In the gaming machine D5, the main control means includes a discrimination result signal output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the slave control means includes a first performance execution means for executing a first performance indicating the discrimination result notified by the received discrimination result signal based on the discrimination result signal being received by the signal receiving means, a second performance execution discrimination means for discriminating whether to execute a second performance based on the discrimination result identified by the discrimination result identification means, and a second performance execution means for executing the second performance over a plurality of execution periods of the first performance including at least the first performance indicating the discrimination result that was the subject of the discrimination based on the discrimination that the second performance execution discrimination means has determined to execute the second performance.

Gaming machine D6 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine D5. That is, in the master control means, a discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is output by the discrimination result signal output means. In addition, in the slave control means, based on the discrimination result signal being received by the signal receiving means, a first performance indicating the discrimination result notified by the received discrimination result signal is executed by the first performance execution means. Based on the discrimination result identified by the discrimination result identification means, the second performance execution discrimination means determines whether to execute the second performance. Based on the determination by the second performance execution discrimination means that the second performance is to be executed, the second performance execution means executes the second performance over a period of execution of a plurality of first performances including at least the first performance indicating the discrimination result that was the subject of the discrimination.

This has the effect of diversifying the presentation style.

In the gaming machine D6, the slave control means includes a discrimination limit state setting means for setting a discrimination limit state in which the discrimination by the second performance execution discrimination means is limited based on the second performance execution discrimination means determining that the second performance is to be executed, and a release means for releasing the discrimination limit state based on the execution of at least one first performance after the execution of the second performance is completed.

Gaming machine D7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine D6. That is, in the slave control means, based on the second performance execution determination means determining that the second performance is to be executed, a determination restriction state in which the determination by the second performance execution determination means is restricted is set by the determination restriction state setting means. After the execution of the second performance is completed, based on the execution of at least one first performance, the determination restriction state is released by the release means.

As a result, if at least one first effect is being executed during execution of a second effect or after the second effect has ended, it is possible to prevent a new second effect from being executed, so that at least one first effect that does not involve a second effect can be executed between the end of a second effect and the start of the next second effect. This has the effect of allowing the player to easily understand when the second effect has ended, thereby realizing an effect that is easier to understand.

In the gaming machine D7, the slave control means comprises a discrimination result information storage means capable of storing discrimination result information indicating the discrimination result identified by the discrimination result identification means, with a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit, a release time discrimination means for discriminating whether to execute the second presentation based on the plurality of pieces of discrimination result information stored in the discrimination result information storage means when the discrimination limit state is released by the release means, and a release time execution means for executing the second presentation over one or more execution periods of the first presentation executed after the discrimination based on the discrimination by the release time discrimination means that the second presentation is to be executed. The gaming machine D8 is characterized in that it comprises: a discrimination result information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of information indicating the discrimination result identified by the discrimination result identification means, with a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit, a release time discrimination means for discriminating whether to execute the second presentation based on the discrimination by the release time discrimination means that the second presentation is to be executed.

Gaming machine D8 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine D7. That is, in the slave control means, the discrimination result information indicating the discrimination result identified by the discrimination result identification means is stored in the discrimination result information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit. When the discrimination restriction state is released by the release means, the release time discrimination means determines whether to execute the second performance based on the multiple pieces of discrimination result information stored in the discrimination result information storage means. Based on the determination by the release time discrimination means that the second performance will be executed, the release time execution means executes the second performance over the execution period of one or more first performances executed after the determination.

As a result, when the discrimination restriction state is released, it is possible to set the execution of the second performance without having to wait until a new small range signal is output from the main control means. In addition, it is possible to determine whether to execute the second performance by taking into account the discrimination result identified by the discrimination result identification means based on the small range signal output during the discrimination restriction state. This has the effect of making it possible to more appropriately determine whether to execute the second performance.

<Feature E Group> (The time it takes for a ball hit from the right to reach the attacker is longer than when the ball is hit from the left)
A gaming machine E1 comprising a first flow path through which a gaming ball launched in a first direction can flow down, a second flow path through which a gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can flow down, a ball entry means provided at a position where at least a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path and a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and a bonus granting means that grants a predetermined bonus based on a gaming ball entering the ball entry means, wherein the second flow path is configured so that the period taken for a gaming ball launched in the second direction to reach the ball entry means is longer than the period taken for a gaming ball launched in the first direction to reach the ball entry means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state in which the large prize opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times if the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting prize opening is a winning one. In such conventional gaming machines, a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded each time a gaming ball enters the large prize opening during the winning state, so that the player can enjoy the winning state as part of their gameplay.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, in order to make the gaming ball enter the big prize opening, it is necessary to shoot the gaming ball in a direction that is determined for each gaming machine, which creates the problem that the game becomes monotonous during the winning state.

In contrast, according to gaming machine E1, a gaming ball launched in a first direction flows down a first flow path, and a gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction flows down a second flow path. A ball entry means is provided at a position where at least a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path and a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter. A predetermined bonus is granted by a bonus granting means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means. The second flow path is configured so that the period until a gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until a gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means.

This allows players who want the game ball to reach the ball entry means as quickly as possible to shoot the game ball toward the first flow path, while players who want the game ball to reach the ball entry means over a relatively long period of time can shoot the game ball toward the second flow path. This has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous, as each player can select the shooting direction of their choice to play.

Gaming machine E2 is characterized in that in gaming machine E1, the ball entry means is disposed at a position where the rate at which gaming balls that flow down the second flow path enter the ball is higher than the rate at which gaming balls that flow down the first flow path enter the ball.

In gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine E1, the ball entry means is positioned at a position where the rate at which game balls that flow down the second flow path enter the ball is higher than the rate at which game balls that flow down the first flow path enter the ball, so that when a ball flows down the first flow path, the time it takes to reach the ball entry means is shorter, but it becomes more difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, when a ball flows down the second flow path, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball entry means, but the time it takes to reach the ball entry means is longer. This has the effect of allowing the player to select the launch direction that suits their individual preferences.

Gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of gaming balls flowing down the second flow path in the gaming machine E1 or E2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E1 and E2, gaming machine E3 has the effect that the speed at which the gaming ball flows down the second flow path is slowed down by the deceleration means, so that the period until a gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means can be made longer than the period until a gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means.

Gaming machine E4 is characterized by comprising: a variable means capable of varying the ball entry means between a first position where the ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position, a discrimination means for discriminating based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means varies from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, in any one of gaming machines E1 to E3.

Gaming machine E4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines E1 to E3. That is, the variable means is variable between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position. A determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition. Based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination means, a variable game is executed by the variable game execution means in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times.

This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game in the hope that a specific judgment result will be obtained through the judgment by the judgment means.

A gaming machine E4, comprising: a launching means capable of launching game balls in the first direction and the second direction at a launching interval equal to or greater than a specific launching interval; a first variable control means for varying the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined number of game balls or more having entered the ball entry means since the variable means was varied from the second position to the first position during the execution of the variable game; and a second variable control means for varying the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific period having elapsed since the variable means was varied from the second position to the first position during the execution of the variable game, the specific period being at least longer than the period from the start of launching game balls in the second direction to the end of the specific number of game balls launched in the second direction at the specific launching interval flowing down the second flow path.

Gaming machine E5 has the following effects in addition to those of gaming machine E4. That is, the launching means is configured to be capable of launching gaming balls in the first direction and the second direction at a launching interval equal to or greater than the specific launching interval. During the execution of a variable game, the first variable control means changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific number or more of gaming balls entering the ball entry means after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. During the execution of a variable game, the second variable control means changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific period having elapsed after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. The specific period is configured to be at least longer than the period from the start of launching gaming balls in the second direction to the end of the specific number of gaming balls launched in the second direction at the specific launching interval flowing down the second flow path.

As a result, when game balls are launched in the second direction during variable play, a specific number of game balls can be made to enter the ball entry means before the specific period has elapsed, which has the effect of preventing the player from incurring losses.

In the gaming machine E4, the variable game execution means controls the variable means to be variable in a specific variable pattern including a first variable action, in which the variable means is changed to the first position a predetermined number of times after a first period has elapsed since the variable means was changed to the first position, when a specific condition is met during the execution of the variable game, and the execution period of one or more of the first variable actions in the specific variable pattern is such that a gaming ball launched in the first direction after the specific variable pattern is started can reach a target, and a gaming ball launched in the second direction after the specific variable pattern is started cannot reach a target. Gaming machine E6.

Gaming machine E6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine E4. That is, when a specific condition is met during execution of a variable game, the variable means is controlled by the variable game execution means to be variable in a specific variable pattern including a predetermined number of first variable actions in which the variable means is changed to a first position and then a predetermined first period has elapsed, and then changed to a second position. The execution period of one or more first variable actions in the specific variable pattern is such that a gaming ball launched in a first direction after the specific variable pattern is started can reach the target, and a gaming ball launched in a second direction after the specific variable pattern is started cannot reach the target.

As a result, when the game ball is shot in the second direction, there is less opportunity for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than when the game ball is shot in the first direction, which has the effect of making the player want to shoot in the first direction.

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that it is equipped with a game state setting means for setting a first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed in the case where a game ball does not enter the ball entry means in one of the variable games, and for setting a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state in the case where a game ball enters the ball entry means in one of the variable games.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E6, gaming machine E7 has the following effect: if the gaming ball does not enter the ball entry means in one variable game, the gaming state setting means sets a first gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed; on the other hand, if the gaming ball enters the ball entry means in one variable game, the gaming state setting means sets a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. This has the effect of allowing the player to pay more attention to whether the gaming ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game.

In the gaming machine E6 or E7, the first flow path allows the game ball that has flowed down to reach the ball entry means from a third direction, and the second flow path allows the game ball that has flowed down to reach the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction, the variable means is configured so that the game ball can flow down its upper surface while it is changed to the second position, and is arranged at an incline so that the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side, the ball entry means allows the game ball to enter from above when the variable means is changed to the first position, and is blocked from above by the variable means when the variable means is changed to the second position, and the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by sliding in a direction from the fourth direction side toward the third direction side. Gaming machine E8.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E6 and E7, gaming machine E8 provides the following effects. That is, while a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path reaches the ball entry means from the third direction, a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path reaches the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction. The variable means is configured so that the game ball can flow down its upper surface while it is changed to the second position, and is tilted so that the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side. When the variable means is changed to the first position, the ball entry means is configured so that the game ball can enter from above. Also, when the variable means is changed to the second position, the upper part of the ball entry means is blocked by the variable means. The variable means changes from the second position to the first position by sliding in a direction from the fourth direction side toward the third direction side.

As a result, while the variable means is being changed to the first position, it becomes more difficult for a game ball arriving from the third direction to enter the ball entry means, while it becomes easier for a game ball arriving from the fourth direction to enter the ball. This has the effect of increasing the likelihood that a game ball that reaches the ball entry means will enter the ball entry means when the game ball is launched in the second direction rather than in the first direction during variable play.

<Feature Group F> (When you hit the jackpot, hitting the right hand side will be more advantageous than hitting the left hand side in some ways, but more disadvantageous than hitting the left hand side in other ways.)
a launching means for launching at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction; a discrimination means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on a specific judgment result obtained by the discrimination means; a first element advantage means for making a first element related to the player's degree of advantage in the bonus game more advantageous to the player if the game ball is continuously launched in the first direction than if the game ball is continuously launched in the second direction during a specific period included in the execution period of the bonus game; and a second element advantage means for making a second element different from the first element more advantageous to the player if the game ball is continuously launched in the second direction during the specific period than if the game ball is continuously launched in the first direction.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state in which the large prize opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times if the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting prize opening is a winning one. In such conventional gaming machines, by allowing a gaming ball to enter the large prize opening during a winning state, a predetermined benefit that is advantageous to the player, such as a prize ball, is awarded, so that the winning state can be one of the enjoyments for the player while playing the game.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, in order to make the gaming ball enter the big prize opening, it is necessary to shoot the gaming ball in a direction that is determined for each gaming machine, and since the degree of advantage in the winning state (the amount of a predetermined bonus that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will simply become a task of continuing to shoot the gaming ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem with conventional gaming machines in that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In contrast, according to gaming machine F1, the launching means is configured to be capable of launching game balls at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. The first element regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the bonus game is determined by the first element advantage means to be more advantageous if the game ball is continuously launched in the first direction than if the game ball is continuously launched in the second direction during a specific period included in the execution period of the bonus game. The second element advantage means is determined to be more advantageous if the game ball is continuously launched in the second direction than if the game ball is continuously launched in the first direction during a specific period included in the execution period of the bonus game.

This allows the game ball to be launched in a first direction for a player who wants to gain an advantage in the first element during bonus play, while the game ball can be launched in a second direction for a player who wants to gain an advantage in the second element. This has the effect of providing gameplay that suits the preferences of each player.

A gaming machine F2, comprising: a ball entry means provided at a position where at least a game ball launched in the first direction and a game ball launched in the second direction can enter; a bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus based on a game ball entering the ball entry means; a variable means for changing the ball entry means between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position; and a variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position a predetermined first number of times during the execution of the bonus game.

Gaming machine F2 provides the following effects in addition to the effects of gaming machine F1. That is, a ball entry means is provided at a position where at least a gaming ball launched in a first direction and a gaming ball launched in a second direction can enter the ball entry means. A predetermined bonus is granted by a bonus granting means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means. The variable means is changed between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position. During the execution of the bonus game, the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a predetermined first number of times by the variable control means.

This allows players to focus on whether or not the game ball will enter the ball entry means, which has the effect of further increasing interest during the bonus game.

A gaming machine F3, characterized in that in the gaming machine F2, the first element advantage means increases the rate at which the gaming balls enter the ball entry means when the gaming balls continue to be launched in the first direction during the execution period of the bonus game, compared to when the gaming balls continue to be launched in the second direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F2, gaming machine F3 has the effect that the first element advantage means increases the rate at which game balls enter the ball entry means when game balls are continuously fired in the first direction during the bonus game's execution period compared to when game balls are continuously fired in the second direction, so that players who wish to play a game with a high rate of balls entering the ball entry means during the bonus game can be made to actively fire game balls in the first direction.

Gaming machine F4 is characterized in that in gaming machine F2 or F3, the second element advantage means increases the number of gaming balls that reach the ball entry means during the specified period when gaming balls continue to be launched in the second direction compared to when gaming balls continue to be launched in the first direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F2 and F3, gaming machine F4 has the effect that, since the number of gaming balls that reach the ball entry means during a specific period is increased by the second element advantage means when gaming balls are continuously launched in the second direction rather than the first direction, a player who wishes more gaming balls to reach the ball entry means can be made to actively launch gaming balls in the second direction.

In the gaming machine F4, the variable control means executes a first variable action, in which the variable means is changed to the first position after a first predetermined period has elapsed, the first number of times during the specific period, and the second element advantage means prevents a gaming ball launched in the first direction from the start of the specific period from reaching the ball entry means during the period in which the first variable action is executed a predetermined number of times until the execution period of the first variable action ends, and at least a portion of the execution period of the first variable action a predetermined number of times is a period during which a gaming ball launched in the second direction can reach the ball entry means after the start of the specific period.

Gaming machine F5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine F4. That is, a first variable action in which the variable means is changed to a first position and then a predetermined first period has elapsed, and the first variable action is changed to a second position, is executed a first number of times during a specific period by the variable control means. A gaming ball launched in a first direction after the start of the specific period is prevented from reaching the ball entry means during the period in which the first variable action is executed a predetermined number of times until the end of the execution period of the first variable action a predetermined number of times. At least a portion of the execution period of the first variable action a predetermined number of times is composed of a period during which a gaming ball launched in a second direction after the start of the specific period is reachable.

As a result, by shooting the game ball in the second direction, the game ball can reach the ball entry means during the execution of the first variable action more times than when the game ball is shot in the first direction, which has the effect of providing more opportunities for the ball to enter the ball entry means.

In the gaming machine F5, the second element advantage means suppresses the flow speed of the gaming ball launched in the first direction so that the period until the gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until the gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means. Gaming machine F6.

According to gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F5, the flow speed of the gaming ball launched in the first direction is suppressed by the second element advantage means so that the period until the gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until the gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means, so that the gaming ball launched in the first direction can be more reliably prevented from reaching the ball entry means before the predetermined number of first variable operations are completed. Therefore, there is an effect that launching the gaming ball in the second direction can more reliably increase the opportunity for the ball to enter the ball entry means.

In the gaming machine F5 or F6, the first variable operation is such that the variable means is varied so that the period from when the change from the second position to the first position begins to when the change to the first position ends is a predetermined second period, and the first element advantage means is a gaming machine F7 that makes it easier for a gaming ball launched in the first direction to enter the ball entry means if it reaches the ball entry means during the second period than if the gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period.

Gaming machine F7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine F5 or F6. That is, in the first variable operation, the variable means is variable so that the period from when the variable from the second position to the first position starts to when the variable to the first position ends is a predetermined second period. The first element advantage means makes it easier for a gaming ball launched in the first direction to enter the ball entry means if it reaches the ball entry means during the second period than if the gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period.

As a result, when a game ball is launched in the first direction, there is a possibility that the ball will enter the ball entry means not only during the first period in which the variable means is changed to the first position, but also during the second period in which the variable means is changing from the second position to the first position, so launching the game ball in the first direction can extend the period in which the ball can enter the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that launching the game ball in the first direction can increase the possibility that a game ball that reaches the ball entry means will enter the ball entry means compared to launching the game ball in the second direction.

A gaming machine F7, comprising a first flow path through which a gaming ball launched in the first direction can flow down and which allows the flowing down gaming ball to reach the ball entry means from a third direction, and a second flow path through which a gaming ball launched in the second direction can flow down and which allows the flowing down gaming ball to reach the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction, the variable means is configured so that the game ball can flow down its upper surface while being changed to the second position, and is configured to be inclined so that the third direction side of the upper surface is higher than the fourth direction side, the ball entry means is configured so that the game ball can enter from above when the variable means is changed to the first position, and the upper side is blocked by the variable means when the variable means is changed to the second position, and the first element advantage means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position by sliding the variable means in a direction from the third direction side toward the fourth direction side.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, the following effects are achieved. That is, a gaming ball launched in a first direction reaches the ball entry means from a third direction by the first flow path. A gaming ball launched in a second direction reaches the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction by the second flow path. While the variable means is changed to the second position, a gaming ball can enter the ball entry means on its upper surface. Also, the variable means is configured to be inclined so that the third direction side of the upper surface of the variable means is higher than the fourth direction side. When the variable means is changed to the first position, a gaming ball can enter the ball entry means from above, while when the variable means is changed to the second position, the upper part of the ball entry means is blocked by the variable means. When the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means is slid in a direction from the third direction side toward the fourth direction side by the first element advantage means.

As a result, the inclination of the upper surface of the variable means can act on a game ball that is launched in the second direction and reaches the upper surface of the variable means from the fourth direction side during the second period with gravity acting in a direction returning the ball to the fourth direction side, making it difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, the third direction side above the ball entry means becomes ready for a ball to enter from above earlier than the fourth direction side, making it easier for a game ball that is launched in the first direction and reaches the ball entry means from the third direction side during the second period to enter the ball. Therefore, the ball entry rate can be higher for game balls launched in the first direction when they reach the ball entry means more reliably than for game balls launched in the second direction.

Gaming machine F8 is characterized in that it is equipped with a game state setting means for setting a first game state as the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed when a game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of the bonus game 1, and setting a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the bonus game 1, in any one of gaming machines F2 to F8.

According to gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines F2 to F8, if a gaming ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of one bonus game, a first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is completed. On the other hand, if a gaming ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of one bonus game, a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. Therefore, by the gaming ball entering the ball entry means, the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is completed is set to the advantageous second gaming state, so that there is an effect that the game during the execution of the bonus game can be played by focusing on whether or not the gaming ball enters the ball entry means.

<Feature G group> (A route that is easy to win in the electric chute but difficult to win in the attacker, and a route that is easy to win in the attacker but difficult to win in the electric chute are provided on the right side)
a first flow path through which a gaming ball launched by the launching means with a launch strength within a specific range can flow; a second flow path different from the first flow path; a first ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter the ball and where a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path has difficulty entering the ball; a bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means; a variable means capable of changing the position between a first position where a gaming ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than the first position; a variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition; and a second ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter the ball and where a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path has difficulty entering the ball.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, have multiple ball entry ports on the surface of the machine. More specifically, some have multiple ball entry ports that are controlled differently when a gaming ball enters the machine, such as a start port that triggers a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a winning state, and a big prize port through which the gaming ball can enter when the machine transitions to a winning state. In such conventional gaming machines, the ball entry port to be aimed at varies depending on the gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy varying the launch direction depending on the gaming state.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, it is necessary to continue firing the gaming ball in a firing direction corresponding to the current gaming state until the gaming state is changed, which causes the game to become monotonous, making it difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

Another possible method would be to provide a specific ball entry port with multiple launch directions for the game ball to enter, and have the player aim for that specific ball entry port in at least one game state. However, there is a problem in that multiple flow paths leading to a specific ball entry port reduce the freedom of the board configuration.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine G1, a gaming ball launched by a launching means with a launch strength within a specific range can flow down a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path. A first ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter and where a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path has difficulty entering. A predetermined benefit is granted by a benefit granting means based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where a gaming ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than the first position. Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by a variable control means. The second ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter and where a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path has difficulty entering.

By launching the game ball with a launch strength within a specific range, there is a possibility that the game ball will flow into both the first flow path and the second flow path, so that the player can focus on the direction in which the game ball flows. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine G2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine G1, the first flow path is capable of allowing gaming balls launched with a launch intensity within a first range included in the specific range to flow down, and the second flow path is capable of allowing gaming balls launched with a launch intensity within a second range included in the specific range and different from the first range to flow down.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G1, gaming machine G2 provides the following effects. That is, gaming balls launched with a launch intensity within a first range included in the specific range can flow down the first flow path. Also, gaming balls launched with a launch intensity within a second range included in the specific range and different from the first range can flow down the second flow path.

This allows the flow path into which the game ball flows to be different depending on whether the game ball is launched with a launch strength within the first range or a launch strength within the second range, so the game ball can flow into the flow path of the player's choice. This has the effect of increasing convenience for the player.

In the gaming machine G2, a third flow path is provided through which a gaming ball launched with a launch strength outside the specific range can flow down and which makes it difficult for the flowing down gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means, a third ball entry means through which a gaming ball that has flowed down the third flow path can enter, a determination means that executes a determination based on the entry of a gaming ball into either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, and a gaming state setting means that sets one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the first gaming state is the second gaming state. The second game state is characterized in that the rate at which game balls that flow down the third flow path enter the third ball entry means is higher than the rate at which game balls that flow down the third flow path enter the second ball entry means, and the variable control means executes a variable game in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times when the specific condition is met when the discrimination means determines that a specific discrimination result has been obtained.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the third flow path is configured so that a gaming ball launched with a launch strength outside a specific range can flow down. A gaming ball that flows down the third flow path can enter the third ball entry means, and has difficulty entering the second ball entry means. A discrimination means performs discrimination based on whether a gaming ball has entered either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a gaming state setting means sets one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. In the first gaming state, the rate at which a gaming ball that flows down the third flow path enters the third ball entry means is higher than the rate at which a gaming ball that flows down the second flow path enters the second ball entry means. In the second game state, the rate at which game balls flowing down the second flow path enter the second ball entry means is higher than the rate at which game balls flowing down the third flow path enter the third ball entry means. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means, a specific condition is established, and a variable game in which the variable means is biased from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable control means.

As a result, in the first game state, the determination means can more efficiently determine the ball by causing the ball to flow down the third flow path, while in the second game state, the determination means can more efficiently determine the ball by causing the ball to flow down the second flow path. This has the effect of allowing the player to enjoy switching the direction in which the ball is launched depending on the game state.

A gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the first ball entry means in the gaming machine G3 is provided at a position where a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path and a gaming ball that has flowed down the third flow path can enter the ball entry means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, the gaming machine G4 has the effect of allowing the player to select a preferred flow path during variable play, since the first ball entry means is provided at a position where the gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path and the gaming ball that has flowed down the third flow path can enter.

A gaming machine G4 is characterized in that it is provided with a suppression means for suppressing the flow of gaming balls down the first flow path so that the period until a gaming ball shot toward the first flow path reaches the first ball entry means is longer than the period until a gaming ball shot toward the third flow path reaches the first ball entry means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G4, gaming machine G5 has the effect that the flow of the gaming ball in the first flow path is suppressed by the suppression means so that the period until a gaming ball shot toward the first flow path reaches the first ball entry means is longer than the period until a gaming ball shot toward the third flow path reaches the first ball entry means. Therefore, for a player who wants the gaming ball to reach the first ball entry means quickly during variable play, the gaming ball can be shot toward the third flow path, while for a player who wants to enjoy variable play for a longer period, the gaming ball can be shot toward the first flow path.

In the gaming machine G5, the launching means is capable of launching game balls at a launching interval equal to or greater than a specific launching interval, and the variable control means includes a first variable control means that changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined number of game balls or more entering the ball entry means after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position during the execution of the variable game, and a second variable control means that changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific period having elapsed since the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position during the execution of the variable game, and the specific period is at least longer than the period from when the launch of game balls toward the first flow path begins until the specific number of game balls launched at the specific launching interval finish flowing down the first flow path.

Gaming machine G6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine G5. That is, the launching means is configured to be able to launch gaming balls at a launching interval equal to or greater than a specific launching interval. During variable play, the first variable control means changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific number or more of gaming balls entering the ball entry means after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. Also, during variable play, the second variable control means changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific period having elapsed since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position. The specific period is configured to be longer than the period from when launching of gaming balls toward the first flow path begins until the specific number of gaming balls launched at the specific launching interval finish flowing down the first flow path.

This has the effect of preventing the variable means from being changed to the first position before a specific number of game balls reach the first ball entry means when game balls are launched into the first flow path, thereby preventing a reduction in the specified bonus that would be awarded if game balls were launched into the first flow path during variable play.

A gaming machine G7, which is one of the gaming machines G4 to G6, is characterized in that the first ball entry means is configured so that, when the variable means is changed to the first position, the proportion of gaming balls that flow down the first flow path entering the ball slot is higher than the proportion of gaming balls that flow down the third flow path.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G4 to G6, the gaming machine G7 has a first ball entry means configured so that when the variable means is set to the first position, the rate at which game balls that flow down the first flow path enter the game is higher than the rate at which game balls that flow down the third flow path enter the game, so that players who do not want to waste balls can aim game balls at the first flow path while a variable game is being played.

A gaming machine G8 is any one of gaming machines G3 to G7, and is provided with a second variable means that can be changed between a third position where the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than the third position, and a control means that controls the second variable means to be changed from the fourth position to the third position based on the establishment of a first condition, and is characterized in that the first gaming state is one in which the first condition is more difficult to establish than the second gaming state.

Gaming machine G8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines G3 to G7. That is, the second variable means is configured to be variable between a third position where the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the third position. Based on the establishment of the first condition, the control means controls the second variable means to be variable from the fourth position to the third position. The first condition is configured to be more difficult to establish in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state.

This has the effect that in the first game state, flowing down the third flow path allows the discrimination means to more reliably and efficiently perform discrimination, while in the second game state, flowing down the second flow path allows the discrimination means to more reliably and efficiently perform discrimination.

<Feature H Group> (Information of the launch direction of the corresponding consumption time according to the mode of the big win performance)
a launching means for launching a game ball; a first flow path through which a game ball launched in a first direction by the launching means can flow; a second flow path through which a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can flow; a specific period setting means for setting a specific period based on the establishment of a first condition; a specific period ending means for ending the specific period based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established when a game ball flows down the first flow path or the second flow path after the specific period is set by the specific period setting means; a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance during the specific period; a type determination means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect as the type of the specific effect to be executed, a suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect that suggests the direction in which a game ball will be launched during the specific period, and a suggestive effect determination means for determining, as the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect execution means, a first suggestive effect that suggests the first direction based on the first specific effect being determined by the type determination means, and for determining a second suggestive effect that suggests the second direction based on the second specific effect being determined.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, have multiple ball entry ports on the surface of the machine. More specifically, some have multiple ball entry ports that are controlled differently when a gaming ball enters the machine, such as a start port that triggers a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a winning state, and a big prize port through which the gaming ball can enter when the machine transitions to a winning state. In such conventional gaming machines, the ball entry port to be aimed at varies depending on the gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy varying the launch direction depending on the gaming state.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, it is necessary to continue firing the gaming ball in a firing direction corresponding to the current gaming state until the gaming state is changed, which causes the game to become monotonous, making it difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

Another possible method would be to provide a specific ball entry port with multiple launch directions for the game ball to enter, and have the player aim for that specific ball entry port in at least one game state. However, there is a problem in that multiple flow paths leading to a specific ball entry port reduce the freedom of the board configuration.

According to the gaming machine H1, a gaming ball launched in a first direction by a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball can flow down a first flow path, and a gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction by the launching means can flow down a second flow path. A specific period is set by a specific period setting means based on the establishment of a first condition, and after the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, the specific period is terminated by a specific period termination means based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established when a gaming ball flows down the first flow path or the second flow path. A specific performance is executed by a specific performance execution means during the specific period. As the type of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means, one type is determined from a plurality of types including at least a first specific performance and a second specific performance different from the first specific performance. During the specific period, a suggestive performance that suggests the launch direction of the gaming ball is executed by a suggestive performance execution means. As the suggestive performance executed by the suggestive performance execution means, a first suggestive performance suggesting a first direction is determined by the suggestive performance determination means based on the first specific performance determined by the type determination means, while a second suggestive performance suggesting a second direction is determined based on the second specific performance determined.

This has the effect of allowing the suggestion effect to suggest an appropriate firing direction depending on the type of specific effect, making it possible to suitably set the effect mode.

A gaming machine H2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H1, it is provided with a ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path and a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, the second condition can be established based on the gaming ball entering the ball entry means, and the second flow path is configured so that it is more likely that the time it takes for the gaming ball that has flowed down to reach the ball entry means will be longer than the first flow path.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H1, gaming machine H2 provides the following effects. That is, a ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path and a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter. The second condition is established based on the gaming ball entering the ball entry means. The second flow path is configured so that it is easier for a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path to take a longer period of time to reach the ball entry means than the first flow path.

As a result, when the second specific performance is decided, the period until the second condition is met can be made relatively long, which has the effect of ensuring a sufficient performance period for executing the second specific performance.

A gaming machine H2, comprising: a variable means for varying between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position; a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means; and the specific period setting means for setting the specific period by considering the start of the variable game execution as the establishment of the first condition.

Gaming machine H3 achieves the following effects in addition to those achieved by gaming machine H2. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position. A determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a variable game is executed by the variable game execution means in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. The start of execution of the variable game is regarded as the establishment of the first condition, and a specific period is set by the specific period setting means.

This has the effect of allowing the presentation style to be appropriately set while variable play is being performed.

Gaming machine H4 is characterized in that, in either gaming machine H2 or H3, the second condition is met when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the ball entry means after the first condition is met.

According to gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of either gaming machine H2 or H3, the second condition is met when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the ball entry means after the first condition is met, so that firing gaming balls in the second direction can extend the period until the second condition is met compared to firing gaming balls in the first direction. This has the effect of ensuring a sufficient presentation period for executing the second specific presentation.

A gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it is equipped with an operation means operable by a player in any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, and an operation effective period setting means for setting an operation effective period during which operation on the operation means is effective during the execution period of the second specific effect when the second specific effect is determined by the type determination means, the second specific effect being configured to have the player select one of a plurality of effect modes according to the operation content on the operation means, and the gaming machine H5 is equipped with a selection effect execution means for executing the one effect mode selected by the player during the execution of the second specific effect based on the establishment of the second condition.

Gaming machine H5 produces the following effect in addition to the effects produced by gaming machines H1 to H4. That is, when the type determination means determines the second specific effect, the operation valid period setting means sets a valid operation period during which operation on the operation means is valid during the execution period of the second specific effect. The second specific effect is configured as an effect in which the player is allowed to select one of a plurality of effect modes according to the operation content on the operation means. Based on the second condition being established, the one effect mode selected by the player during the execution of the second specific effect is executed by the selection effect execution means.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game after the second condition is met, since when the second specific effect is executed, the player can select the effect of choosing the effect that is executed after the second condition is met.

A gaming machine H5, comprising a display means capable of displaying an image, the second specific effect including at least a display mode in which a plurality of images corresponding to each of the plurality of effect modes are displayed on the display means and one of the plurality of images is displayed in a specific display mode, and comprising a mode changing means for changing the image displayed in the specific display mode based on detection of an operation of a first operation content on the operation means during the effective operation period, and an execution setting means for setting the effect mode corresponding to the image displayed in the specific display mode as the effect mode to be executed by the selection effect execution means based on detection of an operation of a second operation content on the operation means during the effective operation period. A gaming machine H6, comprising: a display means for displaying an image corresponding to the image displayed in the specific display mode based on detection of an operation of a second operation content on the operation means during the effective operation period.

Gaming machine H6 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine H5. That is, the second specific effect includes at least a display mode in which a plurality of images corresponding to each of a plurality of effect modes are displayed on the display means, and one of the plurality of images is displayed in a specific mode. Based on the detection of an operation of a first operation content on the operation means during the effective operation period, the image displayed in the specific display mode is changed by the mode changing means. Based on the detection of an operation of a second operation content on the operation means during the effective operation period, the execution setting means sets the effect mode corresponding to the image displayed in the specific display mode as the effect mode to be executed by the selection effect execution means.

This has the effect of allowing the player to easily select images and determine the presentation by varying the operation content of the operating means.

A gaming machine H7 is any one of gaming machines H1 to H4, and is equipped with an operation means operable by a player, and an operation effective period setting means for setting an operation effective period during which an operation on the operation means is effective during the execution period of the second specific effect when the type determination means determines the second specific effect, and the second specific effect includes at least an effect form that prompts a predetermined operation on the operation means.

Gaming machine H7 produces the following effect in addition to the effect produced by any of gaming machines H1 to H4. That is, when the type determination means determines a second specific effect, the operation valid period setting means sets an operation valid period during which an operation on the operation means is valid during the execution period of the second specific effect. The second specific effect is configured to include at least an effect mode that prompts a predetermined operation on the operation means.

This has the effect of encouraging the player to actively operate the operating means while the second specific presentation is being performed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine H8 is characterized by comprising: an operation determination means for determining whether an operation has been performed on the operation means during the operation valid period in gaming machines H5 to H7; and a determination control means for controlling the suggestion effect execution means to determine the first suggestion effect when the operation determination means has not determined that an operation has been performed on the operation means for at least a predetermined number of consecutive operation valid periods.

Gaming machine H8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines H5 to H7. That is, the operation determination means determines whether or not an operation has been performed on the operation means during the operation valid period. When the operation determination means has not determined that an operation has been performed on the operation means for at least a predetermined number of consecutive operation valid periods, the determination control means controls so that the first suggested effect is determined by the suggested effect execution means.

This has the effect of allowing the type of suggestive presentation to be determined taking into account the player's tendency to use the operating means, making it possible to set the presentation style more appropriately.

Gaming machine Z1 is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which is operated to launch a ball into a predetermined gaming area, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card) according to the number of winning balls is given.

Gaming machine Z2 is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the necessary condition being that the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

Gaming machine Z3 is a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8. The basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine that has a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or the passage of a predetermined time, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information, and uses balls as a gaming medium, and is configured to require a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
65a Specific winning hole (ball entry means)
111 Payout control device (benefit giving means)
112 Launch control device (launch means)
700 Detour accessory (part of the second flow path, deceleration means)
S214 Variable game execution means S305 Discrimination means S1008 First variable control means, second variable control means

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a variable pattern, and when a predetermined pattern is displayed stationary, a player is awarded an advantageous winning game. In addition to the patterns, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are implemented to increase the interest of the game .

JP 2003-325886 A

However, there is a demand for further improvement .

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 comprises a main control means for executing main control related to the game, and a slave control means for controlling based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means comprising: a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result; a first output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means to the slave control means; a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of a prescribed acquisition condition; a discrimination information storage means configured to be able to store the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined specific information number until the acquired discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means; and a second output means configured to output a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is established. and second output means, wherein the slave control means comprises signal receiving means configured to be able to receive at least the determination result signal output by the first output means and the determination information signal output by the second output means, first performance execution means for executing a first performance according to a determination result indicated by the received determination result signal, based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means, first execution determination means for determining whether to execute a second performance according to the received determination information signal, based on the reception of the determination information signal by the signal receiving means, and first setting means for setting the execution of the second performance over one or more execution periods of the first performance to be executed after the determination made by the first execution determination means, and the specific information storing means configured to store information until the specific information is set, state setting means for setting a suppression state in which setting of execution of the second performance is suppressed based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition; predetermined processing means for performing a predetermined process according to a predetermined rule all at once on all of the specific information stored in the information storing means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition; means for storing in a predetermined memory area, the predetermined data being a result of the predetermined process, the data being composed of a group of data; termination means for terminating the suppression state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition after the suppression state is set, second execution determination means for determining whether to execute the second performance using the predetermined data stored in the predetermined memory area based on the establishment of the specific condition, and second setting means for setting the execution of the second performance over one or more execution periods of the first performance to be executed after the determination based on the determination made by the second execution determination means. and a stage, wherein the predetermined condition is composed of conditions that can be satisfied at least between the time when the suppression state is set and the time when a determination is made by the second execution determination means, the predetermined data is composed of data capable of at least identifying whether or not the specific information stored in the information storage means includes the specific information based on the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result, the predetermined processing is processing capable of reflecting at least data of a predetermined bit that can be referenced when the specific information that is the subject of the predetermined processing is used for a determination by the first execution determination means, in the predetermined data, and the predetermined processing means is capable of suppressing data corresponding to the predetermined specific information from being reflected in the predetermined memory area as the predetermined data, under a predetermined situation in which the predetermined specific information that cannot be determined to execute the second performance when used for a determination by the first execution determination means is stored in a predetermined area of the information storage means .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the gaming machine is provided with a main control means for executing main control related to the game, and a slave control means for controlling based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means comprising: a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result; a first output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means to the slave control means; a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; a discrimination information storage means configured to be able to store the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined specific information number until the acquired discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means; and a second output means for outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is established. the slave control means comprises signal receiving means configured to be able to receive at least the determination result signal output by the first output means and the determination information signal output by the second output means; first performance execution means for executing a first performance according to a determination result indicated by the received determination result signal, based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means; first execution determination means for determining whether to execute a second performance according to the received determination information signal, based on the reception of the determination information signal by the signal receiving means; first setting means for setting the execution of the second performance over one or more execution periods of the first performance to be executed after the determination made by the first execution determination means; and a state setting means for setting a suppression state in which the setting of the execution of the second performance is suppressed based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition; a predetermined processing means for performing a predetermined process according to a predetermined rule all at once on all of the specific information stored in the information storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition; a means for storing in a predetermined memory area, the predetermined data being a result of the predetermined processing, the data being composed of a group of data; a termination means for terminating the suppression state when the predetermined specific condition is established after the suppression state is set, a second execution determination means for determining whether to execute the second performance using the predetermined data stored in the predetermined memory area when the specific condition is established, and a second setting means for setting the execution of the second performance over one or more execution periods of the first performance to be executed after the determination based on the determination made by the second execution determination means that the second performance is to be executed. the predetermined condition is composed of conditions that can be satisfied at least during the period from when the suppression state is set to when a determination is made by the second execution determination means, the predetermined data is composed of data capable of identifying at least whether or not the specific information stored in the information storage means includes the specific information based on the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result, the predetermined processing is processing capable of reflecting at least data of a predetermined bit that can be referenced when the specific information that is the subject of the predetermined processing is used for a determination by the first execution determination means, in the predetermined data, and the predetermined processing means is capable of suppressing data corresponding to the specific information from being reflected as the predetermined data in the predetermined storage area under a predetermined situation in which the specific information that cannot be determined to execute the second performance when used for a determination by the first execution determination means is stored in a predetermined area of the information storage means .

Gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8. The basic configuration of the combination gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and using balls as gaming media, a predetermined number of balls being required to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and a large number of balls being paid out when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning hole results in a winning. In such gaming machines, a player is awarded a predetermined gaming value by having a gaming ball enter a large winning hole that is opened during the winning state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game with the hope of winning as one of his/her pleasures (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the winning state can sometimes become a matter of simply continuing to fire the gaming ball in a specific direction aiming at the big prize opening, which can make it difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.
This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises a first flow path through which a gaming ball launched in a first direction can flow down, a second flow path through which a gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can flow down, a ball entry means provided at a position where at least a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path and a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and a bonus granting means that grants a predetermined bonus based on a gaming ball entering the ball entry means, and the second flow path is configured so that the period until a gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until a gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1, in which the ball entry means is positioned at a position where the rate at which gaming balls that have flowed down the second flow path enter the ball deposit is higher than the rate at which gaming balls that have flowed down the first flow path enter the ball deposit.
The gaming machine of Technical Idea 3 is the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 1 or 2, further comprising a deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path.
A gaming machine of technical idea 4 is a gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, and is equipped with a variable means that can change the ball entry means between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position, a discrimination means that performs a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a variable game execution means that executes a variable game in which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on the discrimination by the discrimination means resulting in a specific discrimination result.
The gaming machine of technical idea 5 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 4, which is equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls in the first direction and the second direction at a launching interval equal to or greater than a specific launching interval, a first variable control means which, during the execution of the variable game, changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific number or more of gaming balls having entered the ball entry means since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position, and a second variable control means which, during the execution of the variable game, changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific period having elapsed since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position, wherein the specific period is at least longer than the period from the start of the launch of gaming balls in the second direction to the end of the specific number of gaming balls launched in the second direction at the specific launching interval flowing down the second flow path.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the gaming machine is equipped with a first flow path through which a gaming ball launched in a first direction can flow down, a second flow path through which a gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can flow down, a ball entry means provided at a position where at least a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path and a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and a bonus granting means that grants a predetermined bonus based on a gaming ball entering the ball entry means, and the second flow path is configured so that the period until a gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until a gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the ball entry means is positioned at a position where the rate at which gaming balls that have flowed down the second flow path enter the ball entry hole is higher than the rate at which gaming balls that have flowed down the first flow path enter the ball entry hole.
As a result, when the game ball flows down the first flow path, the time it takes to reach the ball entry means is shorter, but it becomes more difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, when the game ball flows down the second flow path, the ball becomes easier to enter the ball entry means, but the time it takes to reach the ball entry means is longer. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select the launch direction that suits his or her preference.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines described in Technical Idea 1 or 2, a deceleration means is provided for decelerating the flow speed of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path, so that the period until a gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means can be more reliably made longer than the period until a gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, the gaming machine is equipped with a variable means that can change the ball entry means between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position, a discrimination means that performs a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a variable game execution means that executes a variable game in which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means.
This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game in the hope that a specific determination result will be obtained by the determination means.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 4, the gaming machine is equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls in the first direction and the second direction at a launching interval equal to or greater than a specific launching interval, a first variable control means which, during the execution of the variable game, changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific number or more of gaming balls having entered the ball entry means since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position, and a second variable control means which, during the execution of the variable game, changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific period having elapsed since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position, wherein the specific period is at least longer than the period from the start of the launch of gaming balls in the second direction to the end of the specific number of gaming balls launched in the second direction at the specific launching interval flowing down the second flow path.
This has the effect of preventing the player from suffering losses since, when game balls are shot in the second direction during execution of a variable game, a specific number of game balls can be made to enter the ball entry means before the specific period has elapsed.

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
100 Substrate box (storage means)
110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Voice and lamp control device (slave control means)
223a Winning information storage area (information storage means)
S214 : Bonus game execution means S305: Determination means
S310 Part of the first output means
S406: Discrimination information acquisition means
S407 Advance specification means
S408 Part of the second output means, discrimination information signal generating means
S901 Part of the first output means, part of the second output means
S4111 signal receiving means
S4301 bit setting means
S4311 Status setting means
S4405 Predetermined processing means
S4406 to S4408: Information determination means, first execution determination means, first setting means
S4411 Second execution determination means
S4412, S4414: second performance execution means, second setting means
S4505 first performance execution means

Claims (5)

A first flow path through which a game ball launched in a first direction can flow;
A second flow path through which the game balls launched in a second direction different from the first direction can flow down;
A ball entry means provided at a position where at least the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball;
and a bonus awarding means for awarding a predetermined bonus based on the game ball entering the ball entry means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second flow path is configured so that the period it takes for a gaming ball launched in the second direction to reach the ball entry means is longer than the period it takes for a gaming ball launched in the first direction to reach the ball entry means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that the ball entry means is disposed at a position where the proportion of game balls that flow down the second flow path entering the ball is higher than the proportion of game balls that flow down the first flow path entering the ball. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that it is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path. A variable means for varying the ball entry means between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position;
A determination means for performing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A gaming machine as described in any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that it is further equipped with a variable game execution means which executes a variable game in which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on a specific judgment result obtained by the judgment means. A launching means capable of launching game balls in the first direction and the second direction at a launch interval equal to or greater than a specific launch interval;
a first variable control means for varying the variable means to the second position based on a fact that a predetermined number of game balls or more have entered the ball entry means since the variable means has been varied from the second position to the first position during the variable game;
and a second variable control means for varying the variable means to the second position based on the lapse of a predetermined specific period of time after the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position during the variable game,
The gaming machine described in claim 4, characterized in that the specific period is at least longer than the period from the start of the launch of gaming balls in the second direction to the end of the specific number of gaming balls launched in the second direction at the specific launch interval flowing down the second flow path.

Images